AUTODESK REVIT BUILDING 8.

1
®

Metric Tutorial

August 2005

Copyright © 2005 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state cation, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University (logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Codec Central, Combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet, EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG, ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual TugBoat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3ds max, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk Map, Autodesk Streamline, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, Buzzsaw.com, Cinestream, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, IntroDV, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, ProjectPoint, Reactor, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.

Autodesk Canada Inc. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, backdraft, Multi-Master Editing.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. International CorrectSpell ™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield ™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE ® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin." Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts ............................................................................................... 1
Understanding the Basics ................................................................................................................................. 2 Navigating the Revit Building User Interface ............................................................................................. 4

Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .................................................................................. 11
Creating Your First Building Model ............................................................................................................... 12 Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing ................................................................ 12 Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing ............................................................................................ 24 Dimensioning the Building Model ........................................................................................................... 32 Adding Doors and Windows ..................................................................................................................... 41 Adding Floors and Floor Openings ........................................................................................................... 58 Adding a Roof and Ceiling ........................................................................................................................ 74 Adding Multi-Level Stairs .......................................................................................................................... 80 Creating the East Wing and Passageway .................................................................................................. 87 Scheduling the Building Model .............................................................................................................. 100 Rendering the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 104 Documenting the Building Model .......................................................................................................... 106

Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .......................................................................... 113
Modifying System Settings ........................................................................................................................... 114 Modifying General System Options ........................................................................................................ 114 Specifying File Locations ......................................................................................................................... 115 Specifying Spelling Options .................................................................................................................... 117 Modifying Snap Settings ......................................................................................................................... 118 Modifying Project Settings ........................................................................................................................... 120 Creating and Applying Materials ............................................................................................................ 120 Creating and Applying Fill Patterns ........................................................................................................ 123 Controlling Object Styles ........................................................................................................................ 125 Modifying Line Patterns and Styles ........................................................................................................ 128 Modifying Annotations ........................................................................................................................... 131 Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options ........................ 133 Modifying Project Browser Organization ............................................................................................... 134 Creating an Office Template ........................................................................................................................ 136 Choosing the Base Template ................................................................................................................... 137 Modifying Project Settings ...................................................................................................................... 137 Loading and Modifying Families and Groups ........................................................................................ 142 Modifying Views and View Templates ................................................................................................... 144 Modifying Render Scene Settings ........................................................................................................... 147 Modifying Import/Export Settings .......................................................................................................... 148 Setting up Shared and Project Parameters .............................................................................................. 149 Creating Named Print Settings ............................................................................................................... 151

Chapter 4 Ceilings ............................................................................................................................... 153
Creating Ceilings .......................................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Automatic Ceilings ................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Compound Ceilings ................................................................................................................. 156

Chapter 5 Openings ............................................................................................................................ 159
Cutting Roof Openings ................................................................................................................................ 160 Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof ..................................................................................................... 160 Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening ................................................................................................. 164

Contents | i

Creating a Vertical Roof Opening ........................................................................................................... 167 Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings ................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Floor ............................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling ............................................................................................................ 173 Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool .............................................................................................. 174

Chapter 6 Railings ............................................................................................................................... 177
Creating Railings .......................................................................................................................................... 178 Creating the Railing Layout .................................................................................................................... 178 Adjusting Railing Parameters .................................................................................................................. 180

Chapter 7 Roofs ................................................................................................................................... 185
Creating Roofs .............................................................................................................................................. 186 Creating an Extruded Roof ...................................................................................................................... 186 Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................. 190 Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint ............................................................... 192 Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint .................................................................................................... 194 Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................... 197 Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof ...................................................................................................... 199 Aligning Roof Eaves ................................................................................................................................ 201 Creating a Mansard Roof ........................................................................................................................ 202 Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits ............................................................................................................ 204 Creating Roof Fascia ................................................................................................................................ 204 Creating Gutters ...................................................................................................................................... 205 Creating Soffits ........................................................................................................................................ 206

Chapter 8 Stairs .................................................................................................................................. 209
Creating Stairs .............................................................................................................................................. 210 Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run ........................................................................................................ 210 Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run ..................................................................................................... 215 Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs .......................................................................................... 221 Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings .................................................................................................... 224 Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run .................................................................................................. 231 Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run ............................................................................................ 236 Working with the Stair Calculator .......................................................................................................... 241

Chapter 9 Walls .................................................................................................................................. 247
Creating Walls .............................................................................................................................................. 248 Sketching Walls ....................................................................................................................................... 248 Working with Compound Walls ............................................................................................................ 258 Working with Vertically Compound Walls ............................................................................................ 266 Joining Walls to Floors ............................................................................................................................ 276 Working with Foundation Walls ............................................................................................................ 278 Working with Wall Wraps ...................................................................................................................... 281 Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments ....................................................................................... 283

Chapter 10 Curtain Systems ................................................................................................................ 287
Flat Curtain System ...................................................................................................................................... 288 Creating an Entrance .............................................................................................................................. 288 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System  ................................................................................................ 296 Curved Curtain System ................................................................................................................................ 299 Adding a Curved Curtain System  .......................................................................................................... 299 Adding a Custom Curtain Panel ............................................................................................................. 301 Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel  ...................................................................................... 304 Additional Curtain Systems ......................................................................................................................... 307 Sloped Glazings  ...................................................................................................................................... 307 Storefront System  ................................................................................................................................... 308 Curtain System by Lines  ........................................................................................................................ 311

Chapter 11 Creating Drawings ............................................................................................................ 315
Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project ........................................................................................................... 316 Creating a Drawing Sheet ....................................................................................................................... 316 Adding a Sheet to the Project .................................................................................................................. 323 Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet .......................................................................................... 324

ii | Contents

Creating New Views to Add to Sheets ..................................................................................................... 326 Using Legends .............................................................................................................................................. 333 Creating a Symbol Legend ...................................................................................................................... 333 Creating a Wall Type Legend .................................................................................................................. 335 Using a Legend View to Match Types ..................................................................................................... 337 Using Revision Tracking ............................................................................................................................... 339 Setting Up a Revision Table .................................................................................................................... 339 Sketching Revision Clouds ...................................................................................................................... 340 Tagging Revision Clouds ......................................................................................................................... 341 Working with Revisions .......................................................................................................................... 342

Chapter 12 Detailing ............................................................................................................................. 345
Creating a Detail from a Building Model ..................................................................................................... 346 Creating a Callout View .......................................................................................................................... 346 Detailing the View .................................................................................................................................. 350 Adding Detail Lines ................................................................................................................................. 356 Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation ................................................................................................... 359 Adding Break Lines ................................................................................................................................. 360 Adding Text Notes ................................................................................................................................... 363 Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views ......................................................... 364 Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View ............................................................................ 364 Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View ........................................................................................ 366 Creating a Drafted Detail ............................................................................................................................. 369 Creating a Drafting View ........................................................................................................................ 369 Creating a Detail in the Drafting View ................................................................................................... 369 Importing a Detail into a Drafting View ................................................................................................. 376 Creating a Reference Callout .................................................................................................................. 379

Chapter 13 Scheduling ......................................................................................................................... 381
Creating Type and Instance Schedules ........................................................................................................ 382 Creating a Window Schedule .................................................................................................................. 382 Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams ..................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Schedule ...................................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Color Diagram ............................................................................................................ 394 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes ....................................................................................................... 396 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions ..................................................................... 396 Scheduling Shared Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 401 Creating a Multi-Category Schedule ....................................................................................................... 401 Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules ...................................................................................................... 406 Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter ............................................................................... 406 Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula ............................................................................ 408 Scheduling Project Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 409 Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters ............................................................................... 410 Exporting Project Information with ODBC ................................................................................................. 411 Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access ............................................................................ 411

Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning ......................................................................................... 413
Setting the Base Elevation of a Project ......................................................................................................... 414 Setting the Base Elevation of a House ..................................................................................................... 414 Dimensioning ............................................................................................................................................... 416 Creating Dimensions .............................................................................................................................. 417 Controlling Witness Line Location ........................................................................................................ 422 Modifying Dimension Properties ............................................................................................................ 425 Working with Alignments and Constraints ........................................................................................... 426 Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions ......................................................................................... 432 Annotating ................................................................................................................................................... 434 Creating Angular Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 434 Sequentially Tagging Rooms ................................................................................................................... 435 Tagging Doors and Windows .................................................................................................................. 437

Chapter 15 Viewing .............................................................................................................................. 441
Viewing a Building Model ............................................................................................................................ 442 Exploring the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 442 Creating a Perspective View with a Camera ........................................................................................... 445

Contents | iii

Creating a Section View .......................................................................................................................... 451 Creating Elevation Views ........................................................................................................................ 453 Controlling Fill Pattern Colors ..................................................................................................................... 455 Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material ..................................................................................... 455 Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type ................................................................... 457 Creating a View Plan Region ........................................................................................................................ 459 Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan ................................................................................................... 459

Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .............................................................. 463
Rendering an Exterior View ......................................................................................................................... 464 Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model ....................................................................... 464 Adding Trees to the Site .......................................................................................................................... 468 Creating a Perspective View .................................................................................................................... 470 Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View ............................................................................................. 473 Rendering an Interior View .......................................................................................................................... 476 Adding RPC People ................................................................................................................................. 476 Creating the Interior Perspective View ................................................................................................... 478 Creating a New Render Scene ................................................................................................................. 481 Defining Daylights and Rendering the View .......................................................................................... 482 Creating and Recording Walkthroughs ....................................................................................................... 484 Creating a Walkthrough ......................................................................................................................... 484 Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position ........................................................................ 487 Recording the Walkthrough ................................................................................................................... 489

Chapter 17 Presentation Views ........................................................................................................... 491
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique ............................................................................................... 492 Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique .............................................................................................. 492 Using Advanced Model Graphics ............................................................................................................ 494 Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet ............................................................................................................ 496 Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique .............................................................................................. 499 Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique ................................................................................... 500 Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet .......................................................... 502 Adding Section Views to the Analytique ..................................................................................................... 504 Preparing a Section View for the Analytique .......................................................................................... 505 Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View ............................................................................... 509 Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique ............................................................................... 510 Working with a Presentation View Template ......................................................................................... 514 Working in a Callout Analytique ............................................................................................................ 517 Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes .................................................................................................. 524 Creating Cutaway Isometric Views ......................................................................................................... 525 Creating Cutaway Perspective Views ...................................................................................................... 531 Annotating the Analytique ..................................................................................................................... 536

Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor ........................................................................... 539
Using Families and the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to Families ......................................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 542

Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .................................................................. 545
Creating a Door Family ................................................................................................................................ 546 Drawing the Door Plan View Components ............................................................................................ 546 Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry ................................................................................................. 550 Assigning Materials to the Door Components ....................................................................................... 553 Defining New Door Types ....................................................................................................................... 556 Creating a Window Family .......................................................................................................................... 558 Specifying the New Window Parameters ................................................................................................ 559 Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry ........................................................................................ 560 Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry ........................................................................................... 566 Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry .......................................................................................... 569 Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 574 Assigning Materials to the Window Components ................................................................................. 584 Defining New Window Types ................................................................................................................. 587 Creating a Furniture Family ......................................................................................................................... 591 Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters ......................................................................................... 592

iv | Contents

Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 597 Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 600 Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry ..................................................................................................... 609 Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 614 Defining New Furniture Types ................................................................................................................ 617 Creating a Baluster Family ........................................................................................................................... 619 Drawing a Baluster .................................................................................................................................. 619 Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run .............................................................................................. 621 Creating Profile Families .............................................................................................................................. 623 Drawing a Sweep Profile .......................................................................................................................... 623 Drawing a Rail Profile ............................................................................................................................. 624 Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile ................................................................................................................ 624 Drawing a Reveal Profile ......................................................................................................................... 625 Drawing a Host Sweep Profile ................................................................................................................. 626 Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path ................................................................................................... 627 Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls .................................................................................................. 629 Creating a Room Tag .................................................................................................................................... 631 Specifying Room Tag Parameters ............................................................................................................ 631 Creating an Annotation Symbol .................................................................................................................. 633 Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol ............................................................................ 633 Adding the New North Arrow to a Project ............................................................................................. 636 Creating a Titleblock Family ........................................................................................................................ 636 Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet ............................................................................................... 637 Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock .............................................................................................. 640 Adding the Titleblock to a New Project .................................................................................................. 649 Creating In-Place Families ............................................................................................................................ 650 Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family ............................................................................................... 651 Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family .......................................................................................... 658

Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques ................................................................. 661
Planning a Parametric Component Family .................................................................................................. 662 Determining Component Needs ............................................................................................................. 662 Selecting the Family Template ................................................................................................................ 663 Creating the Component Skeleton .............................................................................................................. 665 Adding Reference Planes ......................................................................................................................... 666 Adding Dimensions and Constraints ...................................................................................................... 671 Creating New Length Parameters ........................................................................................................... 674 Flexing the Component Model ............................................................................................................... 678 Adding Solid Geometry ................................................................................................................................ 680 Creating Solid Extrusions ........................................................................................................................ 680 Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry ............................................................................................ 682 Creating Additional Solid Geometry ...................................................................................................... 685 Testing the Family in a Project ..................................................................................................................... 693 Loading a Family into a Project .............................................................................................................. 693 Testing a Family Instance in a Project .................................................................................................... 694 Working with Nested Subcomponents ........................................................................................................ 697 Adding a Nested Component ................................................................................................................. 698 Creating Formula-controlled Parameters ................................................................................................ 702 Arraying Nested Subcomponents ............................................................................................................ 706 Reloading a Family into a Project ........................................................................................................... 711 Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters ..................................................................................... 712 Creating and Applying Subcategories ..................................................................................................... 713 Creating Material Parameters .................................................................................................................. 717 Controlling Component Visibility ............................................................................................................... 719 Assigning Detail Level and View Controls .............................................................................................. 719 Creating Component Types ......................................................................................................................... 722 Creating Multiple Component Types ..................................................................................................... 722 Creating Conditional Formulas .............................................................................................................. 723

Chapter 21 Area Analysis ..................................................................................................................... 725
Using Area Analysis Tools ............................................................................................................................ 726 Creating Area Schemes and Plans ........................................................................................................... 726 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans ................................................................................. 732

Contents | v

Chapter 22 Massing ............................................................................................................................... 735
Using Massing Tools ..................................................................................................................................... 736 Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model ...................................................................................... 736 Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model .......................................................... 741 Using Mass Family Files in a Project  ........................................................................................................... 743 Creating New Mass Family Types  .......................................................................................................... 743 Loading and Placing New Mass Families ................................................................................................ 744 Joining Mass Elements ............................................................................................................................ 747 Using Mass Elements with Design Options ................................................................................................. 750 Mass Elements in Design Options .......................................................................................................... 750 Creating Building Components from Mass Elements ................................................................................. 752 Creating Walls by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 753 Creating Floors by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 755 Creating Roofs by Picking Faces .............................................................................................................. 759 Creating Curtain Systems  ...................................................................................................................... 761 Editing Elements Created from Massings ............................................................................................... 763 Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility ............................................................................................................ 768

Chapter 23 Site ..................................................................................................................................... 771
Using Site Tools ............................................................................................................................................ 772 Creating a Toposurface ........................................................................................................................... 772 Adding Property Lines ............................................................................................................................. 777 Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings ...................................................................................... 781 Creating Topographic Subregions ........................................................................................................... 783 Grading the Toposurface ......................................................................................................................... 788 Adding a Building Pad ............................................................................................................................ 793 Adding Site Components ........................................................................................................................ 795 Tagging Site and Parking Components .................................................................................................. 798 Creating Parking Space Schedules ........................................................................................................... 799

Chapter 24 Grouping ............................................................................................................................ 801
Creating Groups ........................................................................................................................................... 802 Creating a Group ..................................................................................................................................... 802 Placing a Group ....................................................................................................................................... 803 Modifying a Group .................................................................................................................................. 804 Creating Nested Groups ............................................................................................................................... 805 Creating a Nested Group ......................................................................................................................... 806 Modifying a Nested Group ...................................................................................................................... 807 Working with Groups .................................................................................................................................. 809 Duplicating a Group ............................................................................................................................... 809 Creating a Detail Group .......................................................................................................................... 812 Using Attached Detail Groups ................................................................................................................ 813 Saving and Loading Groups .................................................................................................................... 815 Automatically Creating a Group ............................................................................................................. 816

Chapter 25 Structural .......................................................................................................................... 819
Adding Structural Walls ............................................................................................................................... 820 Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay .............................................................................................. 820 Sketching Structural Walls ...................................................................................................................... 821 Dimensioning and Modifying Walls ...................................................................................................... 830 Adding Structural Columns and Beams ....................................................................................................... 833 Adding Structural Columns .................................................................................................................... 834 Adding Structural Beams and Girders ..................................................................................................... 838 Adding Joists and Purlins ........................................................................................................................ 848 Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels .................................................................................................. 854 Defining New Levels ............................................................................................................................... 855 Duplicating the Existing Design ............................................................................................................. 856 Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation ......................................................................................................... 858 Creating a Framing Elevation ................................................................................................................. 858 Adding Structural Braces ......................................................................................................................... 860

Chapter 26 Sharing Projects ................................................................................................................ 865
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 866

vi | Contents

Using Worksharing in a Project ................................................................................................................... 866 Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals .......................................................................................... 866 Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets ................................................................................... 869 Working Individually with Worksets ..................................................................................................... 873 Using Worksets with Multiple Users ....................................................................................................... 876 Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users ......................................................................... 881

Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options .................................................................................. 885
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project ............................................................................................ 886 Creating the Structural Design Options ................................................................................................. 886 Creating the Roof System Design Options ............................................................................................. 896 Managing Design Options ...................................................................................................................... 903

Chapter 28 Project Phasing ................................................................................................................. 909
Using Phasing ............................................................................................................................................... 910 Phasing Your Model ................................................................................................................................ 910 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags ............................................................................................................. 915

Chapter 29 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates ....................................................... 919
Linking Building Models .............................................................................................................................. 920 Linking Building Models from Different Project Files ............................................................................ 920 Repositioning Linked Building Models ................................................................................................... 928 Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility ........................................................................................ 931 Managing Linked Building Models ......................................................................................................... 933 Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models ........................................................................................... 935 Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates ................................................................................................... 935 Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates ........................................................................................ 937 Scheduling Components of Linked Files ................................................................................................ 941 Working with a Linked Building Model ................................................................................................. 943 Managing Shared Locations .................................................................................................................... 944

Contents | vii

viii | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit Building. You learn how Revit Building works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface.

In the lesson that follows, you learn many of the important features in Revit Building that contribute to a user-friendly design environment, enhanced productivity, and faster construction documents. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Building is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, and how to navigate the user interface.

1

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Building is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work.

What is Autodesk Revit Building?
The Revit Building platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Building model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Building collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Building parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Building provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Building: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Building coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Autodesk Revit Building keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Building immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Building uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Building uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum. This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Building elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Building. Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings. Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce your documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together. In Revit Building, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Autodesk Revit Building terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Building are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Building, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Building. The first term you need to know is "project." In Revit Building, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design,

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Building makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Another important term to understand is "level". Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

When creating your project, you add Revit Building parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Building classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements. A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model. Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Most families are component family files, which means you can load them into your project and create them from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Other families are called system families. These families, which include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Revit Building predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects. Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Understanding the Basics | 3

Autodesk Revit Building terms

Navigating the Revit Building User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Building is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Building window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Building uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Building is much easier. In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

The Title Bar
2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template that the project is based on.

The Menu Bar
3 On the View menu, click Zoom.

The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File, Edit, and View. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. You then click the command name to run the command. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. TIP For example, the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZX. While working in the drawing area, you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected.

The Toolbar
4 On the Window menu, click Toolbar.

There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar.

The Options Bar
5 On the Modelling menu, click Wall. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options.

Understanding the Basics | 5

The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. 6 On the Modelling menu, click Door. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. On the left side of the Options Bar, notice a door type is specified.

The Type Selector
7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors.

The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. If you select the Door tool, the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.

8 On the Modelling menu, click Wall.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

9 In the Type Selector, notice the list of walls that are available. You use the Type Selector in two ways. First, you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. For example, if you intend to add a door, the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. Within the drawing area, you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector.

The Design Bar
10 On the Window menu, click Design Bars. The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed.

The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface, immediately below the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar, containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box. 11 Click OK. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu.
■ ■ ■ ■

Basics tab—includes commands for creating most basic building model components. View tab—commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab—all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab—commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab—commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab—commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab—commands for executing conceptual massing commands Area Analysis tab—commands for making area schemes and plans Structural tab—commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab—includes commands for creating construction industry information

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

To access the commands within a tab, click the tab, and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu.

Understanding the Basics | 7

The Project Browser
12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser, select Views (all).

You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views, schedules, sheets, reports, families, and groups of your current project. You can right-click in the browser to add, delete, and rename views, families, and groups. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans, elevations, 3D), family category (doors, walls, windows), and group name. You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. To open a view, double-click the name. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area, making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. The browser is also dockable, so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. 13 In the Type Selector, scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.

8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

14 On the Settings menu, click Browser Organization. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. After you create a browser organization scheme, you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog box, click Cancel.

The Status Bar
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. 17 Place your cursor near the center of the drawing area. Do not click.

Understanding the Basics | 9

Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. When you place the cursor over a component. in conjunction with Tooltips. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. Click the Help button. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Building Help window. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. Autodesk Revit Building Help 21 On the Help menu. find a keyword on the Index tab. Windows: From any window. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. regarding selected components within a view. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. click Autodesk Revit Help. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. You can also press SHIFT+F1. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. The Status Bar also provides information. 20 Press TAB. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Building session. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. 10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts ." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. You can use this tri-pane. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. In the Status Bar. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. click Modify. If there is no Help button displayed. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. It highlights when the cursor is over it. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons.In the bottom left corner of the window. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. 18 On the Design Bar. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. There are several tools that help you find information. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. In this case. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. click . press F1 to get the topic associated with the window.

Because the design process in Revit Building is extremely flexible. Therefore. Understanding the Concepts.including all windows. If you have not already done so. all views and schedules instantly update. and fundamental concepts before creating your first building model. and a roof . and then add the passageway between them. you create the shell of the west wing . The building model you create consists of an east wing and a west wing joined by a curtain wall passageway.Creating Your First Building Model 2 This tutorial is designed to familiarize you with the basic concepts and methods of creating a building model using Autodesk Revit Building. For training purposes. before proceeding further. you learn about the Revit Building parametric capabilities and ease of use.mirror it to create the east wing. doors. This tutorial is designed to teach concepts as well as methods. review the tutorial. You should understand the user interface. For learning purposes. stairs. 11 . While creating your first building information model. the design process might differ in a real-world scenario. floors. you can normally use various means to accomplish identical tasks. this tutorial uses a diversity of methods whenever possible. As you make design changes throughout this tutorial. common terms.

expand Elevations. you begin with a project file based on a simple template to which you add several new levels. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Add new levels 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). You then apply the new wall type to the existing walls. Notice that Level 1 and Level 2 are already defined. After sketching the walls. you can. you render the model and document the project by adding schedules and views to sheets. you add and modify doors and windows. you sketch the exterior walls of the west wing.rvt located in the Metric folder. Using the mirror tool. After adding dimensions. When you create walls. at a later time. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Finally. Minor modifications have been made for training purposes. you create a new wall type with multiple wall sweeps and reveals. NOTE The dataset for this tutorial was created using the default template. and a roof. you define the levels first so that you can set the top constraint when you first create the walls. 12 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise. and then add the passageway between them. Open m_First_Project. you can assign the wall height to a level or a specific value. ceilings.Creating Your First Building Model In this lesson. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You then sketch the exterior and interior walls of the west wing. modify. If you sketch the walls with the top constraint specifying a height. click Level. you use the west wing to create the east wing. As you design the walls. stairs. You can add and modify levels at any time during the design process. and apply new wall types. click Open. you create. You then add sketched components such as floors. In this exercise. and double-click North. reassign the top constraint to a specific level.

When you click Modify. 5 Click Level 2 to create level 3 at the designated offset above it. 8 Select Level 4. 9 Click directly on the Level 4 text. it toggles to 2D. notice that a floor plan and ceiling plan have been created for Level 3. ■ ■ Enter 4000 mm for Offset. the extents of the other level lines adopt the same change. In the Project Browser. provided those datums also have the 3D model extent control. This means that if you drag the control to resize the datum extent. This means that changes to the extents are applied only to the active view. With the 3D designation. it changes the extent of that datum in all other parallel views. Verify that Make Plan View is selected 4 Move the cursor over Level 2 and notice the prospective new level displays above it. this indicates that you can select and edit the values. click Modify. notice the following: ■ There is a control titled 3D that displays at the ends of the datum. ■ Select . In this view. ■ ■ 6 Click Level 3 to add Level 4. You can also use the ESC key to accomplish this. When you select Level 4. the datum is in model extent mode. The left and right extents of the new level are aligned and locked to the levels below. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This allows you to create a new level by picking an existing line and applying an offset. This means that if you move the extents of one level line.3 On the Options Bar. the level name and height value displays with the color blue. If you click the 3D control. it terminates the command in progress. Creating Your First Building Model | 13 .

or scroll the 10 Enter Roof and press ENTER. tool on the toolbar. 11 Click Yes to rename corresponding views. North. 12 In the Project Browser. because the east wing is a mirror image of the west wing. and South elevation views. 14 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and a curtain glass passageway connecting the two wings. In the steps that follow. Theoretically. the floor plan would resemble the following illustration. TIP The Level 4 ceiling plan view has also been renamed to Roof. In such a case. In this view.TIP You may need to zoom in to accomplish this. However. This process reduces the amount of repetitive work and ensures consistency between each wing. double-click Level 1. right-click in the drawing area and use the zoom tools on the context menu. there are four elevation symbols. you could begin the model by simply sketching the exterior walls and then continuing the design process from that point. Sketch the exterior walls 13 This building model consists of an east wing. mirroring it to create the east wing. use the wheel on your mouse. West. which define the East. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. notice that the name of the Level 4 floor plan is changed to Roof. you can take advantage of the parametric capabilities of Revit Building by designing the majority of the west wing. You can use the zoom tools located on the View menu. a west wing. and then designing the passageway to connect the two. you create the exterior walls of only the west wing.

This means that each view is infinite. select Basic Wall: Exterior . A solid line with two drag handles displays on the West elevation symbol.Brick on CMU. click Wall. For training purposes. Make sure you click the arrow and not the round part of the symbol. do not turn on the far clip planes at this time. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. West. NOTE The far clip plane for the East. The name of the elevation view is displayed in a tooltip or in the status bar at the bottom of the drawing window. Later in this tutorial. click the Elevation: West symbol. 16 In the drawing area. 18 In the Type Selector. TIP You can turn off the visibility of the elevation symbols by using the Visibility/Graphics command found on the View menu. and South elevation views are inactive. Do not click the symbol. You can activate the far clip plane in the element properties dialog box of each respective view. you use this command to modify the view. The drag handles control the left and right clip planes of the elevation view. North.15 Move the cursor over the left elevation symbol and then over the elevation arrow. Creating Your First Building Model | 15 .

vertical wall of the rectangle. TIP From the Settings ➤ Temporary Dimensions menu. you can flip the wall orientation. TIP If necessary. Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line. 16 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Modify. This is a temporary dimension. 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. . Temporary dimensions are primarily sketching aids. 24 On the View toolbar. Select the drawing tool. By clicking the arrows.000 mm wide and 24. you can control the default witness line location for temporary dimensions and save the settings to the project. You can click the temporary dimension value and modify it. select the four walls by dragging a selection box around them. 22 Select the left. Click the arrows a second time to return the exterior face to the outside of the rectangle. and flip arrows display on the exterior face of the wall. ■ 20 Sketch the rectangle by clicking the upper left corner to specify the rectangle starting point. The selected wall is red. 23 Click the arrows once to set the exterior face of the wall on the inside of the rectangle. specify the following options: ■ ■ Specify Roof for Height. Move the cursor down and to the right until the rectangle is 12.000 mm long. as shown. and click to complete the rectangle.19 In the Options Bar. make sure you sketch the rectangle just to the right of the west elevation symbol. Because the west wing is later mirrored to the right. click . Also notice the dimension that displays. and use the directional arrows on your keyboard to move them into position as shown above.

You do not need to enter 12000 mm. you can use these handles to modify the height or depth of the wall. The blue dots at the base of the wall are drag handles that allow you to modify the length of the wall. notice the shape handles (arrows) on top and bottom of the wall. 26 Drag the wall to the right as shown and release the mouse button when the width of the rectangle is approximately double the original size. you can enter 12000 and press ENTER. TIP When entering a value. you do not need to type the metric suffix. Notice that temporary dimensions also display in 3D views. 27 Click the temporary dimension value and reset the rectangle width to 12000 mm. For example. Creating Your First Building Model | 17 .25 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right. In addition.

click Zoom in Region. click Modify. 31 On the View Control Bar located at the bottom-left corner of the frame. This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit. click the Model Graphics Style control.28 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area and. and click Hidden Line. 32 On the keyboard. and click Shading with Edges. When a surface pattern becomes too dense. Notice that the brick surface pattern becomes solid fill after you zoom to fit. The brick surface pattern displays. click the Model Graphics Style control. 30 On the Design Bar. 18 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . including the brick surface pattern displays. 29 Draw a region around the corner. it is displayed as solid fill. Notice the material settings. enter ZF. Notice the wall remains selected. as shown. 33 On the View Control Bar.

any changes made to the type parameters would be applied to all components of the same type. you would click Edit/New to access the type parameters. You can then make changes to the type parameters without inadvertently modifying the components of the original type. However. Creating Your First Building Model | 19 . which control the selected component or components. In the upper half of the dialog box. if you changed the Top Offset of the wall. which control all components of the same type. For example. it has no effect on components that are not selected. and then apply it to the remaining walls. only the wall that you selected would change. In the steps that follow. you add horizontal sweeps of soldier course brick to the wall structure. If you change an instance parameter. if you wanted to modify the wall structure. you can see the list of type parameters. If your intent is to modify only the structure of the selected component. The lower half of the dialog box contains the instance parameters. You could then make changes to the wall structure as needed. To accomplish this. you should click Duplicate to create a new component type. you cannot modify them within this dialog box.Create and apply new wall type 34 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right as shown. 35 On the Options Bar. For example. Although you can scroll through the list of type parameters. The Element Properties dialog box displays the parameters of the selected component. modify it. click . you create a new wall type.

36 In the Element Properties dialog box. but you should specify a value high enough to allow you to create the desired wall structure. You can specify the sample height to any value you want. The sample height does not determine the height of any walls in the project. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. 41 In the lower left corner of the Edit Assembly dialog box. the original wall type must remain unchanged.Brick on CMU with Soldier Course. enter the new wall name. 20 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . under the Value column for Structure. 40 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. and click OK. For training purposes. The sample height is the height of the wall in the preview pane. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. 38 In the Name dialog box. Exterior . Therefore. you must create a new wall type before altering the wall structure. click Edit/New. click Edit. enter 13500 for Sample Height. click Preview.

and click OK. Make sure the offset is a negative number.Notice that the vertical structure tools are inactive. Click inside the Material field. click Add.Brick Soldier Course. Enter -50. This should be the interior finish layer. 45 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. click Sweeps. In the Materials dialog box. 47 Right-click in the preview area and click Zoom in Region from the context menu. Notice the vertical structure tools are now active. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. When you select a layer. select Masonry . Creating Your First Building Model | 21 . 44 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. select layer 9. under Name.0 mm for Offset. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. Verify that Base is selected for From. select Section: Modify type attributes. make the following modifications: ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. 43 Under Modify Vertical Structure. ■ ■ ■ ■ 46 Click OK. This is because the preview is displaying a plan view. for View. 48 Draw a region around the soldier course. 42 Under the preview pane. the corresponding layer is highlighted in the preview area. 49 Under Layers.

and click OK. 51 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. 55 In the Reveals dialog box. Select Masonry . Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. Add reveals 54 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click Add. 22 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 57 Click Apply. 56 Specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. click Reveals. 52 For the second wall sweep. 58 Click Add. Verify that Base is selected for From. Enter -50 mm for Offset. Enter 8000 mm for Distance.Brick Soldier Course for Material. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. Select Flip. under Modify Vertical Structure. Verify that the Offset is zero. Verify that Base is selected for From. Make sure it is a negative number.Add a second sweep 50 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click Add. 53 Click OK. click Sweeps. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. modify the settings as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile.

60 Click OK. 63 In the Element Properties dialog box. Notice some of the line weights in this view are rather heavy. click . Creating Your First Building Model | 23 . click OK. You can also use the thin lines tool to temporarily apply thin lines globally to all views. This can be affected by the view scale for this particular view. click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and draw a zoom region around the corner that includes one of the sweeps and a reveal. 64 On the Design Bar. click OK. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. click Modify. Verify that the Offset is zero. 66 On the View toolbar. Enter 8000 mm for Distance. Verify that Base is selected for From. 62 In the Type Properties dialog box. Select Flip. 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 65 On the View menu.59 Specify the parameters for the second reveal: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. click OK.

click the Model Graphics Style control. after the new wall type is applied. Notice that. 75 Proceed to the next exercise.Notice thin lines are applied to all the linework in this view. 24 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and click Save. 67 On the View Control Bar. choose Basic Wall: Exterior . 74 Navigate to your preferred directory.rvt. Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing. 69 On the View toolbar. name the file m_First_Project-in_progress. This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit. and click Shading with Edges. press and hold the CTRL key while you select each component. click Modify. Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise.Brick on CMU with Soldier Course. Also notice the button remains activated. They do not have sweeps or reveals. the interior walls resemble the following illustration. This indicates that thin lines will continue to be applied globally to the project. you add the interior walls of the west wing. 68 Enter ZF. the corners of the sweeps and reveals wrap automatically. TIP To select multiple components. 72 On the Design Bar. Exterior . click Save As. 71 In the Type Selector. click . When finished.Brick on CMU. 73 On the File menu. This turns off thin lines globally. 70 Select the three walls that are still the original wall type.

place the cursor over the north wall. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. Select the Line sketching tool. Sketch the main corridor 1 In the Project Browser. ■ 5 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Wall. 5000 mm from the centerline of the west exterior wall.135mm Partition (2-hr). 4 In the Options Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 25 . specify the following: ■ ■ Verify that Level 2 is selected for Height. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_First_Project-in_progress.rvt. select Basic Wall: Interior . 6 Move the cursor down. Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line. and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. .Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click. 3 In the Type Selector. under Views (all).

Click to specify the wall start point. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . If you zoom into the model. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and select the second interior wall. press and hold CTRL. the snap values decrease. TIP The temporary dimension snap values are dependent on your zoom settings. 8 Move the cursor down. Draw a crossing pick from the upper-right to the lower-left that crosses both interior walls.7 Move the cursor over the north exterior wall and 2500 mm to the right of the wall you added in the previous step. and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. ■ Draw a pick box from the upper-left to lower-right that includes both interior walls in their entirety. click Modify. 10 Select both interior walls using one of the following three methods: ■ ■ Select one of the interior walls.

12 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Wall.79mm Partition (1-hr). The temporary dimensions are displayed for both walls. and under Colors. 16 Add four horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the left exterior wall to the centerline of the left wall of the corridor. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and enter 4750 mm. This allows you to analyze their location in relationship to each other and modify the location of both walls at the same time. Each wall should be 4800 mm from the previous wall. On the Settings menu.After the walls are selected. click Activate Dimensions. as shown. Notice that temporary dimensions do not display automatically when multiple components are selected. click Modify. 15 In the Type Selector. Creating Your First Building Model | 27 . select Options. This places both interior walls 4750 mm from the centerline of the closest exterior wall. they display as red. select Basic Wall: Interior . Add remaining interior walls 14 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click a temporary dimension value. specify the selection color. 11 On the Options Bar. click the Graphics tab. TIP You can change the selection color by modifying the system settings.

Dimension lines have been added for training purposes.17 Add five horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the right wall of the corridor to the centerline of the right exterior wall. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . as shown. If necessary. modify temporary dimension values to obtain exact placement. Use the dimensions shown in the following illustration when adding the walls. 18 Add the final four interior walls in each corner of the right side of the building model. The dimension lines have been provided for training purposes.

The cursor displays as a cutting tool. This line represents where the underlying object is to be split. you can activate it by opening the Windows menu and clicking Toolbar  ➤ Tools. 21 Sketch a zoom region around the upper-right quadrant of the building model. a thin line appears at the tip of the cursor.Use split tool to modify walls 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 24 Click to split the wall. This is the shortcut key for Zoom in Region. 23 In the drawing area. click the tool a second time to turn thin lines mode off. there is no immediate and obvious indication of the split location. 20 Enter ZR. 22 On the Tools toolbar. click . After splitting the wall. notice the exact placement of the cursor and the location of the proposed wall split. NOTE If the Tools toolbar is not available. In the above illustration and callout. TIP If the lines within the floor plan display too thick. and you can now split walls and lines. This places the view in thin lines mode. When you are finished splitting the walls. click Modify. Creating Your First Building Model | 29 . you can click on the View toolbar. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. place the cursor over the intersection of the right wall of the corridor and the short horizontal wall that intersects it as shown. As you move the cursor over the wall.

click . 28 Using the same techniques learned in previous steps. split the right corridor wall. 27 On the Standard toolbar. This is the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Modify. and delete the segment. 30 Enter ZF. 29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.26 Select the short wall segment that you split from the right wall of the corridor. zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model.

This tool allow you to spin the model in any direction. the inner segment is deleted automatically. Zoom in as necessary. 31 On the Tools toolbar. click . click . 35 On the View toolbar. NOTE Arrows have been added at the location of the two splits. split the right wall of the corridor at the intersection of the two center horizontal interior walls. Creating Your First Building Model | 31 . 33 Using the following illustration as a guide. 37 Press and hold SHIFT and spin the building model by dragging one of the corners in any direction. Notice the interior walls that you added and split. . click 36 On the View toolbar. 32 On the Options Bar. 34 Press ESC to end the Split command. After the second split. select Delete Inner Segment.There are two remaining splits to make.

you add a multi-segmented dimension string to modify the witness lines. under Views (all).rvt. This is the aligned dimension option. ■ ■ For Prefer. and components that require dimensioning. should be open. it opens automatically in the Project Browser. Dimensioning the Building Model. m_First_Project-in_progress. the dimension value displays in blue and can be modified directly by clicking the value. and click Duplicate. click Save.Dimensioned and Annotated. The dimension styles available in the Type Selector are dependent on the type of dimension selected on the Options Bar.2. In that case. ready for modification. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. You begin by adding a simple dimension between two walls. you constrain the building model using equality and locking constraints.5mm Arial. 5 On the Options Bar. When geometry is selected for modification. Level 1 . If the geometry referenced by a permanent dimension is not selected for modification. Next. When you duplicate a view.Dimensioned and Annotated. options. the dimension value is displayed at its true size and is not selectable for modification. 2 In the Project Browser. select Wall centerlines. Permanent dimensions can appear in two different states: modifiable and non-modifiable. you add dimension lines to the building model. click Rename. click Dimension. both permanent dimensions and temporary dimensions display. select Linear Dimension Style: Diagonal . right-click Level 1. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 32 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . under Floor Plans. 6 In the Type Selector. specify the following dimension parameters: ■ Click . Add a dimension line between two walls 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and in the context menu. select Individual References. For Pick. 39 Proceed to the next exercise.38 On the File menu. and click OK. The floor plan. Dimensioning the Building Model In this exercise. You create a dimension by selecting the dimension type. In the final section of this exercise. A permanent dimension is considered modifiable when one or more of the components that it references is selected for modification. enter Level 1 . under Floor Plans. Create and rename copy of Level 1 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1.

10 On the Design Bar. Click in the empty space of the drawing area to place the dimension line. move the cursor over the left exterior wall as shown. 9 Move the cursor just above the north wall. click to select it. 8 Move the cursor over the right exterior wall as shown. When a dashed line is displayed on the wall centerline. When a dashed line displays on the wall centerline. Creating Your First Building Model | 33 . click to select it. click Modify.7 In the drawing area.

Click it a third time to return the witness line to the wall centerline. the value is not available for modification. and draw a zoom region around the north exterior wall and dimension line. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .11 Enter the keyboard shortcut ZR for Zoom In Region. 12 Select the dimension line. 17 Click the temporary dimension value. In its current state. The control at the bottom of each witness line controls the gap between the end of the witness line and the component it references. change it to 4750. Controls display on the value. Click the control a second time and the witness line moves to the exterior face. 14 Click the control once and the witness line moves to the interior face of the wall. 15 Select the vertical exterior wall on the left. or in the status bar of the drawing window. This behavior is similar to the witness line control on temporary dimensions. on each witness line. change it to 15000. When you select a component referenced by a dimension witness line. Information is displayed in a tooltip. the dimension value displays as modifiable. and a blue padlock displays. This is one of the ways in which a permanent dimension differs from a temporary dimension. and press ENTER. Notice that a temporary dimension also displays. These controls allow you to modify and constrain the dimension. Notice the dimension value turns blue. Notice that the dimension line and value displays as red. indicating that the control moves the witness line. Notice that the dimension value is not blue. This means you can modify the value by clicking it. Notice the selected wall moved to the left. and press ENTER. 16 Click the permanent dimension value. 13 Place the cursor over the blue control in the center of the left witness line.

19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Intersecting Walls. exterior wall. and click to place the dimension as shown. Creating Your First Building Model | 35 . click Modify. For Pick. 23 Select the left. zoom out until you can see the entire building model.18 Place the cursor over the dimension symbol located beneath the temporary dimension value. select Wall centerlines. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. and click OK. Click Options. click Dimension. vertical. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. Click the symbol to make the temporary dimension permanent. select Entire Walls. 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. Add a multi-segmented dimension 20 Using one of the zoom methods learned previously.

and click Delete Witness Line. click Modify. Modify witness lines 25 Select the multi-segmented dimension you added in the previous steps.24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 26 Using the following illustration as a guide. right-click the blue control on the witness line second from the top. NOTE Make sure you right-click the blue control and not the dimension line.

and in the context menu. WARNING Do not right-click a witness line. 28 Select the centerline of the interior wall where you previously deleted the witness line. click Edit Witness Lines. Creating Your First Building Model | 37 . it provides a different set of options on the context menu.27 Right-click the dimension line.

or press ESC on the keyboard.29 After selecting the wall. NOTE There are two alternative ways of ending the dimension edit process: You can click Modify on the Design Bar. Create constraints 30 Select the second interior wall from the top to the left of the corridor. 38 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click in the empty space of the drawing area to complete the editing process.

31 Drag the wall downward until the distance between it and the wall below it is approximately 2400 mm.Notice that the dimension values become modifiable on each side of the witness line that refers to the selected wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 39 .

36 Click the lock symbol on the 2400 mm segment to remove the constraint between the two walls. This dimension does not need to be precise. The relationship between these components is constrained.32 Select the multi-segmented dimension line. Notice a lock displays for each segment. Lock symbols offer the opportunity to constrain the building model by locking a dimension value or an alignment. 33 Click the lock on the 2400 mm segment of the dimension. 34 Select the same wall you moved previously and drag it upward approximately 1200 mm as shown. Notice that the dimension value for the locked segment remains unchanged as you move the wall. the other moves with it and maintains the locked dimension value. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . if you move one component. You can turn the lock on and off by clicking the lock symbol. 35 Select the multi-segmented dimension.

In the final section of the exercise. click . you use the Paste Aligned tool to copy the Level 1 windows to Levels 2 and 3. 37 Click the equality constraint to activate it. Creating Your First Building Model | 41 . under Other. Adding Doors and Windows. double-click Level 1. 40 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. 38 On the Options Bar. Next. and click OK.Notice an EQ symbol displays with a slash through it. This is an equality constraint that makes all dimension segments equal. select Save. 41 On the File menu. under Views (all). You begin by adding single flush doors. Notice that each segment displays an equal value. select Value for Equality Display. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. you load multiple new door types and add them to the building model. you add doors and windows to the building model. You then add windows and use the mirror and array tools to save time and ensure consistency. Notice that each segment is now equally spaced and the dimension values display EQ. Adding Doors and Windows In this exercise.

42 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . This is the mechanical room. the door resides on a level line. Add single flush doors to the building model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_First_Project-in_progress. This is most evident when you add a door in an elevation or 3D view. In addition. Doors are wall-hosted families and can only be added to a wall. 4 Approach the same corridor wall from inside the room. You can offset the door from the level.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. however. When you add a door. Do not click at this time. the initial opening is based on the wall face from which the cursor approaches. click Door. you can flip the door opening immediately after placing it. 2 In the Type Selector. Regardless of the initial placement. 3 In the north side of the building model. place the cursor over the right corridor for the room shown in the following illustration. doors snap automatically to the closest available level. A door symbol displays when the cursor is over the wall. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm.rvt.

use the flip controls to adjust the opening. 6 Click to add the door with the opening inside the room. After you add door number 2. Notice the blue controls that display. 8 Click the temporary dimension value between the door centerline and the lower horizontal wall.5 Press the Spacebar once to flip the door hand. and modify temporary dimensions as shown. 9 Add an additional door of the same type to the small room above door number 1 as shown. Press the Spacebar a second time. return the door to the position shown in the following illustration. specify a value of 600 mm. 7 Click each control to familiarize yourself with how the door controls work. The precise dimensions are not important. Do not be concerned with exact placement. and press ENTER. When you are finished. These control the door opening direction and the hand of the door (left or right). You can use this to flip from left to right hand opening. Creating Your First Building Model | 43 .

click Door. All Revit Building families have an . and set the temporary dimensions. 12 Enter the keyboard shortcut. to zoom to fit. 11 On the Design Bar. 17 Press and hold CTRL. click Training Files. and select M_Double-Flush. and select M_Double-Glass 2. click Modify. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .rfa extension. 16 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Doors folder. Notice that a preview image of the selected door displays in the upper right corner of the dialog box. click Load. 15 In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rfa. 14 On the Options Bar. ZF.10 Zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model and add a door of the same type to the room as shown. Flip the door. Load and apply new door types 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. as shown.rfa.

22 In the Type Selector. TIP Zoom in and out as necessary. Each door should open into the room.rfa. 21 Starting in the room in the upper left corner.You can load multiple families at the same time. Creating Your First Building Model | 45 . The distance between the door centerline and nearest wall centerline should be 600mm. 19 Click Open to load all three door families into the project. 18 Press and hold CTRL. These door families are now available in the Type Selector drop-down list. and select M_Single-Flush Vision. select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0864 x 2032mm. add a door to each of the five rooms to the left of the corridor. a preview image does not display. When more than one family is selected. 20 In the Type Selector. as shown. select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm.

This is door number 14 in the following illustration.23 Zoom in around the upper-right corner of the building model and add doors 9 and 10 as shown. The arrow has been added for training purposes. 24 Zoom in around the lower-right corner of the building model and add doors 11 and 12 as shown. select M_Double-Flush: 1730 x 2134mm. 25 Add the final M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm door in the center of the building model and to the right of the corridor as shown. This is door number 13 in the following illustration. 46 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 27 Add a door to the right exterior wall opposite of door number 1. 26 In the Type Selector.

under Views (all). and clear Surface Pattern.Add a door in elevation view 28 In the Project Browser. 29 Zoom around the building model and level heads. Creating Your First Building Model | 47 . 32 Expand the Walls category. If your view displays solid fill. 30 On the View menu. under Elevations. it would be easier if the visibility of the wall surface pattern was turned off. Notice that the brick surface pattern displays as you zoom into this view. 31 Click the Model Categories tab. select Visibility/Graphics. double-click North. NOTE The display of a surface pattern is zoom dependent. zoom in until the brick pattern displays. Although there is no technical reason you cannot add a door in this view. and scroll down to Walls.

click Door. Tag a door in plan view 38 In the Project Browser. select M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm. it has two basic requirements: it must be hosted by a wall and it must be associated with a level. and down to Level 1. as shown. Notice the door snaps to each level. 48 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . double-click Level 1. NOTE The temporary dimensions refer to interior walls. You can apply an offset if required. then Level 2. 34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 35 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans.33 Click OK. Changes to Visibility/Graphics are applied only to the open view. 37 Add a double-glass door centered on Level 1. 36 Move the cursor over the wall at Level 3. the wall surface pattern will remain visible in all other views. When adding a door. In this case. Notice that the double doors on the north wall display without a tag.

a tag did not display when you added the door in the North elevation view. NOTE Because the default door tag was not designed to display in an elevation view. 43 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. clear Leader. 39 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. the Type Selector and Options Bar remember the last settings used for that component. 42 Zoom in to the lower exterior wall. 41 On the upper exterior wall. 40 On the Options Bar. TIP For each component type. 44 In the Type Selector. click the double doors to add a tag. This should be door number 15. 45 Add the final door centered on the lower exterior wall. click Door. verify that M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm is selected.Components are tagged in the view in which they are placed. as shown. click Tag. Creating Your First Building Model | 49 .

50 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . . 50 On the File menu. 52 Zoom in on the upper exterior wall. Like doors. 49 Spin the model. click Save. 54 In the Type Selector.46 On the Design Bar. click 48 On the View toolbar. click Window. the window displays at the cursor. double-click Level 1. select M_Andersen 400 C35: C35. just like doors. under Floor Plans. 53 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. As you move the cursor over a wall. you can flip the window after placement. The window exterior is placed on the wall face closest to the cursor. 47 On the View toolbar. and notice the doors you added. Windows are wall-hosted components. click . click Modify. Add windows to the building model 51 In the Project Browser.

The list of parameters can vary depending on the window family design.You can add windows in plan. 59 Zoom around the window. and visibility. IMPORTANT  If necessary. click Window. click the temporary dimension value and specify the correct distance. and reload it into the project. 55 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the left side of the upper exterior wall. click Modify. materials. The designer can also create a window with few modifiable parameters. go to Help. you can edit the family in place or open the window in the family editor. If you want to modify a window in a specific way but an instance or type parameter is not available to accomplish the task. click to place it as shown. In this project. 56 When the window displays at the tip of the cursor. as shown. 60 Make sure the distance between the window centerline and the left wall centerline is 1400 mm. modify it. 61 On the Options Bar. 63 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. elevation. 64 Add a window to the right of the existing window as shown. 58 On the View toolbar. When you add a window in a plan view. click . In the family editor. 65 Zoom out so you can see the right side of the upper exterior wall. 66 Add two C35 windows to the right of the exterior double door. the designer creates the instance and type parameters that control geometry. 57 On the Design Bar. and select it. the default head or sill height is used to set the initial height of the window. You can load and assign tags that display the specific information you need in the format you prefer. For more information on creating and loading annotation tags. Notice the list of instance parameters available for modification. There should be a 1950 mm distance between the centerlines of the two windows. Creating Your First Building Model | 51 . and 3D views. the window is using a type tag that displays the window type number rather than the window mark. 62 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . click Cancel.

70 On the Edit menu. A tooltip is displayed. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . In this case. The copy option is selected by default. 69 Select one of the windows on the upper exterior wall. 73 When the triangular midpoint symbol displays on the exterior face of the wall.67 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 74 Move the cursor to the left. 72 Place the cursor over the middle of the exterior face of the right exterior wall. indicating that the midpoint of that component is ready to be selected. click . click to select it. the selected windows are to be mirrored across a horizontal axis residing on the midpoint of the east exterior wall. When you mirror a component or components. and make sure Copy is selected. click Mirror. press and hold CTRL. you can pick or draw the mirror axis. You also have the option to mirror a copy rather than the selected component(s). and click to set the mirror axis. Mirror the windows 68 Zoom out until the building model fits within the view. 71 On the Options Bar. and select the three remaining windows. click Modify.

77 Add two windows to the left exterior wall. Notice that the mirrored windows are not tagged. click Window.The windows are mirrored immediately after you specify the mirror axis. Creating Your First Building Model | 53 . Add and array windows 75 Zoom in to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. You tag the windows later in the exercise. at the dimensions shown. 76 On the Design Bar.

Select Constrain. 81 On the Edit menu. 83 Move the cursor over the intersection of the left exterior wall and the intersecting interior wall shown below. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that is selected for a linear array. Rather than manually add the rest of the windows on the left exterior wall. Enter 5 for Number. 80 Select the two windows that you just added on the left exterior wall. click Array.78 On the Design Bar. 79 Zoom out in the upper left corner so you can see the two rooms with doors 4 and 5. click Modify. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and click to set the array end point. you can use the array tool to finish the job. You first click a point to specify the array start point. Clear Group And Associate. and click to set the array start point. Because all of the rooms on this side of the building model are equally spaced. select 2nd. 82 On the Options Bar. For Move To. You then move the array to the second or last location. Creating an array is a three-step process. it is an ideal situation to use an array.

add the final window to the right exterior wall and centered in the second room from the bottom. and click the similar intersection shown below to set the array end point. any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array continues down the wall. click Window. as shown. Add remaining level 1 window 85 On the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 55 . NOTE It is extremely important to make sure the new array is centered between the walls of the next room. If you make a mistake placing the array. undo the step and try again.84 Move the cursor down until the arrayed window group is centered in the room below the starting point. Because the rooms on the left side of the building model are of equal size. 86 On the bottom-right side of the building model. Notice the arrayed windows are not tagged.

and notice the windows you added. click Modify. on the View toolbar.87 If you are still using Thin Lines mode. Paste align windows to Levels 2 and 3 91 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . 92 In the 3D Drawing area. you can use the paste-align tool to accomplish the same goal significantly faster. Rather than use the same methods to add similar windows to levels 2 and 3. . 56 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . drag a selection box around the entire building model. turn it off by clicking 88 On the View toolbar. click 89 On the View toolbar. 90 Spin the model.

click Copy to Clipboard. 99 In the Project Browser. This is because the changes you made to the Visibility/Graphics of the North elevation view were applied only to that view. select Level 3. 103 In the Project Browser. such as equality constraints. 96 On the Edit menu. 101 On the Options Bar. 102 Add a C35 window in the center of Level 2 and Level 3 as shown below. under Elevations. 105 Add C35 windows to the center of Levels 2 and 3 as you did in the previous steps. click Window. 93 On the Options Bar. select Level 2. After the windows are added to Level 2 and Level 3. 95 On the Edit menu. 97 In the Select Levels dialog box. and click OK. 94 In the Filter dialog box. notice that windows need to be added above the double doors on the north and south walls. 98 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. 104 On the Design Bar. In this view. 100 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This leaves only the windows selected within the 3D view. double-click North. Notice that when you add a window in elevation view. the window snaps to the default sill height which displays as a green dashed line. click Window. clear Tag on Placement. Creating Your First Building Model | 57 . clear walls and doors from the selection. Don’t be concerned with precise placement or spacing between the windows and doors. click Modify. and click OK.This selects every component in the building model. notice the wall surface pattern displays. double-click South. The spacing can be manipulated using some of the dimensioning tools you learned earlier. The spacing will be modified in a later dataset. press and hold CTRL. click .

the respective layers interact according to the functional assignment within the Edit Assembly dialog box. you can select walls to define the border of the component. m_First_Project-in_progress. 111 Proceed to the next exercise. Like walls. and ceilings are examples of sketched components. You also add elevators and plumbing components to the building model. 107 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. click . When sketching these components. Floors. where three openings are required for the stairs and elevators. . you add floors and floor openings to the building model. When walls intersect a floor. roof. double-click Level 1. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Notice that all the windows in the view are tagged. roofs. Add a floor slab to Level 1 1 On the View toolbar. and all require their borders to be sketched. 108 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag All Not Tagged. you begin by adding a floor slab Level 1. select Window Tags. Adding Floors and Floor Openings In this exercise. 109 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. 110 On the File menu. click Save. each of these components can have a compound structure. Adding Floors and Floor Openings. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 3 Spin the model and observe that floors are needed throughout the building model. click 2 On the View toolbar.106 In the Project Browser.rvt. You add a more complex floor type to levels 2 and 3. You can also select or draw lines. or ceiling. In this exercise.

and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar. click . In addition. 7 On the Options Bar. clear Extend into wall (to core). 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you must either finish or quit in order to access other design modes. click Floor. the building model becomes unavailable for modification until you finish the floor sketch. click the flip arrows to flip the line. 8 Click the upper exterior wall. The Design Bar now has only one tab. verify that Pick Walls is selected. double-click Level 1. When in sketch mode. 10 Select the three remaining exterior walls. 14 On the View toolbar. click Floor Properties. Creating Your First Building Model | 59 . A magenta line displays with flip arrows. Notice the floor on Level 1 that extends to the exterior face of the walls. You can click the flip arrows to move the floor boundary to either the interior or exterior face of a wall. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 If the magenta line is not on the exterior face of the north exterior wall. under Floor Plans. Sketch. You are in sketch mode. 6 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.4 In the Project Browser.300mm for Type. 12 Select Concrete .

When the chain of walls highlights. You can use TAB to select a chain of walls or lines at any time. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice the location of the magenta line. double-click Level 2. In this view. the interior walls on Level 1 display as an underlay.Add a floor to Level 2 15 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 19 Zoom in to the upper exterior wall. click Floor. 60 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected. The windows are not tagged because you did not add them within this view. when it highlights under the cursor. 17 On the Options Bar. click to select it. press TAB. 18 Place the cursor over the upper exterior wall and.

After you add these components. position the cursor on the wall. To do this. Add elevators and bathroom components 30 In the Project Browser. 21 Use the flip arrows to place the magenta line on the exterior face of the core. select M_Elevator Center: 2032mm x 1295mm. Attaching the walls ensures that if you change the floor elevation. . move the elevator into position. double-click Level 1. as shown. click . 27 On the View toolbar. A message displays asking if you want the walls that go up to this floor to attach to it. Creating Your First Building Model | 61 . 33 Add two elevators in the center room on the right side of the building model. 22 On the Design Bar. click Floor Properties. click Component. 32 In the Type Selector. 26 Click Yes to join geometry and cut out the overlapping volume. These elevators are wall-hosted components. This occurs because the structural layers of the floor must cut through the interior finish layer of the wall in order to extend to the wall core. The line chain flips to each face of the core rather than the interior and exterior wall face. you add elevators and plumbing components on Level 1. indicating that they are not attached to the floor. 29 Spin the model and observe the new floor on Level 2. under Floor Plans. the walls remain attached. A message displays asking if you want to join geometry and cut the overlapping volume out of the walls.20 Click the flip arrows. 23 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. and click OK. 31 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to place it. 25 Click Yes to attach the wall tops to the floor. you paste-align the level 1 interior walls and components to level 2 before adding the level 3 floor. Next. The interior walls of the building model are displayed in red. click 28 On the View toolbar. 24 Click Finish Sketch.

38 Add the sink to the center of the room. toggle the temporary dimension witness line to the interior face of the adjacent wall. select M_Pedestal Sink-3D: Pedestal Sink. select each one. as shown. and specify the dimension 1150 mm as shown above.TIP After adding the elevators. click Component. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 37 In the Type Selector. 35 Zoom in to the upper right corner of the building model. 36 On the Design Bar.

when rotating the component. an angular value displays that responds to keyboard entries. The first click specifies the rotation start point. 43 Move the cursor 90 degrees to the left and click to set the rotation end point. 42 Place the cursor directly above the sink and click to set the rotation start point as shown.39 On the Design Bar. Rotating an object requires two clicks. In this case. when you sketch a wall. The component will rotate to the value. you can type the wall length and press Enter rather than setting the wall end point. click Rotate. establish the direction of the rotation. TIP Although you can manually rotate the component. When rotating. enter 90 on the keyboard and press Enter. you can use the listening dimension to accurately rotate the component. the second click specifies the rotation end point. Listening dimensions react to cursor movements and keyboard entries. 41 On the Edit menu. For example. click Modify. Creating Your First Building Model | 63 . 40 Select the sink.

48 Use the same procedure to add a toilet and sink in the similar room at the lower right corner of the building model. as shown. select M_Toilet-Commercial-Wall-3D: 480mm Seat Height. 45 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 46 In the Type Selector.44 Drag the sink until it snaps to the center of the left wall face. 47 Add the toilet on the right wall. click Component.

Creating Your First Building Model | 65 . 53 In the Filter dialog box. you must add the openings for the stairwells and the elevators. the interior walls. elevators. 56 Select Level 2. Depending on the exact placement of the windows you added in the north and south elevation views. click . 54 On the Edit menu. and click OK. a message might be displayed stating that the new walls conflict with an existing insert. and click OK. doors. doors. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Copy to Clipboard.Before adding the final floor. 51 Draw a crossing pick box beginning inside the upper-right corner of the building model and extending to the inside of the lower-left corner. (Do not include the exterior walls in the selection. 52 On the Options Bar. right-click. clear Door Tags. and click Zoom To Fit. and components. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 55 On the Edit menu. click Modify.) This captures all the internal walls. In addition. Paste align interior walls 49 In an empty space within the drawing area. and plumbing fixtures can be paste aligned to Levels 2 and 3.

it is often a good idea to create a view that makes the selection process more precise. if necessary. or ceiling in which you want the opening. you are prompted to select the floor. you can click the controls on the side of the dialog box. 57 In the Project Browser. For more information regarding the warning. You can drag the window or use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the window to a location that does not conflict with the interior wall. click . zoom in to the upper exterior wall and notice that the center window conflicts with the left wall of the corridor. Ignore the warning and proceed with the next step. it is most likely because the center window intersects the corridor wall on Levels 2 and 3.These conflict warnings alert you to problems in your layout. 60 Check the lower exterior wall for the same problem and correct it. under Floor Plans. The message disappears once you click in the drawing area. In the steps that follow. you add floor openings to accommodate the elevators and stairs. you can continue working and the warning dialog box closes automatically. 59 Correct the problem by moving the window away from the corridor wall. roof. If you received this error. 61 On the View toolbar. 58 If you received the conflict message. When you add a model opening. . 63 Spin the model so you can see the interior walls and components on level 2. Therefore. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . If you know the source of the problem. double-click Level 2. click 62 On the View toolbar.

Adding a section is a two-click process. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the building model and set the depth just past the bathroom wall. click Section. 65 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area.Create a section view 64 In the Project Browser. you can flip the view direction and modify the extents of the view. move the cursor down and click just below the south exterior wall. The first click specifies the section head. 69 Click the flip arrows to change the direction of the view towards the interior. 70 Using the shape handles. Creating Your First Building Model | 67 . and click Zoom To Fit. 68 Click the section line. 67 Place the cursor over the upper right corner of the building model. After you add the section. 66 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. as shown. click to set the start point. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. and the second click specifies the section tail.

75 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and.71 On the Design Bar. select Pick a roof. floor. This view offers easy accessibility to all floors as well as the stairwells on the left and right. Create a floor opening 73 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. when it highlights. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and click OK. just as the level heads do in an elevation view. 74 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. The section head is displayed in blue. the section heads are linked directly to the view so when you double-click the section head. the referenced view opens. click Opening. select it. Similarly. click Modify. or ceiling and cut vertically. 72 Double-click the section head.

the sketch lines have been enhanced for training purposes. 78 On the Design Bar. and click Open View. 80 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell as shown below. these constraints ensure that the opening adapts to any changes in the associated walls. select Floor Plan: Level 2. In the following illustration. select the rectangle drawing tool. 77 Zoom around the stairwell in the lower right corner.Because you must be in a view parallel to the screen in order to edit a sketch. Creating Your First Building Model | 69 . 79 On the Options Bar. 76 In the Go to View dialog box. Notice the locking constraints that display. When locked. 81 Click each of the four padlocks to lock them. click Lines. the Go to View dialog box displays and offers you a selection of views to choose from.

under Sections (Building Section). it is often easier to add the stairs first and then modify the opening precisely to the location of the stairs. select Pick a roof. click Finish Sketch. 82 On the Design Bar. The modification of the opening is done for you in a dataset used later in this tutorial. click Opening. double-click Section 1. 91 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell and lock the lines as shown. 70 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and click Open View. and click OK. 83 In the Project Browser. 90 On the Options Bar. 88 Zoom to the stairwell in the upper right corner. 87 In the Go to View dialog box. floor. 89 On the Design Bar. 86 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and when it highlights. click Lines. select the rectangle drawing tool. select it. 85 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. Add a second opening 84 On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 2. 92 Click Finish Sketch. or ceiling and cut vertically.NOTE Although the opening could account for the stair landings at this point.

102 Click Finish Sketch. 98 Zoom in to the elevators. under Sections (Building Section). you paste align these openings rather than sketch them again. double-click Section 1. select Pick a roof. After adding a floor to Level 3. click . select it. . 99 On the Design Bar. 105 Spin the model so that you can see the vertical penetrations on level 2. select Floor Plan: Level 2. click Lines. when it highlights. floor. 94 On the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 71 . You have completed the three openings required for this level. and click Open View. 95 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. select the rectangle drawing tool. click 104 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 96 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and. click Opening.Add an opening for the elevators 93 In the Project Browser. 100 On the Options Bar. 101 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the elevator shaft and lock the lines as shown. 103 On the View toolbar. or ceiling and cut vertically. 97 In the Go to View dialog box.

116 On the Options Bar. click to select it. Make sure you do not select Floors. under Floor Plans. when the chain of walls highlights. and click Zoom To Fit. click Floor. click Finish Sketch. press TAB. 107 Right-click. 112 Click Yes to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor. 120 Select Level 3 and click OK. The floor type you assigned to Level 2 is used for Level 3. 108 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all). click Copy to Clipboard. when the wall highlights under the cursor. 110 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls and. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. and. 72 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .Add a floor to Level 3 106 In the Project Browser. 109 On the Options Bar. 117 In the Filter dialog box. 115 Draw a pick box around Level 2 so that you capture the three openings you created previously. 113 Click Yes to join geometry and cut volume. 118 On the Edit menu. click . double-click Section 1. 119 On the Edit menu. under Sections (Building Sections). and click OK. 111 On the Design Bar. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected. double-click Level 3. clear everything except Floors (Floor opening cut). Copy floor openings to Level 3 114 In the Project Browser.

The only remaining task in this exercise is to paste-align the Level 2 interior walls. and components to Level 3. under Views (all). Creating Your First Building Model | 73 . Paste-align components to Level 3 122 In the Project Browser. 125 Draw a crossing pick box beginning just inside the upper right corner and extending to the lower left corner. click Modify. under Floor Plans. and click Zoom To Fit. click . 124 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.121 On the View toolbar. 123 Right-click. The vertical penetrations extend through Levels 2 and 3. Do not include the exterior walls. doors. double-click Level 2.

click Save. NOTE If you receive a warning that a conflict exists with an insert. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. Reposition one or both of the windows that may be intersecting the corridor wall. 128 On the Edit menu. clear Floors and Floors (Floor opening cut). 132 On the File menu. Adding a Roof and Ceiling. you add a gable roof and ceiling to the west wing of the building model. click Copy to Clipboard.TIP If you miss a component. 129 On the Edit menu. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 126 On the Options Bar. click . hold the CTRL key down and select it. 130 Select Level 3 and click OK. If you accidently select a component that does not belong in the selection set. click OK and go to the Level 3 floor plan. Adding a Roof and Ceiling In this exercise. 127 In the Filter dialog box. click . hold the SHIFT key down and select the component. and click OK. this removes it from the selection set. 133 Proceed to the next exercise. 131 On the View toolbar.

select Defines slope. under Views (all). 4 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.rvt. click Pick Walls. Creating Your First Building Model | 75 . 3 On the Design Bar. click the flip arrows to move the lines outside of the exterior walls. m_First_Project-in_progress. Verify that Extend to wall core is clear. Both are sketched components and require you to define the border of the component. 5 Select the left exterior wall so that the sketch line is left of the wall. 6 Select the right exterior wall so that the sketch line is right of the wall. 8 Select the upper exterior wall and the lower exterior wall. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and verify that Overhang is 600 mm. If the sketch lines are on the interior side of the exterior walls. clear Defines slope. Creating a footprint roof is very similar to creating a floor. Add a gable roof to the building model 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof. 7 On the Options Bar.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint.

9 On the Design Bar. 14 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. . 16 Press TAB to preselect the chain of exterior walls. select Warm Roof . 11 On the Design Bar.Timber for Type. click . and click OK. 15 Move the cursor over the gable end wall until it is preselected. 12 On the View toolbar. Notice the exterior walls are not connected to the roof. click Roof Properties. click Finish Roof. click 13 On the View toolbar. 76 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

18 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. 20 Select the roof. 19 On the Options Bar. for Top/Base. click Modify. select Attach. Creating Your First Building Model | 77 . 23 Drag the roof ridge control upward to a point where the pitch is approximately doubled. Modify the roof 22 Select the roof. for Attach Wall. The exterior wall chain displays as solid red. The exterior walls attach to the roof.17 Click to select the entire chain of exterior walls. Notice the drag handle on the roof ridge. select Top.

TIP Although you can add a ceiling in a floor plan view. click inside the room to add a ceiling as shown. double-click Level 3. ■ In this case. There are two methods to create a ceiling: ■ Using Auto Ceiling. 26 On the Edit menu. click Undo Move. you will use the auto ceiling method. select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 600mm grid. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and then click inside highlighted rooms to add a ceiling. Using the sketch method. 29 In the Type Selector. click Modify.24 Release the drag handle at the new position. you can sketch the perimeter of a ceiling using the same pick and draw techniques learned when you added the floors and roof. click Ceiling. 28 On the Modeling tab of the Design Bar. Notice the exterior walls adjust to the new roof pitch. under Views (all). under Ceiling Plans. Add a ceiling to Level 3 27 In the Project Browser. This returns the roof to its original position. 30 In the upper-left corner of the building model. the ceiling is normally outside the view range and is not visible after you add it. 25 On the Design Bar. you select a ceiling type from the Type Selector.

32 In the Type Selector. Creating Your First Building Model | 79 . 33 Click within the main corridor and each stairwell to add a ceiling in each. as shown. select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 1200mm grid.31 Add a ceiling of the same type in the remaining rooms on the left side of the corridor and in both bathrooms.

click Save. select Compound Ceiling: Plain. and click OK. and select Shading with Edges. and from the context menu. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. 37 In the drawing area. click Properties. 38 On the View Control Bar. 35 Add a ceiling to the three remaining rooms on the right side of the corridor. 41 On the File menu. 80 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Adding Multi-Level Stairs. Rather than repetitively creating the same stairs on each level and in each stairwell. enter 3900 mm for Height Offset From Level. click the Model Graphics Style control. you begin by creating a set of stairs from Level 1 to Level 2. double-click the section head.34 In the Type Selector. click Modify. under Constraints. 36 On the Design Bar. you modify the original stairwell to be a multistory stair and mirror a copy to the other stairwell. 39 Right-click the ceiling over the elevator shaft on Level 3. Adding Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box.

In the image below. select Wide Lines. you create a set of U-shaped stairs similar to those in the following illustration. 4 In the Type Selector. click Lines. under Floor Plans. In the steps that follow. you first add temporary model lines that provide an underlay to trace over.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell in the lower right corner of the building model.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. and use the temporary dimensions to specify the values shown in the following image. Add stairs between Level 1 and 2 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Your First Building Model | 81 . double-click Level 1. 5 Add the three lines as shown. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all). the permanent dimension lines have been added as a training aid and the section line has been hidden temporarily. In order to sketch the stairs accurately. m_First_Project-in_progress.

8 Sketch the second half of the run by clicking on the top endpoint of the left vertical line. 82 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . By default. not to the centerline. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.NOTE It is important to dimension the lines to the interior face of the walls. and then clicking the bottom endpoint of the same line. you sketch the stair run and trace the run over the two vertical lines. and then specify the value. In the steps that follow. the Run tool is active. The dimensions have been predetermined. 7 Sketch the first half of the run by clicking on the bottom endpoint of the right vertical line. and then clicking the top endpoint of the same line. You are in sketch mode. click Stairs. for example: 550 mm. Click on the temporary dimension witness line control until it moves to the interior face of the wall.

The stair run is complete. Specify railing type 9 On the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 83 . click Railings Type. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Railings Type dialog box. click Finish Sketch. select 900mm Pipe. and click OK.

13 On the View Control Bar. click the Hide/Isolate control. and select Hide Object.Notice that the model lines still display. 15 Delete the three model lines. 12 Select the stairs. This makes the model lines more apparent. click the Hide/Isolate control. and select Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 14 Select the three model lines. 84 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 16 On the View Control Bar.

select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level. under Constraints. 21 On the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 85 . as needed.17 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. Use TAB or zoom in. click Modify. and click OK. IMPORTANT Be careful not to select the railings. under Sections (Building Section). under Views (all). Modify stairs 18 Select the stairs. 19 On the Options Bar. double-click Section 1. click .

SM. When the midpoint symbol and tooltip displays. and select Copy. 24 On the Options Bar. you could modify the floor openings to accommodate the stair landings. click Mirror. 26 Place the cursor over the center of bottom edge of the Level 1 floor. Copy west stairs to east stairwell 22 Select the stairs created in the previous steps. 25 Enter the keyboard shortcut. as shown. and click to set the mirror axis endpoint. 27 Move the cursor upward and perpendicular to the floor. The cursor now snaps only to midpoints. 23 On the Edit menu. Do not select the railings. click . 86 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . This is done in the next exercise using a new dataset.NOTE At this time. click to specify the start point of the mirror axis.

you create the east wing of the building model by mirroring the west wing. You add a curtain wall passageway between the wings with a suspended walkway between each of the upper floors. 29 On the View toolbar. click Close. . NOTE Beginning with the next exercise. click Save. a new dataset is supplied with the building model saved at this point.28 On the Design Bar. click 30 On the File menu. Creating Your First Building Model | 87 . 31 On the File menu. Creating the East Wing and Passageway In this exercise. click Modify. It has been modified slightly for training purposes. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the East Wing and Passageway.

This dataset is essentially the same dataset you saved at the end of the last exercise. click the Training Files icon. If necessary. NOTE It is important to capture every component within this building model. Additional 3D views were added. expand 3D Views. under Views (all). click Ref Plane. The following modifications have been made: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wall inserts on the north and south walls were evenly spaced. Floor openings were modified to create stair landings. 3 In the Project Browser. click Open. and double-click 3D Southwest Isometric. Open the m_First_Project-West_Wing.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Stair railings on Level 3 were added. zoom out before making the selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 2 Draw a vertical reference plane 12000 mm from the exterior face of the right exterior wall as shown. Mirror the west wing 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You use this plane later as the mirror axis. 4 Draw a pick box around the entire building model.

and select the section line to add it to the selection set. click and verify that Copy is selected. 7 On the Edit menu. IMPORTANT Components selected in one view remain selected when you switch views. click Mirror. 9 Select the vertical reference plane you added previously. 6 Press and hold CTRL. 8 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Project Browser.The entire model displays as selected. double-click Level 1. Creating Your First Building Model | 89 . under Floor Plans.

The new components are numbered sequentially. Add the passageway walls between wings 17 In the Project Browser. as shown. zoom out to see both wings of the building model.After you specify the mirror axis. click Delete. 13 On the Edit menu. click the flip arrows to ensure the exterior face of the curtain wall is facing the outside. click 15 On the View toolbar. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select the reference plane. . double-click Level 1. click Modify on the Design Bar. click Wall. notice that a new section view exists in the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. In addition. If necessary. 16 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. 10 After the mirrored copy displays. click . select Curtain Wall: Exterior Glazing. 21 Sketch the two curtain walls between the wings. a progress bar displays on the status bar as the mirrored copy is generated. 20 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Type Selector. 14 On the View toolbar. select Roof for Height. 90 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 11 If necessary. Notice that the new wing is a mirror image of the original.

as shown below. When splitting the wall. 23 On the Tools menu.Split and delete exterior wall faces of each wing 22 On the View toolbar. split the same exterior wall at the intersection of the exterior face of the wall hosting door 13 as shown. Creating Your First Building Model | 91 . 25 Split the face of the exterior brick wall at the intersection with the curtain wall. zoom into the intersection and make sure you split the wall where it intersects the exterior face of the elevator shaft wall. select Delete Inner Segment. 26 Using the same technique. click . click Split Walls and Lines. 24 On the Options Bar.

you can use the Align tool to clean up the intersection. TIP If the split does not line up perfectly with the intersecting wall. 30 On the Options Bar. 28 Zoom in to the intersection of the passageway and the exterior wall of the right wing. 29 On the Tools menu. Notice the segment between the splits has been deleted. verify that Delete Inner Segment is selected. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Split Walls and Lines.27 Enter ZF to Zoom to Fit.

double-click Level 1. Arrows refer to each split location. split the face of the exterior brick wall at the similar intersections shown below. enter 150 for Offset. 32 On the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 93 . 38 On the Options Bar. Add a floor to the Level 1 passageway 36 Adjust your zoom settings until you can see the perimeter of the entire passageway. 37 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . and clear Extend into wall (to core). 33 On the View toolbar. click Floor. under Floor Plans. click 34 On the View toolbar. click Modify. to turn off thin lines mode. 39 Select both curtain walls so that the floor offset is on the exterior side of each wall.31 Using the technique learned previously. 35 In the Project Browser.

48 Click Finish Sketch. 46 On the Design Bar.40 On the Design Bar. The general rule is that you should click the section of the line that you wish to keep. 41 On the Options Bar. notice the overlapping intersections that must be cleaned up before the sketch can be finished. and then select the center of the top horizontal line. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the rectangle drawing tool. 53 Sketch a rectangle with the vertical lines attached to the level 2 floor of each wing and each horizontal line 1500 mm from the inner face of the curtain wall. 44 Select the center of the left vertical line. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . double-click Level 2. When sketching. In the following illustration. click and Lock. 43 On the Tools menu. Add walkway to Level 2 49 In the Project Browser. the sketch line weight has been increased for training purposes. under Floor Plans. click Floor Properties. 52 On the Options Bar. 42 Select the edge of the floor on both the west and east wings. 45 Continue cleaning up the intersections using this method. click Lines. NOTE In the following image. When finished. click Trim/Extend. 47 Select Concrete 300mm for Type. 51 On the Design Bar. and click OK. . click Lines. In this case. click Floor. dimensions have been added for training purposes. there are two general rules that must be applied: You must have a closed loop and there cannot be intersecting lines. the sketch should be a single closed loop as shown.

Creating Your First Building Model | 95 . If necessary. you can use the SPACEBAR to toggle the offset. 62 Draw two short lines to close the gap between the walkway and where it intersects each wing. and click OK. 61 On the Options Bar. use the trim tool to make the sketch a single line. If they do. 65 On the Design Bar.54 On the Design Bar. 58 On the Design Bar. Add railings to Level 2 walkway 57 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 56 Click Finish Sketch. click Floor Properties. 64 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch. zoom in when selecting the walkway edge to make sure the offset is correct. click . and specify an offset of 50 mm. 55 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. as shown. 66 Select the railing. TIP When sketching. 60 Select the line at the top edge of the walkway so that the sketch line is offset inside the walkway. select 1100mm for Type. click Railing. 59 On the Options Bar. click Lines. click Railing Properties. click and . TIP Make sure the line intersections do not overlap. 63 On the Design Bar.

click and Copy. 73 On the Design Bar. 69 Enter SM. select both railings and the walkway on Level 2. continuous line. move the cursor to the right. click Modify. 72 Add a section view to the center of the passageway. it is faster to mirror it. It should be noted that the reason both railings weren’t sketched at the same time is because a railing sketch has to be a single. only midpoints will be snapped to. 68 On the Options Bar. 70 Click at the midpoint of the walkway for the mirror axis start point. and click to set the mirror axis. You could create another railing on the other side of the walkway. 74 Double-click the section head you created in the previous step. click Mirror. For the next mouse click. however. TIP Press and hold CTRL while making multiple selections. 75 In the section view. Add a new section view 71 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 96 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . as shown. click Section.67 On the Edit menu. and modify the direction and shape handles.

83 On the Options Bar. check Defines slope. and click OK. 79 On the View toolbar. Creating Your First Building Model | 97 . click Copy to Clipboard. 84 Select each curtain wall so that the offset is outside the curtain wall as shown. double-click Roof. click . If necessary. Add roof to passageway 80 In the Project Browser. click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint. 82 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The only remaining task is to add a roof to the passageway. select Level 3. 78 In the Select Levels dialog box. 77 On the Edit menu. 81 Using the zoom commands.76 On the Edit menu. under Floor Plans. zoom in until you can see the railings and walkways. and verify that Overhang is 600 mm. adjust the view so you can see the entire passageway. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name.

click Lines. as shown. clear Defines slope. click . click the center of each roof line to clean up each corner. 87 Sketch two vertical lines that intersect the horizontal lines. 89 Using the techniques you learned earlier. click Finish Roof. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 90 On the Design Bar. 88 On the Tools menu. 86 On the Options Bar. Exact dimensions are not important. 91 On the View toolbar. click Trim/Extend.85 On the Design Bar. as shown.

In this case. Join the roofs 92 On the View Control Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 99 . and click Hidden Line. The two roofs are joined. Joining a roof is a two-click procedure. 94 Click the left edge of the passageway roof. and then the outer edge of the corresponding wing roof. you select the edge of the passageway roof. you click the edge of the roof that you want to join. 95 Click the outer edge of the main roof. For training purposes. click Join/Unjoin Roof. you select the edge of the roof or wall that you want it joined to. 93 On the Tools menu. Second. click the Model Graphics Style control. First.Notice that the passageway roof needs to be joined to each wing. it is easier to demonstrate the roof joins in hidden line mode.

rvt 100 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 100 On the View Control Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. click . and change the filtering so each level has a unique door schedule. Finally. you create and modify a door schedule. 102 Navigate to your preferred directory. 99 Join the passageway roof and the roof of the other wing using the same technique learned in the previous steps. and select Shading with Edges. click Join/Unjoin Roof. Scheduling the Building Model In this exercise. After creating the schedule. click the Model Graphics Style control.96 On the View toolbar. 98 On the Tools menu. 103 Proceed to the next exercise. you duplicate the schedule twice. you modify it to filter by level. The initial schedule contains all doors in the building model. and click Save. rename each schedule. 97 Spin the model so that you have access to the unjoined end of the passageway roof and the east wing roof. click Save As. Scheduling the Building Model. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. 101 On the File menu. name the file First Project-Dual Wings-in progress.

on the Fields tab. enter Hardware for Name. Select Common for Discipline. and click OK. 4 From the Available Fields list. Creating Your First Building Model | 101 . 10 Move Cost below Hardware. 8 Under Scheduled fields (in order). 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. Select Other for Group parameter under. Select Text for Type. and click Add. Under Parameter Data.Create a door schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 9 Move Hardware so that it is directly below Family and Type. TIP You can also double-click an available field to add it to the scheduled fields. add the following as scheduled fields: ■ ■ ■ Level Mark Cost Notice that there is not an available field for Hardware. select Doors for category. TIP If the View tab is not visible. right-click on the Design Bar and click View. select Family and Type under Available Fields. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. select Project parameter. 5 Click Add Parameter. click Schedule/Quantities. 7 Click OK. Select Instance. select Mark and click Move up until it displays at the top of the list. You can add custom fields and make them either type or instance parameters.

102 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 19 Under Fields. and under Field Formatting. select Header and select Footer. 14 At the bottom of the tab. 21 Under Fields. the column is redundant. You can hide this field because you are sorting and grouping by level. 16 Click the Formatting tab. The door schedule displays. 12 Select Level for Sort by. On the schedule. 15 Select Mark for Then by. 23 Click the Appearance tab. select Family and Type. select Grand totals and select Itemize every instance. 13 Under Sort by. 24 Select Bold for Header text. Modifications to the schedule appearance display only when the schedule is added to a sheet. Therefore. select Calculate totals.11 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Level. Door Type will display as the column heading rather than Family and Type. 20 Select Right for Alignment. select Cost. select Hidden field. 26 In the door schedule. select the column grip between Door Type and Hardware and move the grip to the right until the door types display in their entirety. 17 Under Fields. 22 Under Field formatting. 18 Enter Door Type for Heading. 25 Click OK.

31 Repeat the previous step to create a second copy of the door schedule. However. enter 500. any changes made to column size are not retained when the schedule is added to a sheet. This is because for this door type. and click Duplicate. click Edit for the Filter value. and click Properties. each door is allowed a different value. and click OK. expand Schedules/Quantities. Duplicate and filter door schedules 30 In the Project Browser. 34 Repeat the process to rename the remaining copies to Door Schedule-Level 2 and Door Schedule-Level 3. 28 Click OK. right-click Door Schedule-Level 1. and click Rename. right-click Door Schedule. 33 In the Rename View dialog box. Cost is a type parameter. each schedule still lists all the doors for each level. and click OK. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. under Other. Creating Your First Building Model | 103 . A message displays indicating that this change must be applied to all elements of the same type. and press ENTER. 32 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. Because you created the hardware parameter as an instance parameter. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. right-click Door Schedule. You now have a separate schedule for each level. under Schedules/Quantities. 29 Click in the Hardware field for door mark number 1. enter Brass. under Schedules/Quantities.TIP In this view. specify Level equals Level 1 for Filter by. Modify the schedule 27 Click in the Cost field for door mark number 1. 35 In the Project Browser. enter Door Schedule-Level 1.

Filter each schedule by their respective level. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select New. Notice that the information is now filtered for each level.38 In the Element Properties dialog box. Enter Exterior Scene for Name. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. Under Type. Rendering the Building Model In this exercise. 4 Click OK. under Schedules/Quantities.rvt. modify the settings. click Settings. click Save. you create an exterior scene. After rendering. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . double-click each door schedule. click OK. you capture the image and save it within the project. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select Exterior. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. Create the exterior scene 1 On the View toolbar. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. 39 Repeat the previous four steps for Door Schedule Level 2 and Door Schedule Level 3. Rendering the Building Model. and then render a 3D view using that scene. 40 In the Project Browser. 41 On the File menu. click .

click Region Raytrace. 13 Under Raytrace Settings. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. Creating Your First Building Model | 105 . 9 Specify a value of 250 for the R. 11 In the Environment dialog box. This is the background color for the scene. 14 Click OK. under Scene Settings. 8 In the Color Picker dialog box. under Scene Settings. 7 Click the color bar. 10 Click OK. 17 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. A color bar displays. click the Bars tab. 15 On the View toolbar. select Solid Color.Specify scene settings 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. and B settings. under Background Color. 16 Spin the building model until it resembles the following illustration. This is a white background color. 18 Drag a box around the building model as shown. The raytrace process begins and a progress bar displays on the status bar. click . click Environment. select Good for Quality. G. the building model should resemble the following illustration. and select Blurry Reflections and Blurry Transparency. click OK. When the rendering process is complete. 6 In the Environment dialog box.

22 On the File menu. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. 21 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Design Bar. you add two sheets with titleblocks to the project. In the next exercise. On the second sheet. you add a rendered view and an elevation view. This is the captured rendering from the previous steps. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. you add this to a sheet. expand Renderings. click Display Model. An expandable branch called Renderings is added to the Project Browser. You add a floor plan and schedule to the first sheet. click Capture Rendering.rvt 106 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .19 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. and double-click {3D}. click Save. Documenting the Building Model In this exercise. Documenting the Building Model.

3 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The titleblocks that are listed are loaded into the project.Add a sheet and titleblock to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click Cancel. Titleblocks are a family just like any other component. 8 Select the titleblock and zoom in to the lower right corner. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. You are prompted to select a titleblock. click Load. You can create a titleblock family and load it into the project or navigate to it from this dialog box. 7 Try to select the logo in the upper right corner. click Metric Library. click OK to use the loaded titleblock. enter your name. The blue text is text that you can modify. 9 Click Owner. Notice that several titleblocks are installed with the software. click Sheet. Creating Your First Building Model | 107 . The text is not selectable by design. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. The creator of this titleblock family did not want this text to be modifiable in the project environment. and press ENTER. 4 Double-click the Titleblocks folder.

14 In the Views dialog box. If you add views of different scales. click Project Information. click Add View. and click Add View to Sheet. 15 Move the cursor to the center of the titleblock and click. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . In this case. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Notice that your name is displayed for Client Name. Add a view to the titleblock 12 Zoom out until you can see the entire sheet. The Scale is blank and is filled in when a view is added to the titleblock. referring the reader to the view titles. 11 Enter First Building Model for Project Name. Titleblock numbering is sequential and automatic. and click OK. the label displays As Indicated. select Floor Plan: Level 1.10 On the Settings menu. the next sheet and titleblock will be A102.

16 On the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 109 . 18 On the View menu. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice the elevation symbols display. click Deactivate View. and on the context menu. 20 Under Visibility. click Modify. you activated the view specifically to turn off the elevation symbol visibility. However. 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 21 Right-click the view. You can work on the building model within this view. clear Elevations. Notice drag handles display on the ends of the view title. 17 Right-click the view. The titleblock becomes an underlay and the view becomes active. click Activate View. 23 Select the view. and on the context menu. 25 Drag the view to the lower left corner of the titleblock as shown. 24 Adjust the view title length by dragging the shape handles under the extents of the view. Relocate the view title 22 Drag the view title under the view.

drag Door Schedule-Level 1 onto the upper right corner of the titleblock.26 Zoom in to the lower right corner. under Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the scale value has updated. 28 In the Project Browser. 27 Zoom out until the titleblock fits within the drawing area. 110 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

30 Using the column drag handles. adjust each column width so no text wrapping occurs. Creating Your First Building Model | 111 .29 Zoom in to the top of the schedule. 31 Zoom out and move the schedule into the upper right corner of the titleblock.

notice the z symbol in the center edge. click Save. under Renderings.TIP When the schedule is selected. 37 On the File menu. drag North to the lower left corner of sheet A102. 33 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. the schedule breaks in half. under Elevations (Building Elevations). drag {3D} to the upper right corner of the new titleblock. You can adjust the lengths of each section after the break. modify the location and width of the view titles. the Scale label displays As Indicated. 34 In the Project Browser. You have completed your first building model. click OK to use the default titleblock. If you click this. click Close. Add various views to a second sheet 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet. 35 In the Project Browser. 36 On the File menu. If necessary. Because these two views have different view scales. 112 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

113 . which is independent of the project settings.Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial. you create an office template. Finally. In the second lesson. you modify the system environment. In the first lesson. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project. you learn how to modify your Autodesk Revit Building working environment. and set it as your default template.

click OK. click Training Files. click the value for Selection Color. 14 Click the General tab. click Options. select yellow. click Browse. 2 On the Settings menu. specify the following options: ■ ■ Select One hour for Save Reminder interval. 19 On the Design Bar.Modifying System Settings In this lesson. click Modify. 5 On the File menu. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . selection default options. the elements causing the error display using this color. and click OK. and click Open. 12 Under Colors. notification preferences. 8 Select m_Tutorial_Default. click Wall. under Template file. 13 In the Color dialog box. they are not saved to project or template files. click the Graphics tab. click Close to close all open projects. 9 In the New Project dialog box. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. Set graphics settings 1 On the File menu. Notice that the drawing area is black. select Invert background color. 16 Click OK. and click OK. 4 Under Colors. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Building working environment. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. click the Graphics tab. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. and select the wall. When an error occurs. and your username when using worksets. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Building.rte in the Metric folder. 6 In the New Project dialog box. Select None for Tooltip Assistance. 10 On the Settings menu. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. click Options. 15 Under Notifications. journal cleanup options. 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. These settings control the graphics. 3 In the Options dialog box. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project. 11 In the Options dialog box.

Notice that the system settings apply to this project. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. click Options. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. click No.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 28 On the Settings menu. If prompted. 25 On the File menu. Select Red for Selection Color. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. the family template files. you specify your default file locations. Specifying File Locations. Modifying System Settings | 115 . 32 On the File menu. select your preferred Save Reminder interval. 27 Open the m_Settings. These settings control location of important Revit Building files such as your default project template. and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. as well as the material and rendering libraries. These files are used primarily in the software support process. click the Training Files icon. do not save the changes. click Modify. 30 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ ■ Under Notifications. Your login name displays by default. click Close. 24 When prompted to save. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). 23 On the File menu. 26 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Building session. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 29 In the Options dialog box. 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. Under Journal File Cleanup. clear Invert background color. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area. 20 On the Design Bar.Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. click Open. click Close. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Building sessions. Under Username. 31 Click OK. the family libraries.

Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog box. and you can create new libraries. Each library path points Revit Building to a folder of families or training files. saving. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog box. In the following illustration. select the folder to save your files to by default. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. click Browse. or loading a Revit Building file. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog box. centralized. TIP To view a template. and Import dialog boxes. When you are opening. click Browse. and click Browse to select a template. However. Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 8 Click Cancel. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. click Options. notice the list of library names. 11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. On the File menu. and change the name to My Library. 10 Under Libraries. Save. such as in a large. 7 In the Options dialog box. and click the arrow that displays on the right side of the field. Load. 2 In the Options dialog box.Set file locations 1 On the Settings menu. and click OK. 5 Under Default path for user files. You can modify the existing library names and path. 12 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. click the File Locations tab. click Browse. under Default path for family template files. This path is set automatically during the installation process. 3 Under Default template file. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. click . These are the family templates that you use to create new families. you can start a new project with that template. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog box. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. 4 Click Cancel. choose New  ➤ Project. under Libraries.

Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 21 Under Libraries. This path is determined during installation. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. or families. and Import dialog boxes. templates. The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog box. click Open. This path specifies the location of the AccuRender® texture library. click Options. 15 Click until My Library is at the top of the list. Notice that Revit Building navigates directly to the library path. 16 On the File menu. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. Specify rendering settings 23 Click the Rendering tab. 19 On the Settings menu. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Save. 14 Under Library Name. view the current path. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Building. Modifying System Settings | 117 . and click OK. specify the new location here.13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Building projects. select My Library. click the My Library icon. and click OK. 22 Click to delete the library. 18 Click Cancel. 20 Click the File Locations tab. and select it as the library path. Load. If you work in a large office. If you want to relocate this path. Specifying Spelling Options. click My Library. 24 Under AccuRender resource location. 25 Click OK.

Modifying Snap Settings. click Browse. 18 On the Settings menu. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. click Options. 19 In the Options dialog box. If prompted. 9 In the text editor. click Modify. click Edit. work with snapping turned off. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 10 On the File menu. click Training Files. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Save. 3 Under Settings. 2 In the Options dialog box. Modify snap increments 1 On the File menu. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 14 Click in the drawing area. 17 Click OK. enter sheetmtl-Cu. click Save. you modify snap settings. In this exercise. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 16 On the Tools menu. click Edit. 24 In the Options dialog box. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. 25 On the File menu. click OK. click OK. 20 Under Settings. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project. click Spelling. You can turn snap settings on and off. click the Spelling tab. click Text. click OK. and then click File  ➤ Exit. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Exit. 6 On the File menu. 22 In the text editor. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box.Modify spelling settings 1 On the Settings menu. you modify snap increments.rte in the Metric folder. 5 In the text editor. 5 In the New Project dialog box. under Template file. click Restore Defaults. do not save the changes. delete sheetmtl-CU. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. click Options. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 12 On the Standard toolbar. click to open a new Revit Building project using the default template. 4 Under Personal dictionary. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 23 On the File menu of the text editor. click Exit. 11 In the Options dialog box. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 2 In the New Project dialog box. and click Open. click Close. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 4 Select m_Tutorial_Default. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 7 On the File menu. click Edit. click the Spelling tab.

click Snaps. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. 9 In the Snaps dialog box. If you do not have a wheel button. This dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and numerical keyboard entries. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. While sketching. 7 Under Dimension Snaps. zoom out until it does so. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area.. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. Revit Building uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. For example. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 10 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. 8 Under Object Snaps. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. If it does not. use the wheel button on your mouse. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. A listening dimension refers specifically to the dimension that appears while in the act of sketching. and enter 500 . snapping reverts to the system default settings. notice the two-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. click Wall. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching. Modifying System Settings | 119 . click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. As you zoom in and out within a view. click OK. and move the cursor to the right.6 On the Settings menu. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. This is the increment that you added previously.

and move the cursor to the right. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. and click Wall. You create and modify materials. and delete the value 500 . Do not set the wall end point. 25 On the File menu. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. When you apply a material to a component. 24 Click OK. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. and specify the wall endpoint. click Snaps. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. you create a new material and apply it to a model component. fill patterns. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. Using these options. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. and do not save the file. 22 On the Settings menu. and use it to complete the exercises. 18 Enter SM. Modifying Project Settings. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. click Close. Finally. click Modify. it will snap to the endpoints.. lines. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. the midpoint. If you move the cursor along the wall. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. Notice that snapping is once again active. 21 Move the cursor downward. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. annotations. save the project file with a unique name. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. and object styles. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. and the wall edges. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint.

2 Scroll down. nor is there an AccuRender texture applied. and select Masonry . This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. Notice that there is no Surface Pattern applied to this material. enter Masonry . Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. However. Modifying Project Settings | 121 . 4 In the New Material dialog box. click Open. In the steps that follow.Stone for Name. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. This list includes all materials required by loaded model components. all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project.rvt located in the Metric folder. click Materials. click the Training Files icon. you render a region to observe the changes. this material provides a good foundation for the new material. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls.In the steps that follow. Create a new material 1 On the Settings menu. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. Masonry-Fieldstone. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. When a model component is loaded into a project. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog box. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. Open m_Settings. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and click OK.Fieldstone. 3 Click Duplicate.

10 In the Image Mapping dialog box. 6 Navigate to BMCD2AR3\Bitmap Textures\Stone\. 13 In the Save Material As dialog box. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. click the Maps tab. you help prevent the appearance of repetitive patterns within the rendering. 20 Enter the new wall name. By offsetting the X and Y values of the image map. expand Floor Plans. and click Edit. Before closing the Materials dialog box. The upper wall now uses the Fieldstone on CMU AccuRender texture when you render it. 23 On the right side of the Material field. 22 Click in the Material field for layer #1. click to select a texture. 122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .Fieldstone material.Fieldstone for Name. 9 Select the entry under Image Mapping. 26 Select the right exterior wall. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Masonry . expand Views (all). click This is the material you created previously. 21 In the Value field for Structure. 24 In the Materials dialog box. notice that the Surface Pattern is still blank.Brick. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. click the Orientation tab. click OK. click Edit/New. 14 In the Material Library dialog box. The AccuRender texture Masonry . and click OK. . enter 0. and click . All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. 12 In the Material Editor dialog box.Fieldstone is now part of your AccuRender User library. 27 Press CTRL. on the Material menu. 15 Click OK. and click OK. Fieldstone on CMU.Fieldstone for the name. 28 In the Type Selector. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . Apply the new material 16 In the Project Browser. enter Masonry . 19 Click Duplicate. and click OK. 17 Select the upper exterior wall. 25 Click OK three times. select user from the list of libraries. and select Stone82. click OK.75 for X and Y. click Edit. 8 In the Material Editor dialog box. and select the remaining two unchanged walls. 7 In the Material Library dialog box. and click OK. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . 11 Under Offset. and double-click Level 1. click New  ➤ Use Current Material as Template.Modify material settings 5 Under AccuRender. In the next exercise.

30 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and click Rendering. drag a rectangle around the 3D image. the fieldstone material that you created is displayed. click Display Model on the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Zoom into the model. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. When finished. Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. 32 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns. This is because a material has not been applied to the roof. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. In the following exercise. click Region Raytrace. 31 In the drawing area. and drag a rectangle around the area you want to render. the rendering process begins. Modifying Project Settings | 123 . Notice the roof did not render. you apply a material to default roofs and resolve this. select Region Raytrace. click Save As. 33 On the File menu. click Display Model. 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click the Design Bar. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view.29 On the View Toolbar. click . and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns.rvt. After you draw the rectangle around the 3D model. In the exercise. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. Controlling Object Styles.

Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Revit Building\Training. 11 Enter Fieldstone for Name. click Import. 10 Under Custom.56 for Import scale. such as steel. TIP Typically. and click OK.There are two types of fill patterns: model and drafting. 5 Click New. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. click Custom. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 7 Under Custom. 3 Under Pattern Type. click Fill Patterns. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog box. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. Drafting pattern density is fixed. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. select fldstn. and click Open. choose Model. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. and enter . expand Elevations. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog box. 9 Select Fieldstone_Model. 2 On the Settings menu. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall.pat from the Common folder. Apply the fieldstone pattern 13 Select the east exterior wall. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. and double-click East. 12 Click OK. 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Building software. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. m_Settings-in progress.

28 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Project Settings | 125 . In the Materials dialog box. For example. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . there are often multiple window types within a project. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click Edit/New. 25 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. TIP If the pattern does not display. and click OK. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. Controlling Object Styles.Fieldstone material.14 On the Options Bar. click Save. under Pattern Type. click in the Material field for layer #1. The east wall of the building displays as solid fill. click . 18 On the right side of the Materials field. select Model.” You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog box and apply it to all window types. click Modify. 23 Click OK three times. 19 Under Surface Pattern. click to select a fill pattern. 26 On the View Toolbar. 16 In the Value field for Structure. 24 On the Design Bar.Fieldstone. adjust your zoom settings as needed. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. Object Styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. Controlling Object Styles You can use Object Styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. 27 On the File menu. click . notice that there is no surface pattern applied to the Masonry . Object Styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 21 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. 22 In the Materials dialog box. click . click Edit. 20 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. click OK. you can set the window frame material to “By Category.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. expand 3D Views. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 2 On the keyboard. m_Settings-in progress.rvt. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region) and drag a rectangle around the three left windows facing you. Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D Model View.

16 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Modify. 5 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. and select 8 In the Materials dialog box. click the Trim Exterior Material value. and select the circular window on the second level. click OK. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. Modifying Project Settings | 127 . 4 Select one of the windows. click the Trim Exterior value. . click OK. click By Category. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. and select 15 In the Materials dialog box. click . click Edit/New. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Shading with Edges. . click Model Graphics Style. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Other. click OK. click OK. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. under Other. click Edit/New. click By Category.3 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 18 On the Design Bar. 11 Zoom out. click .

White for Trim material. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Windows. click 29 On the File menu. and click OK. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 28 On the View Toolbar. .rvt. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. Notice that the material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. 21 Under Category. 22 Under the Windows category. 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . select Trim . 23 On the right side of the Material field. 27 Under Category. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 20 In the Object Styles dialog box. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles. click . click Object Styles.19 On the Settings menu.Granite for name. 26 On the Settings menu. click Object Styles. and click OK twice. specify Trim . expand Windows. click OK. m_Settings-in progress. Notice that the external window frames are now white. select Trim. 25 In the Object Styles dialog box. click Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. 24 In the Materials dialog box. and click in the Material field. click Save.

m_Settings-in progress. click Object Styles. 11 Click OK. click New. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. now you must apply it. click Model Graphics Style. under Category. Modifying Project Settings | 129 . select Roofs.rvt. and select Roof Line for Line Pattern.Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. and click Hidden Line. 10 Select Red for Line Color. is open with the 3D view active. The line style is applied to the roof in all views. 9 In the Object Styles dialog box. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog box. 7 On the View Control Bar. There are two ways to apply the line style to the roof. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. You have created a new line pattern. 2 On the Settings menu. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog box. enter Roof Line for Name. click Line Patterns. 8 On the Settings menu.

16 Select Solid for Line Pattern. select Roofs. under Category. select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 5 for Line Weight. This overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view.12 In the Project Browser. 24 On the Settings menu. 13 On the View Control Bar. 14 On the Settings menu. 19 Click the Model Categories tab. double-click 3D Model View. under Floor Plans. and click Hidden Line. and click OK. 22 Click OK twice. click New. Select Roof Line for Line Pattern. under 3D Views. double-click Site. and select Roofs for Visibility. 26 Enter Zoning Setback for Name. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Create a new line style 23 In the Project Browser. 18 On the View menu. Notice that the line style displays in this view also. 17 Click OK. 15 In the Object Styles dialog box. under Modify Subcategories. Notice the site topography and the property lines. click Visibility/Graphics. click Model Graphics Style. click Object Styles. 20 Click Override for Line Style Projection. Select Blue for Line Color. click Line Styles. 25 In the Line Styles dialog box. 21 In the Select Line Style dialog box. and select Black for Line Color.

Notice the Zoning Setback lines appear in this view. 36 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. Modifying Annotations In this exercise.) Click . specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight Projection. Enter -3000 mm for Offset. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. click . (Make sure you specify a negative value. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . click Lines. 29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 40 Click OK. and clear Zoning Setback. ■ 32 Click the upper-left corner of the property line to begin the rectangle. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. and click to set the rectangle endpoint. 39 On the Model Categories tab. select Zoning Setback. 34 On the View menu. Modifying Annotations. click Visibility/Graphics. under Floor Plans. 37 In the Project Browser. 28 Click OK. click Save. 30 In the Type Selector. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that the line style has not been applied to the roof in this view because you applied the override to the 3D Model View only. double-click Level 1 Annotated. specify the following: ■ ■ Click . click . move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the property lines. Select Red for Line Color. and clear Zoning Setback.27 For the Zoning Setback category. 33 On the View Toolbar. expand Lines. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type number. 41 On the View Toolbar. Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. 38 On the View menu. 31 In the Options Bar. expand Lines. 42 On the File menu. 35 On the Model Categories tab. The -3000mm offset displays inside the property lines.

Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. click Modify. is open with the 3D View active. 11 Select any window in the east or west wall. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type number. and select M_Window Tag . Load a new window tag 10 In the Project Browser. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. m_Settings-in progress. In the Type Selector. click . 6 In the Format dialog box: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 7 Click OK twice.Number. You have created a new dimension style. scroll down to Windows. 2 On the Settings menu. click Duplicate. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. double-click Level 1 Annotated. under Category.rvt. Notice that the windows on the east and west walls are tagged. 16 In the Tags dialog box. navigate to the Annotations/Architectural folder of the Metric Library. 5 Under Text. click Dimension. Select Feet and fractional inches for Units. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear. 18 In the Open dialog box. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. 3 In the Type Properties dialog box. 14 Click Cancel. m_Settings-in progress. In the steps that follow. notice that there is a Linear . 15 On the Settings menu.Imperial and click OK. 17 Click Load. and that the tag displays the window type number rather than the window instance number. 4 Enter the name Linear . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click the default value for Units Format. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Imperial dimension available.rvt.

Leave M_Window Tag . 31 On the Design Bar. clear Leader.Number. 25 On the left side of the north wall. select M_Window Tag . click Modify. 32 On the View Toolbar. click the three left-most windows. notice that the label displays 1i. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 20 In the Tags dialog box.Number. 26 On the Design Bar. dimension values display using this setting.In the preview image. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Save. 27 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. click M_Window Tag . click Tag All Not Tagged. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. verify that Create is clear. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. In the second section. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. 21 Under Loaded Tags. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Under Category.Number. Modifying Project Settings | 133 . 19 Click Open. Temporary Dimensions. M_Window Tag . you specify the project units of measurements. you modify the detail level assignments. In the final section. the other displays the instance value. Specifying Units of Measurement. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. you modify the temporary dimension settings. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. click Tag. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. Unless overridden.Number is now the assigned tag.Number as the assigned tag. click 33 On the File menu. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . Notice that both window tag types can coexist within the same view. Specifying Units of Measurement. 22 Click OK. In the first section. and Detail Level Options. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. you modify three settings that have a broad impact on the project. m_Settings-in progress. and click OK. . 30 In the Type Selector. notice Window Tags appears twice. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. A window instance tag displays on each selected window. 24 On the Options Bar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 29 On the east wall. Temporary Dimensions. select one of the window tags that displays the type value.rvt. 28 Under Leader. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value.

under Area. Modifying Project Browser Organization. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. click the default value for Format. 13 On the File menu. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. expand Floor Plans. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. 12 Click OK. Open c_Project_Browser. 2 In the Project Units dialog box. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. dimensions use these project settings. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . select Faces. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. expand Views (all).rvt from the Common folder. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. select Openings. click the default value for Format. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. select To the nearest 100 for Rounding. click . 6 Click OK. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. click Detail Level. 14 On the File menu. You do not select a view scale to move it.Set units of measurement 1 On the Settings menu. Specify detail levels 10 On the Settings menu. In this exercise. and expand 3D Views. In this table. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog box. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. under Length. click Close. and click OK. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. and click OK. 5 In the Format dialog box. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 On the Settings menu. click Temporary Dimensions. click Save. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Format dialog box. 4 In the Project Units dialog box. click Project Units. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. select 0 decimal places for Rounding. 9 Under Doors and Windows. In this project. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. 8 Under Walls. select meters squared for Unit suffix. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. Unless overridden. and click OK.

Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 On the Settings menu. click Browser Organization. 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Browser Organization. On the Project Browser. 4 On the Settings menu.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . click Browser Organization. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg .Phase 2-Structure West Wing . 10 In the Project Browser. expand each view type.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Apply. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. Modifying Project Settings | 135 . select Type/Discipline. 12 Click the Sheets tab.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog box. select Discipline. and click OK. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. 2 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Settings menu. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. expand each sheet set. expand Sheets (all). notice that Views are grouped based on Phase. under Sheets. 8 Select Phase. 5 On the Views tab. 6 In the Project Browser.

click the Folders tab. navigate to your preferred directory. click Close. Although Revit Building provides many templates to choose from. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog box. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. and Discipline. If you want to save this file. enter a unique file name. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. levels. 21 In the Project Browser. In this lesson. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. named print settings. In the lesson that follows. and expand both Architectural and Structural. You can save Project Browser organization schemes. It is mostly conceptual and designed as a road map with options for your consideration. You can also save these settings in a template file. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. dimensions styles. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. Creating an Office Template. and click OK. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your office template. 22 On the File menu. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. you create an office template. and click OK. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. View Type (Family and Type). By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. you create a Revit Building template file and set it as your default template. 136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .Create a new browser organization name 15 On the Settings menu. click Browser Organization. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. expand Complete. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. under Views. and view names. and click New. Proceed to the next lesson. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. 16 Click the Views tab. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog box. and render scenes in a template. When you create new projects. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. and click OK. expand 3D Views. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work.

structural or construction. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. each is modified in a way to make it useful to the applicable industry. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. click Browse. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. select Project Template. 12 Under Template File. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. For example. 13 Select the default template. for instance. 8 In the Project Browser. Creating an Office Template | 137 . select Project for Create new. expand Elevations. 9 On the File menu. If you want to use a template other than the default. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. and click OK. you select the starting point for your office template. expand Views. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. When you create the material. 6 In the Project Browser. 2 In the New Project dialog box. For example. when you create a new project. you can select it now. click Close. close them. drag a zoom region around the level heads. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. and double-click North. click Browse. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. When you create a new template based on an existing template. in the drawing area. Other templates.Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 On the File menu. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. click New ➤ Project. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Modifying Project Settings. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. 5 Click OK. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. click New  ➤ Project. you modify the project settings for your new template. and click Open. such as the structural template. 11 Under Create New. In that case. If you have additional projects open. 14 Click Open. Other than the default template. 7 On the View menu. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. the same rules apply. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point.rte template. Whenever you create a new project or template. Review existing templates 1 On the File menu. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework. 3 Under Template File. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from.

you can do so by going to the Material menu and selecting New. You may want to save the material to a library located on a network path. click Materials. Specify object styles 9 On the Settings menu. specific modifications are not dictated. 8 Click OK when finished. line patterns. Create and modify fill patterns 5 On the Settings menu. For more details on modifying these settings. RELATED See Modifying Project Settings for more information on creating new fill patterns. You can align. During this exercise. line colors. When you save a new AccuRender material designed to be used in an office template. 2 Scroll down the Name list. and move model patterns. create and modify them as needed. weights. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. or modify existing patterns. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. 4 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialog boxes. If there are custom AccuRender materials that you want to add to the template. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. you may want to specify their appearance when rendered. 3 Under AccuRender. If you create or modify new materials. You can do this by setting the AccuRender Texture. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles.In this exercise. Modifying System Settings or refer to the Help documentation. 6 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. click Object Styles. and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects. In the Object Styles dialog box. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. rotate. click Fill Patterns. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. see the previous lesson. 7 Create new fill patterns as needed. Create and modify materials 1 On the Settings menu. you can set line weights. Choose the appropriate option. and create the AccuRender material. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. click to access the AccuRender Material Library. Observe the materials that are already defined. RELATED See Modifying System Settings for more information on creating new AccuRender materials. be aware that access to the original material library may be necessary at some point.

21 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 25 Modify existing line weights as needed. one for perspective model line styles. such as section lines and dimension lines. create new line subcategories. 17 For existing line categories. 10 Click the Model Objects tab. such as walls and windows in orthographic views. 22 Modify existing line weights as needed. 12 If necessary. line color.TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. create new subcategories. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects such as walls and windows in perspective views. 13 Click the Annotation Objects tab. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. modify the line weight. In the dialog box. 11 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. and one for annotation symbol line styles. and scroll through the list of categories. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of modeling components. 15 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog box. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 27 Modify existing line weights as needed. there are three tabs: one for model component line styles. 33 Click OK. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 28 Click OK. select it. 24 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 32 Add and delete line patterns as needed. Modify line patterns 29 On the Settings menu. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. You can add and delete view scales. 31 To modify a line pattern. or line pattern as needed. and click Edit. and create new subcategories as needed. 18 If necessary. Modify line styles 16 On the Settings menu. 30 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 14 Modify categories. click Line Patterns. 26 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. click Line Styles. 23 Add and delete view scales as needed. Modify line weights 20 On the Settings menu. Creating an Office Template | 139 . You can define the widths of 16 different pens for six different drawing scales. 19 Click OK. click Line Weights.

56 Specify the Slope option.Modify arrowheads 34 On the Settings menu. name the style. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. and specify the properties. when you add a door with the tag option selected. 43 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. 35 Select the Type drop-down list. Modify loaded tags 47 On the Settings menu. 50 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 53 Modify the unit settings if necessary. and specify the properties. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. 54 Click OK. and Angle settings. 45 Click OK. 41 Select the Type drop-down list. 140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Project Units. 52 Under Length. Modify Dimension Styles 40 On the Settings menu. 38 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. click Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. 57 Click OK. The arrowheads configured within this dialog box can be applied to text notes. and choose a decimal symbol. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. 44 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. To see the details of a particular style. To see the details of a particular style. Specify project units 51 On the Settings menu. 37 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 49 To load new annotation tags. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Angular. 46 Repeat the previous five steps for angular and radial dimensions. 48 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. Volume. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog box. 39 Click OK. click Load. ■ ■ On the Settings menu. and click OK. Linear. and dimensions. tags. click Duplicate. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. 55 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. angular. 42 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. select it from this list. The tag assignments in this dialog box dictate the default tag for each category. click Format. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Radial. select it from this list. For example. and radial dimensions are modified separately. name the style. On the Settings menu. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. 36 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. In the Tags dialog box. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. click Duplicate.

there are several additional commands that control the project environment. For example. The detail level is based on view scale. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. In such a case. or Fine. click Temporary Dimensions. In a typical project. 60 Under Doors and Windows. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser.Specify temporary dimensions 58 On the Settings menu. 63 Review the table. Medium. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. Modify project browser organization 65 On the Settings menu. Although these settings can be saved within a template. 72 Click OK. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. 61 Click OK. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. create new browser organization types. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. or Edit existing organization types. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 64 Click OK. create new browser organization types. 70 Delete. When you create a new view. click the arrows between columns. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. Creating an Office Template | 141 . specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. TIP In the drawing area. click Browser Organization. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog box. see Modifying Project Browser Organization. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. Rename. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. Using the arrows between the columns. or Edit existing organization types. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. To move the view scales. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. 69 Click the Sheets tab. 68 If necessary. Additional project settings 73 On the Settings menu. and move view scales as needed. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. Specify detail levels 62 On the Settings menu. click Detail Level. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. 67 Delete. Rename. 59 Under Walls. you can save rendered scene settings to a template. 66 In the Browser Organization dialog box. 71 If necessary. However. click the Views tab.

Loading and Modifying Families and Groups. If necessary. In the steps that follow. If this selection is satisfactory. and click Open. you can set up the phases. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. However. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. If necessary. 2 In the Type Selector. you can create and modify area schemes if there are default settings applicable to most projects. You can load any family or group into a template. there are some important thoughts to consider. or modify a door. or add to this selection. Although the options are endless. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. You can find additional information in Help. See Modifying Views and View Templates. or use the Project Browser. if you loaded every window type you could find. Make modifications. In addition. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson.Each of these areas are covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. furniture. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. you can create scene settings and save them to the template. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you changed a window within a project. This could be useful for things such as hardware. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. select from the Options Bar. phase filters. 74 Proceed to the next exercise. Use the instructions in the table below to load. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. Phases Project Phasing Area Settings Area Analysis View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. titleblocks. Use the table below as a checklist. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. select Load. do so before starting this exercise. Obviously. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. you can move onto the next component type. notice the list of doors already loaded. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views. Links to associated tutorials are provided. create. modify. and make modifications in each area as necessary. you may want to delete. See Modifying Render Scene Settings Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings Render Scene If necessary. Select it. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. you can set the default contour line interval. create. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. Modify door type 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Each command is available on the Settings menu. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you do both. 3 To modify. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. For example. and the poche depth. you could load detail components. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. the section cut material. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. click Door. or load a new door type. and electrical fixtures. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. In the Element Properties dialog box. Although this is possible. For example. Depending on the intended use of this template. Site Settings If necessary. or electrical fixtures. If necessary. and click OK. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. select Edit/New.

You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. Enter Name. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. and click OK.Goal: Create new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. Modify type properties. Creating an Office Template | 143 . and select the titleblock type. Notice that each family category is listed. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. and click OK. Press ESC twice to return to the template. click Load from Library. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. select Edit/New. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. expand Families. Click Duplicate.) 9 Expand the titleblock. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with. 6 On the File menu. 4 Click OK. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded.

you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. you create the views required for your template. click 11 Click <<Preview. click Load. In this exercise. Discipline. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. RELATED For more information. Notice it has Revit Building in the upper-right corner. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. Create and modify view templates 1 On the Settings menu. you can apply a view template to any view. you created new projects using different templates. View Range. and click Delete. In addition. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. Detail Level. To do so. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. load. This titleblock is currently part of the template. 2 Select Architectural Plan for Name. see Creating a Titleblock Family. 12 Click OK. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock.10 On the Options Bar. 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. click View Templates. To load a titleblock. In this exercise. you will first modify view templates. create. right-click the component. In addition. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. Modifying Views and View Templates. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . At any time. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. .

After applying the template. duplicate. and. select Site Plan. under Elevations. review the existing floor plans. 12 In the Project Browser. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. and then click OK. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. and click OK. 4 If necessary. expand Floor Plans. click Apply View Template. double-click Site. double-click Level 2. double-click South. In addition. and double-click Level 1. select Make Plan View. 27 Recreate additional levels as needed. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. open the view from the Project Browser. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. under Floor Plans. duplicate. under Floor Plans. Black level heads have no associated views. click Apply View Template. Rename. 24 In the Options Bar. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. the view is not linked to the template in any way. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. click Apply View Template. review the floor plans. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. expand Views. or delete this view. This options means that every time a new plan view is created. right-click Level 1. Notice the level names. Upon the application of the view template. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. you can rename this view according to your preference. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. 22 In the Project Browser. and apply the appropriate template. notice that you have the option to rename. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. You can also duplicate or delete the view. 6 Click OK. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. 15 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list. 8 On the View menu. Make sure you are still in the South Elevation view. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. click Apply. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. 21 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 11 Click Apply. Creating an Office Template | 145 . or delete them as needed. If necessary. click Apply. in the context menu. and click OK. click Level from the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the View menu. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. 20 In the Project Browser. and elevations.By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. 16 On the View menu. 23 To add additional levels to the template. 18 If you modified any other view templates. ceiling plans. under Floor Plans. Blue level heads have associated plan views. the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template.

30 In the Project Browser. This can save significant time and ensure office standards are maintained. expand 3D Views. and click OK. On the Formatting tab. to orient and save the view. On the Appearance tab. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. click . modify settings as needed. To do so. You can add schedules to a template. right-click {3D}. 34 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View dialog box. If you have already loaded your office titleblocks into the template. click Schedule/Quantities. You are prompted to select a titleblock. 36 To save the view. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. 32 To create additional 3D views. on the View toolbar. assign filters. and modify their properties accordingly. select and order required fields. Add sheets to the template 42 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet. 146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 39 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Create and modify schedules 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select one. supply a view name. modify settings as needed. Dynamically Modify View. and click OK. click . and click View Properties. 41 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template.Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. 35 You can use Orient to a Direction or Orient to a View to set the camera location and target. You can use this tool. select the category type. go to the View menu. 31 Rename the 3D View. and select Rename. on the View toolbar. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click OK. On the Filter tab. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. click 29 In the Project Browser. click 33 On the View toolbar. 40 Click OK. under 3D Views. 38 If you want to add schedules to your template. If necessary. modify settings as needed. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views  ➤ 3D Views.

and a Clouds tab appears. the relevant tab appears. it is completely bare. Modifying Render Scene Settings. You can still add views to the sheet. 8 Under Scene Settings. 7 Click OK. Modifying Render Scene Settings You can create interior and exterior scene settings and save them within the template. Alpha Channel: Lets you use the image's alpha channel (embedded pixel-by-pixel masking information). 2 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between two selected colors. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. if one exists. while in winter. you could render basic scenes much faster and with greater consistency without the need to spend time modifying these settings. settings. select the Clouds option. 10 Under Plant Season. jpeg. Choose from bitmap. Be sure that you have installed this software. for example. 5 Specify the background color. if not. a deciduous tree in summer appears in full bloom with leaves. and changes the color automatically depending on the sun and sky conditions. 3 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between three selected colors. 44 To rename or renumber the sheet. and then click OK. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. click Sun. Solid Color: Specifies a single color that appears behind your rendering. for example. and click Rename. ■ ■ ■ ■ You can also save and load environmental settings. and click OK. click Environment. under Scene Settings. click Render Scene. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. and provide a name for the scene. After the sheet is created.TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. Create and modify an exterior scene 1 On the Settings menu. or targa. Background images are available from the AccuRender software. Creating an Office Template | 147 . choose the appropriate season for plant rendering. and colors. 2 Under Type. Different seasons directly affect any AccuRender plants in the view. you can install AccuRender by running the install program on the Revit Building CD. Haze: Simulates effects from slight “depth cues” to dense fog. To do so. ■ Automatic Sky: Treats the background as a sky. 45 Create new sheets as needed. 9 Specify the date and time. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Clouds: Adds procedurally generated clouds to the background. Ground Plane: Adds an infinite plane to your rendering. 3 Click OK. right-click the sheet in the Project Browser. and click New  ➤ Place Titleblock. place. By adding a default interior and exterior rendered scene setting to the template. select the titleblock and delete it. exterior-default. select Exterior. for example. go to the View menu. ■ ■ ■ 6 Specify the Advanced features: TIP As you select options. To later add a titleblock to a sheet. which is included on the Revit Building CD. 43 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. select the default titleblock. ■ Background Image: Lets you map images to your background. tiff.

Select View Culling to eliminate rendering model faces that lie outside the area being raytraced. This setting is effective for region raytraces. 16 Repeat the steps you performed when creating an exterior scene. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. but provides the highest quality. but also increases the solution time. ■ 13 Specify Raytrace Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an antialiasing option: Draft. Meaningful values are between 0 and 1. AccuRender always processes transparent faces. Best is the slowest. Modifying Import/Export Settings. Higher values cause the color of reflected light to more closely approximate the color of the reflecting surface. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. Better. and click OK. click New. ■ Select Soft Shadows to produce more realistic shadow edges. ■ ■ ■ Create and modify an interior scene 14 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. ■ Specify the Solution Goal: This limits the radiosity calculation to a certain number of steps. when used in conjunction with high antialiasing and soft shadows it can produce very high quality renderings with fewer radiosity artifacts. Shadows based on the size of the light source are calculated. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 On the File menu. Best. ■ 12 Specify the Radiosity Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an option: Draft. 148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 Proceed to the next exercise. the quality also is lower. When you import a DWG or DXF file. This value is used both for the initial number of steps when you first use the Radiate command and for any subsequent calculation by clicking Continue from the Options Bar. 17 Click OK when finished. Specify the Color Bleeding value: This controls the color saturation of reflected light. Select Recalc Radiosity Lights to recalculate the shadows cast during the radiosity preprocess. however. Setting the quality to Better or Best reduces meshing artifacts. Select Blurry Reflections to affect the look of reflections in glass. This is a very time consuming operation but. such as jaggy shadows or light leaks. Radiosity quality affects the relative coarseness of the mesh and the amount of time to process the solution. Select Blurry Transparency to affect the look of material seen behind glass. Increasing the antialiasing level adds considerable rendering time. Draft provides the lowest quality and fastest speed.11 Specify Culling options: ■ Select Back Face Culling to eliminate rendering on model faces that do not face the camera eye. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN. Higher values cause longer rendering times.Default. Medium. This works on opaque faces only. Medium. for example Interior . ■ Set values for Reflection and Transparency bounces. Back face culling decreases rendering time and space. Better. 15 Provide a name for the new interior scene. The number of bounces determines how many levels of reflections or transparencies are permitted. Good. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. Antialiasing is a process in which more than one ray is shot for each pixel in an attempt to better resolve the value of the pixel. Good. These scenes are now part of the template and will provide users with two basic rendering scenes. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Best.

Creating Named Print Settings. see Scheduling Shared Parameters or Scheduling Project Parameters. you could use Shared Parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. 9 Select Save As. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. The layer names are stored in a text file (either exportlayers. and click Save. and related multi-category tags and schedules. These settings are retained within the project template. Multi-Category Tags employ Shared Parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. project parameters. select Save As. and they become the set mappings for the project. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Building program installation directory. Using Shared Parameters. TIP Color ID in the Export Layers dialog box corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Project Parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. detailed instructions are not supplied since each office has a unique set of needs. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter.txt for AutoCAD or exportlayersdgn. name the file. When scheduling. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. 2 For each category. name the file. and so on. When you import a DWG or DXF file. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. Revit Building presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. select Save As. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. Modify export layers for DGN 4 On the File menu. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. They cannot be shared with other projects. You can save these mappings to a text file. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. therefore. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. and click Save. 8 In the dialog box. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. doors. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with Shared Parameters). 5 For each category. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. windows. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. When you create a multi-category schedule. and click Save. Modify import line weights 7 On the File menu. name the file. For example.The Export Layers command maps Revit Building categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. project parameters. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. for example. In this exercise.txt for MicroStation). You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Building line weight. and so on. Creating an Office Template | 149 .

and choose a shared parameter. 3 Name and save the file. Set up project parameters 13 On the Settings menu. enter a parameter name. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 7 Under Parameter group.Set up shared parameters 1 On the File menu. you can load them into the template. select a parameter discipline type. 30 On the File menu. 150 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 Under Type. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. select a group that you want to add parameters to. you may want to save the file to a network location. select the tag. and click OK. 10 Click OK. and select Shared Parameter. 26 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. click Add. 5 Enter the group name. 17 Under Discipline. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. and click OK when finished. click Project Parameters. you can create a list of parameters. you can begin creating parameter groups. and assign which categories this parameter applies to. and specify the Type. add required parameters. 31 Navigate to the directory. 14 Click Add. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 16 Under Name. click Shared Parameters. 19 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. click New. If a file already exists. 22 Add project parameters as needed. This allows you to name the external parameter file. 25 Click OK. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. After the file is named. 9 Name the Parameter. For information on creating multi-category tags. 27 Click OK. 20 Select the element categories this parameter applies to. and click Open. under Groups. 24 Click Select. or use the Help documentation for assistance. select a parameter value type. The tag is now part of the template. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 21 Click OK. 2 Click Create. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. 11 For each parameter group. 23 To add a shared project parameter. click Load from Library  ➤ Load Family. click New. 8 Under Parameters. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. select Project parameter. 6 Create as many groups as needed. For each parameter group.

Save the template 12 On the File menu. The only remaining task is to save it. select Template Files (*. save the file as a template. and create additional settings as needed. click Save. By creating named settings within the template.rte). 11 Click OK when finished. Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings. you need only select a setting. 34 Under Name. 5 In the New dialog box.Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. By going first to the Print command. make minor modifications if necessary. and the percent of actual size. and make it your default template file. you can set options such as sheet sizes. click Setup. 6 Modify the printer settings. click Setup. 3 Under Settings. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. select a different printer. enter a name for the schedule. 37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. Creating Named Print Settings. click Schedule/Quantities. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. 2 Under Name. 4 Click Save As. paper placement. For each printer. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. click New. you can select the printer for each set of named settings within the Print Setup dialog box. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. Your template is complete. Create named print settings 1 On the File menu. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. click Print. and click Save. you should save it to a network path. click OK. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. 14 Under Save as type. If you need to share this file with others. and create new settings for this printer. you create named print settings. 36 When you have completed the schedule. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 9 In the Print dialog box. 15 Name the template. and print. and click OK. Depending on your office environment. Creating an Office Template | 151 . 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template.

In addition. click Browse. and click New  ➤ Project. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. You can also set this template as your default template. This can provide a good starting point for a template. 19 Click OK. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. select it. 18 Select the template. 17 Select Browse. loaded components. If you have a project. 23 Navigate to the template location. you modified settings. 152 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and saved them to a template. 24 Click OK. and click Open. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. you ensure that office standards are maintained. and click Open. Set the template as your default template file 20 On the Settings menu. In this lesson. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. go to the File menu. click Options. you could delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. In addition. 21 Click the File Locations tab. 22 Next to Default template file. By investing the time to individualize your template. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project.Use the template 16 To use the template.

you learn how to create automatic ceilings in Revit Building. see the online Help.Ceilings 4 In this tutorial. and how to create a compound ceiling. You learn how to add ceilings by selecting room boundaries to automatically place the type of ceiling that you select. 153 . You can also create ceilings by sketching them. For more information. You also learn how to change the surface pattern of a ceiling grid.

Creating Automatic Ceilings In this exercise. After you add ceilings to the model. 4 Move your cursor into the upper center room and. The ceiling is displayed. you learn how to create ceilings with the AutoCeiling command.Creating Ceilings In this lesson. and double-click Level 1. 3 In the Type Selector. You can create automatic ceilings in an RCP (reflected ceiling plan) view of the building model. You add four different types of ceilings.rvt located in the Common folder. expand Ceiling Plans. click Open. select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 1200mm grid. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. when the room boundary highlights. 154 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . you can change the surface pattern of the ceiling grids. expand Views (all). Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Create automatic ceilings 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Ceiling. and then change the surface pattern of one of the ceiling grids. Open c_Ceiling. you learn how to add ceilings to an RCP view of a simple building model. You also learn how to create and add a compound ceiling to the building model. select it.

and click OK. when the room boundary highlights.Interior . 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. click OK. click Edit/New. click Modify. and then click . and click OK. Change the ceiling grid surface pattern of room on the left 8 On the Design Bar. The new ceiling material is applied to the ceiling. select it. 10 On the Options Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box.5 Select the lower center room and. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. 15 In the Materials dialog box. click in the Material type parameter Value field. NOTE You select one of the grids or the entire ceiling using the TAB key. click OK. 6 In the Type Selector. select Finishes . click Duplicate. 7 Select the room on the left and the room on the right. select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 600mm grid. click .Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm. under Name. Creating Ceilings | 155 . 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm. 9 Select the 600 x 600mm ceiling grid located in the room on the left. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 13 In the Name dialog box. When selected. it displays in the Type Selector.

expand Ceiling Plans. The original project units are imperial. You create a new ceiling type. and save the exercise file with a unique name. expand Views (all). Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating Compound Ceilings In this exercise. you learn how to create a compound ceiling. you change the project to Metric. on the File menu. add layers of material to the ceiling type. click Save As. 156 | Chapter 4 Ceilings .rvt located in the Common folder. NOTE This common dataset is used in several imperial and metric datasets. Open c_Condominium.18 If you want to save your changes. In the steps that follow. Create a new ceiling type 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click First Floor. click the Training Files icon. and then add the ceiling to the building model. Close the exercise file without saving your changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open.

Cold Rolled Channel. enter Gypsum board on metal furring.Furring. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. 5 In the Project Units dialog box. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Insert twice to add two new layers. under Material. under Material.Specify metric project units 2 On the Settings menu. under Material. click Ceiling. Creating Ceilings | 157 . 13 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. and click OK. click OK. click . 7 In the Type Selector. select Finishes . and click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Metal . click Preview to display the current layers. select Compound Ceiling: Ceiling 1. under Thickness.Gypsum Wall Board. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. click OK. specify Millimeters for units. 11 In the Name dialog box. click Duplicate. under Thickness. 14 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click the format button for length. 3 In the Project Units dialog box. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 45 mm Layer 3: Structure [1]. under Thickness. enter 12 mm 16 Click OK. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Edit for the Structure type parameter value. 8 On the Options Bar. under Layers. Add the compound ceiling 19 Move your cursor into the common area of the model and click to insert the Gypsum board on metal furring channels ceiling. click Edit/New. 4 In the Format dialog box. enter 20 mm Layer 4: Core Boundary Layer 5: Structure [1]. 15 Define the five layers as follows and in the following order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Layer 1: Core Boundary Layer 2: Structure [1]. select Metal . click Project Units.Interior . under Construction.

and double-click Section 1. 22 The compound ceiling is visible in the section view of the first floor. TIP You can use the zoom commands to zoom into the ceiling. click the Detail Level control. You can also apply thin lines from the View menu. 158 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . expand Sections (Type 1). on the File menu. Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As.View the compound ceiling in a section view 20 In the Project Browser under Views (all). and click Fine. 23 If you want to save your changes. 21 On the View Control Bar.

In addition. 159 . floors. or ceiling. In the exercises that follow. you cut floor and ceiling openings that expose the stairs beneath them. When creating a hosted opening. You can cut vertically through a selected floor. you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and a vertical cut.Openings 5 You can cut openings through roofs. floor. you have the option to cut perpendicularly through the face of a roof. or ceiling. or ceilings using the Opening command. roof. and you can create an opening in a roof specifically for a dormer.

you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and vertical cut. To use the Opening tool to cut a dormer opening. click the Training Files icon. you cut an opening in a roof with an existing dormer. Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof In this exercise. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. This allows you to precisely define the borders of the opening. click Open. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt located in the Metric folder. 160 | Chapter 5 Openings . In the left pane of the Open dialog box. In this case. the view range of a wireframe view was modified to display the entire dormer roof. notice the existing dormer. and you should create a view where you can see the dormer geometry. View current dormer construction 1 In the current 3D View. the project must have an existing dormer.Cutting Roof Openings In this lesson.

Select the main roof to be cut.2 In the Project Browser. The camera is located in the attic and is pointing to the dormer interior. click to select it. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. under Views (all). The view range was modified so the cut plane captured the entire dormer. right-click the Design Bar. Notice no opening exists in the roof for the dormer. WARNING Do not select the dormer roof. expand Views (all). This is an interior 3D view.Dormer. Cutting Roof Openings | 161 . and. and click Modelling. click Opening. The display is wireframe so each dormer component can be seen and selected when defining the borders of the opening. You need to cut an opening in the roof to accommodate the dormer. select Pick a roof to be cut by a dormer opening. 6 Move the cursor over the main roof. Create the dormer opening 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The dormer windows are above the roof so they do not display. expand 3D Views. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. 3 In the Project Browser. This view has been set up specifically for the dormer. and double-click Roof . and double-click Attic View. when the edges of the roof highlight.

8 Zoom in around the dormer. and. Sketch lines display along the border between the dormer roof and the selected roof. 162 | Chapter 5 Openings .Next. select it. 7 Place the cursor over the dormer. an edge of the roof to be cut. a side face of a wall. a bottom face of a floor. and select the exterior face of the three walls that define the dormer. when it highlights. you define the boundary of the dormer opening. or a model line on the face of the roof to be cut. Valid boundaries are a joined roof or its bottom face.

Cutting Roof Openings | 163 . under 3D Views. double-click Attic View. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Zoom out to see the entire plan view. the gaps in the bottom sketch line need to be closed.Notice the sketch lines overlap in places. 14 In the Project Browser. and the horizontal line on the bottom dormer wall does not extend to the corners. Although the overlapping lines are not a problem. 10 Select the lower sketch line. 9 On the Design Bar. The dormer opening in the roof is apparent. click Finish Boundary. and notice the drag controls on each end. 11 Drag each control to the corner until it intersects with the vertical sketch line on that side.

rvt located in the Metric folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you create a roof opening that is perpendicular to the roof face. click Open. spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer. click .15 On the File menu. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. NOTE If you want to save this file. select Save As from the File menu. 164 | Chapter 5 Openings . Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening In this exercise. 2 Using the spin function. click Close. click the Training Files icon. Create a perpendicular opening 1 On the View toolbar.

and. 6 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the main roof. select it. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. click . The opening on the right is cut vertically. when it highlights. which is the side of the roof without a dormer. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Modify. click Opening. and click Modelling. the opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. select Pick a face of a roof. In the following illustration. 7 On the Options Bar. right-click the Design Bar. floor. and click OK. 8 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.3 On the Design Bar. Cutting Roof Openings | 165 . or ceiling and cut perpendicular to face.

9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 166 | Chapter 5 Openings . when it highlights. and. select it. 10 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening.

click . . Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. click Open. Cutting Roof Openings | 167 . 2 Using the spin function. and click Finish Sketch. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.The opening is an element independent of the roof. select Save As from the File menu. and constrain it like any other element. notice the tool displays. You can move it. change the shape. spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer.rvt located in the Metric folder. NOTE If you want to save this file. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Create a vertically cut opening 1 On the View toolbar. you create a roof opening that is cut vertically through the roof. click Close. dimension it. click the Training Files icon. click 12 On the File menu. 11 On the Options Bar. Creating a Vertical Roof Opening In this exercise.

The opening on the left is cut perpendicular. or ceiling and cut vertically. the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face. click Opening. 7 Move the cursor over the main roof. floor. right-click the Design Bar. select Pick a roof. In the following illustration. and click Modelling. and. click Modify. select it. 168 | Chapter 5 Openings . when it highlights. 6 Click OK. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box.3 On the Design Bar. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

and.Because the cut is vertical. click . 13 On the View Toolbar. 12 On the Design Bar. it is easier to sketch the boundary on a plan view. 9 On the Design Bar. 14 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening. select it. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 10 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Project Browser. Cutting Roof Openings | 169 . and double-click Roof . click . when it highlights. click Lines.Dormer. 11 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof on the side without the dormer. click Finish Sketch.

Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings In this lesson. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch. change the shape. click 16 On the File menu. dimension it. 15 On the Options Bar. and double-click Section 1. expand Views (all). The exercises in this lesson must be done sequentially. NOTE If you want to save this file. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You can move it. notice the tool.rvt located in the Metric folder. you cut openings in a floor to accommodate a set of stairs that are already in place. you created a roof opening that was cut vertically through the roof. click Open.The opening is an element independent of the roof. and constrain it like any other element. you cut an opening on the second level of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs. expand Sections (Filled Arrow). In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and click Finish Sketch. click the Training Files icon. Cutting an Opening in a Floor In this exercise. click Close. In this exercise. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. 170 | Chapter 5 Openings . . Cut a floor opening 1 In the Project Browser. select Save As from the File menu.

the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. The opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. click Ref Plane. When cutting a floor or ceiling for a stairway. floor. The length of the plane does not have to be precise. and the level 1 and 2 lines. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. or ceiling and cut vertically. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 171 . Adding a reference plane is a two-click process. make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. However. right-click the Design Bar. and the second click specifies the end of the plane. In the following illustration. The first click specifies the start point. a section view provides an excellent vantage point to select faces or planes to cut. and click OK. 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. Before cutting the floor opening. and click Modelling. select Pick a roof. click Opening. This is useful when sketching the opening in a plan view.Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor.

If you intend to complete the next exercise. 10 On the Options Bar. under Sections (Filled Arrow). 11 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located. click . select Floor Plan: Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar. the stairs. and the reference plane you added previously. double-click Section 1. click Lines. 8 On the View Control bar. 7 In the Go To View dialog box. NOTE The next exercise requires this project in its current state. click Model Graphics Style. and click Open View. You are prompted to select a view. and click Wireframe. under Views (all). Otherwise. 14 In the Project Browser. 172 | Chapter 5 Openings .6 Select the floor on Level 2. do so now. click Finish Sketch. you may close the project with or without saving it. 9 On the Design Bar. Notice the new floor opening. 12 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall.

Notice the new ceiling opening. 9 In the Project Browser. floor. and click Modelling. 5 On the Options Bar. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. 8 In the Project Browser. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 173 . 4 In the Go To View dialog box.Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling In this exercise. and click Open View. under Sections (Filled Arrow). select Reflected Ceiling Plan: Level 1. under Views (all). or ceiling and cut vertically. and click OK. Cut a ceiling opening. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. 7 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1 Interior View. click Opening. you cut a ceiling opening for the stairwell. under Views (all). 6 Sketch a rectangle that borders the reference plane. click Finish Sketch. 3 Select the ceiling below level 2. Dataset Continue using the dataset you were using in the previous exercise. select Pick a roof. and the right and lower border of the stairs and floor you added in the previous exercise. Use the following illustration as a guide. 2 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. double-click Section 1. under 3D Views. the interior face of the wall. click .

Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt located in the Metric folder. and the level 1 and 2 lines. expand Sections (Filled Arrow). Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor. expand Views (all). and the second click specifies the end of the plane. When using the shaft tool to cut an opening. click the Training Files icon. click Close. The length of the plane does not have to be precise. make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom. 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. The first click specifies the start point. Before cutting the opening. Adding a reference plane is a two-click process.10 On the File menu. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. However. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. NOTE If you want to save this file. Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool In this exercise. however. Add a reference plane 1 In the Project Browser. select Save As from the File menu. and double-click Section 1. you cut an opening through several levels of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs and to account for the possibility of extending the stairs up another level. click Open. you must sketch in a plan view. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. click Ref Plane. 174 | Chapter 5 Openings .

6 In the Go To View dialog box. 12 On the Design Bar. click Properties. and the reference plane you added previously. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall. 7 On the View Control bar. 16 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ Select Up to level: Roof for Top Constraint. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 175 . under Constraints. 9 On the Options Bar. and click OK. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. under Sections (Filled Arrow). select Floor Plan: Level 2. and click Modelling. and click Wireframe. the stairs. 10 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located. select Create shaft opening. click Lines. but does cut the ceiling of level 1. and click Open View. the ceiling of level 1 would remain intact. Enter 3400 for Base Offset. 14 Click OK. double-click Section 1. If you selected level 2 for the base constraint. 15 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). right-click the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style. This accounts for the possibility of extending the existing stairs up another level. click Finish Sketch. 8 On the Design Bar. click . specify the following parameters: ■ Select Level 1 for Base Constraint.4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Entering a value for base offset ensures that the shaft opening does not cut through the floor at level 1. click Opening.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and roof that interferes with the defined volume of the opening.Notice the shaft opening that cuts through several levels. Using the shaft tool. you can cut a single opening through every floor. ceiling. 176 | Chapter 5 Openings .

balusters. 177 . you learn how to create a railing and customize it using design information for rails. posts.Railings 6 In this tutorial. and panels.

select Chain. press the CTRL key. 6 On the Design Bar.rfa. and M_Post . The railing layout in this exercise is based on these custom components. Make certain that you draw the line from bottom to top because these starting and ending points are used to justify the railing later. such as panels. You also learn how to use a pattern editor to place balusters and posts and how to customize the railing with additional components. 3 On the File menu.rte is selected as the Template file from the Metric Templates folder. Creating the Railing Layout In this exercise. click Lines. Open five component families 1 On the File menu. 2 In the New Project dialog box. you need to load railing components from the library provided in the drawing template. click New ➤ Project.Creating Railings In this lesson. M_Baluster . navigate to Metric Library/Balusters. click Railing. between the balusters. Project is selected under Create new.rfa. 8 Draw a 4300 mm vertical line from bottom to top as shown. Before you lay out the railing.Custom3. select M_Baluster . and click OK. 178 | Chapter 6 Railings . M_Post .Square w Ball.Newel. you create a railing and add components to it. M_Baluster Panel 1.rfa . Sketch a plan view of two railing lines 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. and click Open. verify that DefaultMetric.Custom4.rfa. you learn how to create and place a railing using design information such as the shape and finish material of the rails. 4 In the Open dialog box.rfa. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.

select Metal . enter -25 mm for Offset.Paint Finish . enter Railing with Glass Panel for Name. click Edit for Rail Structure. and click OK. Specify the railing parameters 10 On the Design Bar. Creating Railings | 179 . 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 16 In row 1. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Insert. and then do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In row 1. enter Top for Name. and then click . 15 In the Edit Rails dialog box. click in the Material field. Matte for Name. In row 2. in row 2. click in the Material field. 19 In the Materials dialog box. click Railing Properties. and then click 17 In the Materials dialog box. select M_Rectangular Handrail : 50 x 50 mm for Profile. select Metal . and click OK. click Duplicate. 13 In the Name dialog box.Paint Finish . Matte for Name.Dark Gray. In row 2. enter Bottom for Name. In row 2. .Dark Gray. In row 2. enter 300 mm for Height.9 Draw a second 4300 mm line at an angle of 37 degrees as shown. TIP You may need to zoom in until the angular dimension increments by a single degree. and click OK. click Edit/New. 18 In the Edit Rails dialog box.

24 In row 3. Select M_Baluster Panel 1: 600mm . 33 On the View menu. Lay out the main baluster pattern 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 25 In row 4. select M_Post. from previous. click . click Edit for Baluster Placement. 30 Click OK three times. IMPORTANT Completing this tutorial is required to successfully complete some exercises in the tutorial on Stairs. Adjusting Railing Parameters. in row 1. from previous. 180 | Chapter 6 Railings . click on row 2.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space. click OK. 31 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box.Custom 3 : 25mm for Baluster Family. enter 230 mm for Dist. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select M_Baluster . Select Bottom for Base. select M_Post. under Construction. Adjusting Railing Parameters In this exercise. under Main pattern. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing. Select Bottom for Base. 23 In row 2. 26 Select Beginning for Justify.Square w Ball : 60mm for Baluster Family and enter 50 mm for Top offset.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space. 34 On the File menu. 32 On the Toolbar. Lay out the post pattern 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click Finish Sketch. A new row is displayed. select M_Post .rvt. from previous. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. you change the pattern of balusters and posts with the pattern editor to show different design options for the railing. Enter 380 mm for Dist. 29 In row 3. click Shading with Edges.20 In the Edit Rails dialog box. under Posts. Enter 380 mm for Dist. 28 In row 2. and then click Duplicate. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Glass Panel for Name.Glass for Baluster Family.

click . 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Main pattern. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. under Main pattern. and double-click East. under Construction. View the center justification option 9 On the Options Bar. under Main pattern. The railing layout reflects the beginning justification option that you assigned in the previous exercise. View the spread pattern to fit option 14 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. select Center for Justify. The railing layout reflects the assigned center justification option.rvt. under Construction. expand Elevations. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 17 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. under Construction. click Edit/New. 13 Click OK three times. View the beginning justification option 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Click OK three times. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. View the end justification option 3 On the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in on the left side of the railing. select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. click Modify and select the railing.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Views (all). click Edit for Baluster Placement. Creating Railings | 181 . The railing layout reflects the assigned end justification option. select End for Justify. click Edit/New. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. Training_Railing. 7 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click . 18 Click OK three times.

33 Under Posts. select M_Baluster . click . click Edit/New. under Main pattern. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Construction.The railing layout reflects the assigned spread pattern to fit justification option. click . 21 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Angles Greater Than for Corner Posts At. click Edit/New. select Beginning for Justify. View the truncate pattern excess length fill option 19 On the Options Bar. and enter 150 mm for Spacing. custom baluster excess length fill. You cannot assign base top and bottom offset parameters to excess length fill balusters. click . 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification and truncated excess length fill options. The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification. View the custom baluster with specified spacing excess length fill option 24 On the Options Bar. 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Main pattern.Custom3 : 25mm for Excess Length Fill. select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill. 32 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click Edit for Baluster Placement. click Edit for Baluster Placement. Observe that the balusters that occur in the excess length fill area extend below the bottom rail. and select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill. 26 In the Type Properties dialog box. click . 23 Click OK three times. 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 28 Click OK three times. 35 On the Toolbar. enter 54 degrees for Angle. under Construction. under Main pattern. 182 | Chapter 6 Railings . 34 Click OK three times. click Edit/New. under Construction. and spacing options. View post options 29 On the Options Bar.

under Main pattern. click . click Modify and select the railing. from previous. under Construction. enter 380 mm for Dist. 37 On the Options Bar. double-click East. Specify the final railing layout 36 On the Design Bar. 42 Click OK three times. click Edit/New. 44 On the File menu. do the following: ■ ■ ■ In row 2. In row 4. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. a corner post does not occur. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Each Segment End for Corner Posts At.The railing layout reflects the assigned minimum angle limit for the corner post option. under Elevations. Since the angle is less than 54 degrees. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing. enter 0 mm for Dist. Creating Railings | 183 . The railing layout reflects the assigned distance and justification options. from previous. Select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. 41 Under Posts. 43 In the Project Browser.rvt. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box.

184 | Chapter 6 Railings .

you learn how to add fascia. 185 . In addition. gutters. and soffits to the roofs that you create.Roofs 7 In this tutorial. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Autodesk Revit Building.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. and mansard roofs. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. You create roofs from footprints and by extrusion: the two roof creation methods in Revit Building. 186 | Chapter 7 Roofs . and click OK. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide.rvt located in the Metric folder. 1 In the Project Browser. you learn to create several different types of roofs. gable. including hip.Creating Roofs In this lesson. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. 4 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. You do not need to create the work plane. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. expand Views (all). 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog box. click Open. select Name. Open m_Roofs. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. shed. Before you can sketch the roof profile. 5 In the Go To View dialog box. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. and double-click Level 1. click the Training Files icon.

you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch.Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. click Ref Plane. Creating Roofs | 187 . TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face.

sketch the roof profile. 13 On the Options Bar. 188 | Chapter 7 Roofs . Next. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. click Lines. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. select Chain. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

Creating Roofs | 189 . 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. and then select the exterior face of the wall. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.16 On the View toolbar. expand Sections (Type 1). click . and double-click Section 1. press CTRL. 18 Select the edge of the roof. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. 19 On the Tools toolbar. press TAB. The roof should resemble the following illustration. Next. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. click . click to display the model. 21 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Tools toolbar. click Modify. and select the second wall. Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. expand Views (all).

25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. 27 Proceed to the next exercise.24 On the Options Bar. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. 26 On the View toolbar. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint. 190 | Chapter 7 Roofs . You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click Attach for Top/Base.

m_Roofs.rvt.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the Go To View dialog box. 8 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. and click OK. 5 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. and click Open View. under Dimensions. verify that Floor Plan: Garage Roof is selected. On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. 3 Next. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. verify that Defines slope is selected. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 10 Press CTRL. By default. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. 7 On the Options Bar. Creating Roofs | 191 . 13 When you see the informational dialog box. 12 On the Design Bar. and enter 600 for Overhang. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. click . The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 6 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. 4 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. sketch the roof footprint. select both slope definition lines. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. clear Defines slope. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. Next. and on the Options Bar. click Finish Roof.

and enter 600 for Overhang. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. When you complete the roof.14 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all). You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. m_Roofs. click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 192 | Chapter 7 Roofs . the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof.rvt. press TAB. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines slope. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. and double-click Level 3. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. 1 In the Project Browser. click Pick Walls. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.

select Defines Slope. select Defines Slope. Next. 15 On the Options bar. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 17 When you see the informational dialog box. click Modify. click . add new slope lines to the roof. Creating Roofs | 193 . click Finish Roof.6 Click to select all the walls. 8 On the Options Bar. sketch the chimney opening. 10 On the View menu. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. Next. click Lines. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 9 Using automatic snaps. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar.

194 | Chapter 7 Roofs .18 On the View toolbar. and double-click Level 2. expand Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and enter 600 for Overhang. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. click Pick Walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Defines slope. 3 On the Options Bar. m_Roofs. expand Views (all). Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint.rvt. click to view the new roof in the model. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house.

9 On the Tools toolbar.Next. close the roof sketch. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Next. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. Creating Roofs | 195 . click Lines. select the left vertical slope definition line. click . The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 11 To trim the first line segment. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 7 On the Options Bar. and click . clear Defines Slope. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. using the following illustration for guidance.

enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. click Roof Properties. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. join the two remaining walls to the roof. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 196 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 14 Under Constraints. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 18 On the Design Bar. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. and click OK. click 17 Click to display the model. to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house.Next. The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. Next. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 16 On the View toolbar. click Finish Roof. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.

click . expand Views (all). and enter 300 for Overhang. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. expand Floor Plans. clear Defines Slope. Creating Roofs | 197 . 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. m_Roofs. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click Pick Walls. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. and double-click Level 2. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs.23 On the Tools toolbar. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.

click Finish Roof to complete the roof. click Roof Properties. Next. 13 On the Options Bar. Next. select the left vertical roof line. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. you add a slope-defining line. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. enter 0 for Overhang. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 6 On the Options Bar. 10 To trim the first line segment. select Defines slope. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. press TAB. and press ENTER. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker.5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 19 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Tools toolbar. click Modify. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. and click OK. 198 | Chapter 7 Roofs . and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 9 On the Options Bar. 16 Under Constraints. click .

and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof. and double-click Level 2. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Floor Plans. click to activate the roof footprint sketch. and enter 600 for Offset. Before you can add slope arrows. To help locate the position of each split. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house.20 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. m_Roofs. click . click Split Walls and Lines. expand Views (all). you need to add two reference planes. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. expand 3D Views. 9 On the Tools menu. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. 3 On the Options Bar. and double-click 3D. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. expand Views (all). Creating Roofs | 199 . 5 On the View menu. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. click Ref Plane. 4 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Options Bar.

12 On the Options Bar. enter 500 for Rise/1000. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . click Modify. Next. 14 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click 19 Under Constraints. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. and move the cursor to rotate the arrow. click Modify. 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. 11 On the Design Bar. select Slope for Specify. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. add two new slope arrows. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 18 Press CTRL. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. and then click OK. select both slope arrows.15 to add the second slope arrow. verify is selected. Aligning Roof Eaves. clear Defines Slope. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. 200 | Chapter 7 Roofs . change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. click Slope Arrow. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line.Next. 20 Under Dimensions. .

and double-click Garage Roof. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 1 In the Project Browser. the adjacent eave heights must align. click . and click OK. 12 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. select a method to align the eaves. select Defines Slope.Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. The eave lines display with a dimension. m_Roofs. When eave heights differ. 3 On the Options Bar. When aligning eaves. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. Next. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. click Finish Roof. under Dimensions. When you sketch a hip roof. 13 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all). enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. click to display the model. click Align Eaves. click . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 10 On the Options Bar.rvt. Creating Roofs | 201 . 5 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage.

4 In the Element Properties dialog box. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name.14 If you want to save your changes. 202 | Chapter 7 Roofs . under Constraints. click . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof. click the Training Files icon. 1 In the Project Browser. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level.rvt located in the Metric folder. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the Options Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. click Open. click Modify. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. click Save As. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. on the File menu. and double-click North. Open m_Mansard_Roof. expand Elevations. expand Views (all). you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. 3 Select the roof and. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

and select the remaining three lines. 10 On the Options Bar. Next. click Lines. 17 On the View toolbar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. press TAB. and double-click Level 3. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. Creating Roofs | 203 . click Modify. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click . 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click to display the model. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. and then select Defines slope. 7 In the Project Browser. click Finish Roof. click . enter 750 mm for Rise/1000.6 On the View toolbar. under Dimensions. 14 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box.

under Construction. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. and open the Roofs folder. click . select M_Fascia-Built-Up. 2 In the Open dialog box. open the Metric Library folder. on the File menu. gutters. you learn how to create roof fascia. 1 On the File menu. click Duplicate. open the Profiles folder. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Open c_Condominium. click the Training Files icon. and Soffits In this lesson. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. gutters. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. and click OK. click Save As. 204 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 8 In the Name dialog box. 3 Press CTRL. and click OK twice. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 5 On the Options Bar. and click Open.rvt located in the Common folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.18 If you want to save your changes. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. click Open.rfa.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. Gutters. and soffits in Revit Building. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. you can easily create its fascia. enter Built-up Fascia. and soffits. After you create a roof. Creating Fascia.

Gutters. Creating Gutters. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. Creating Fascia. Creating Gutters In this exercise. and Soffits | 205 . 13 Proceed to the next exercise. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia.

4 In the Type Properties dialog box. c_Condominium. under Construction. click Duplicate. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. Creating Soffits. Creating Soffits In this exercise. 10 Click to place the gutter. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. click . 206 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 8 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK three times. and then click . 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. click Edit/New. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. you learn how to place a roof soffit. 3 In the Properties dialog box. click in the Value field for Material.rvt.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. and double-click Roof. Creating Fascia. 5 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. expand 3D Views. expand Views (all). expand Views. Gutters. click Pick Roofs. expand Floor Plans. and Soffits | 207 .rvt.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and double-click 3D. click Finish Sketch. 4 Select the roof. c_Condominium. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit.

208 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 9 If you want to save your changes. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Join Geometry. on the File menu. and then select the soffit to join them. click Save As.7 On the Tools menu. 8 Select the roof.

Stairs 8 In this tutorial. 209 . and work with a stair calculator. You learn to create special feature stairs. you learn how to create and modify straight. add railings to your landings. and semi-circular runs of stairs. u-shaped.

2 On the View menu. 4 Click OK. risers and stringers. use the Stair Calculator to add a straight run of stairs to your drawing. such as treads. and then modify. 7 Using the following illustration as a guide. View the first level lobby and second level underlay 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.Creating Stairs In this lesson.rvt file located in the Metric folder. under Graphics. click the Training Files icon. click Open. If you add stairs to a drawing in plan view. railings from another project. select Level 2 for Underlay. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. specify the start point for the stair run. click Stairs. add. 210 | Chapter 8 Stairs . The outline of the level 2 floors and wall display as an underlay. click View Properties. Draw a straight stair run 5 Zoom in on the entry way. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Views (all). you learn how to create runs of typical and special feature stairs with the stairs aligned correctly between the levels in your project. you can display both of the levels that you are working with. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Open the m_Stair_Exercise. Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run In this exercise. The level where the stairs end displays as a screened background after you select it as an underlay. and double-click Level 1. The level where the stairs originate displays as your current working level. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. You learn to work with different stair components. you create and align a straight run of stairs to provide access from the first level to the second level of the building model.

click Finish Sketch.8 Specify the stair run endpoint as shown. Creating Stairs | 211 . 9 On the Design Bar.

12 Select the front edge of the second level as the alignment line as shown. 13 Select the top edge of the stair run as the entity to align as shown. The top edge of the stair run is now aligned with the front edge of the second level. click .Align the top edge of the stair run with the front edge of the second level 10 Zoom in on the top of the stair run. 212 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 11 On the Toolbar.

Align the stair run centerline with the wall centerline
14 Select the wall centerline as the alignment line as shown. TIP On the Options Bar, click Wall centerlines on the Prefer menu.

15 Select the stair run centerline as the entity to align as shown.

The stair run centerline is now aligned with the wall centerline.

16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view.

Creating Stairs | 213

Specify new main lobby stair parameters
17 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections, and double-click Stair Section. 18 On the View menu, click Thin Lines.

TIP Hold the cursor over the stairs to see the risers and treads. 19 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 20 On the Options Bar, click .

21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 22 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 23 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Main Stairs for Name, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 8 Stairs

24 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Treads, enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth. Under Treads, select Stair Nosing - Radius : 20 mm for Nosing Profile. Under Treads, enter 50 mm for Tread Thickness. Under Risers, clear End with Riser. Under Risers, select Straight for Riser Type. Under Risers, enter 20 mm for Riser Thickness. Under Risers, select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. Under Stringers, select Match Level for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, enter 305 mm for Stringer Height. Under Stringers, enter 65 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Stringers, enter 180 mm for Landing Carriage Height. .

25 Under Materials and Finishes, click in the Value box for Tread Material, and click

26 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 27 Click in the Value box for Riser Material, and click .

28 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 29 Click in the Value box for Stringer Material, and click .

30 In the Materials dialog box, select Wood - Cherry for Name, and click OK. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. Because you specified ending the stair run with a tread instead of a riser, a warning dialog box displays, telling you that the actual number of risers is different from the desired number of risers. 32 Click OK to ignore this warning message. 33 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width. 34 Click OK.

The stair section reflects the new assigned parameters. 35 On the File menu, click Save As, and save this exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 36 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run.

Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run
In this exercise, you use design information about a railing from another project and create special feature stairs with concave stringers from the straight run of stairs you completed in the previous exercise.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Changing the railing type
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view. 2 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press CTRL, and select both railings. 3 In the Type Selector, select Railing : Railing with Glass Panel.

Creating Stairs | 215

NOTE If the panels do not display in the railings, go to the Type Properties of the railing. Click Edit next to the Baluster Placement parameter. If selected, clear the check box for the User Baluster Per Tread on Stairs option. Notice that the railing start post is offset above the level of the floor.

Adjust the railing start post offset
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select one of the railings. 5 On the Options Bar, click .

6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 8 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 1, enter -200 mm for Base offset. 9 Click OK three times. 10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

The railing start post is now at floor level.

Change the stair shape in plan view
11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 12 Zoom in on the stair run. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 14 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 15 Press and hold CTRL, select the left and right stair run boundary lines, and delete them.

216 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Draw the left boundary arc
16 On the Design Bar, click Boundary. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 Specify the intersection of the bottom riser and inside wall face as the arc start point as shown.

19 Specify the left end of the top riser as the arc endpoint.

Creating Stairs | 217

20 Specify a point to the left of the stair run for the arc midpoint approximately as shown.

Mirror the left boundary arc
21 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left boundary arc. 22 On the Toolbar, click .

23 Select the stair run centerline as the mirror axis.

Draw the new first riser
24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, select the first riser and delete it.

218 | Chapter 8 Stairs

25 On the Design Bar, click Riser. 26 On the Options Bar, click .

27 Specify the lower end of the left boundary arc as the arc start point as shown.

28 Specify the lower end of the right boundary arc as the arc endpoint as shown.

29 Specify the intersection of the front wall edge and the stair run centerline as the arc midpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 219

30 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

31 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click lobby stair view.

The stair run from the first floor main lobby is now complete. 32 On the File menu, click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 33 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs.

220 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs
In this exercise, you create and align runs of side stairs with railings.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Specify the lobby side stair run parameters
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

2 On the View menu, click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select Level 3 for Underlay, and click OK.

4 Zoom in on the upper left of the lobby area. 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs, and then click Stairs Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Lobby Main Stairs for Type, and click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Side Stairs for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Risers, select End with Riser. Under Risers, select None for Riser Type. Under Construction, enter -300 mm for Extend Below Base. Under Stringers, select Do not trim for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, select None for Right Stringer. Under Stringers, select None for Left Stringer. Under Stringers, select 1 for Middle Stringers. Under Stringers, enter 100 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Treads, select Front, Left and Right for Apply Nosing Profile.

10 Click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width, and click OK.

Creating Stairs | 221

Place the lobby side stair run
12 Specify a point near the left edge of the landing for the stair run start point, and then specify a point to the left for the stair endpoint. NOTE The exact location of the stair run is not critical. You specify its final location in subsequent steps. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Move the stair run into the corner of the level 2 opening
14 Zoom in on the upper left side of the stair run. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, hold down CTRL, and select the stair run and both railings. 16 On the Toolbar, click .

17 Specify the upper left endpoint of the railing as the move start point as shown.

18 Specify the upper left corner of the level 2 opening as the move endpoint as shown.

The top of the stair run is now positioned in the corner of the level 2 opening.

222 | Chapter 8 Stairs

19 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Specify a new side stair run railing type
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 21 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe. Notice that both railings are on the outside of the treads. This is because the original stairs that you duplicated, the main lobby stairs, have left and right stringers that hosted the railings. Because the lobby side stairs have only a center stringer, you need to flip the railings so they rest on the stair treads. 22 Select each railing, right-click, and click Flip Orientation.

Mirror the lobby side stair run
23 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select the side stair run and both railings. 25 On the Toolbar, click .

26 Specify the main lobby stair run centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

Creating Stairs | 223

The lobby side stair run is mirrored to the right side of the lobby.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The lobby side stairs and railings are now complete. 28 On the File menu, click Save. 29 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings.

Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings
In this exercise, you create and modify railings for a landing and then extend the railings from the side stairs in the previous exercise to the railing on the landing.

224 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Sketch the left side level 2 landing railing path
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2. 2 Zoom in on the level 2 landing. 3 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left main stair railing. 4 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 7 Click to specify the sketch line start point approximately as shown.

8 Move the cursor down and specify the next sketch point as shown.

9 Move the cursor to the right and specify the sketch endpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 225

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left railing sketch line of the main stairs. 11 Select the endpoint of the sketch line for the railing as shown.

12 Drag the arc sketch line endpoint up to the right end of the new horizontal sketch line as shown.

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

14 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click Level 2 Landing.

226 | Chapter 8 Stairs

15 Zoom in and on the View toolbar, click

to reorient the view to look as shown.

Create the right side level 2 landing railing
16 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 17 Select the right lobby main stair railing and delete it. 18 Select the left lobby main stair railing. 19 On the Toolbar, click .

20 Specify the lobby main stair centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

The new lobby main stair and level 2 landing railing layout is mirrored to the right side of the stair run.

21 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Level 2 Landing.

Creating Stairs | 227

Extend the lobby side stair railing onto the landing
22 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 23 Zoom in on the left side of the level 2 landing. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the upper lobby side stair railing.

25 On Options Bar, click Edit. 26 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 27 Click to specify the right endpoint of the railing sketch line for the line start point as shown.

28 Move the cursor 440 mm to the right and specify the sketch line endpoint as shown.

228 | Chapter 8 Stairs

29 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D} and zoom in on the railing extension.

The railing now extends onto the landing.

Modify the railing extension parameters
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

33 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select No Connector for Tangent Joins. 35 Click OK twice.

Creating Stairs | 229

36 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 37 On the Options Bar, click .

38 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Add Vertical/Horizontal Segments for Tangent Joins, and click Edit for Baluster Placement. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 2, select None for Baluster Family. 41 Click OK three times.

42 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 43 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 44 Select the 440 mm railing extension sketch line segment. 45 On the Options Bar, select Custom for Height Correction and enter 170 mm. 46 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

230 | Chapter 8 Stairs

47 On the File menu, click Save. 48 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run.

Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run
In this exercise, you create a u-shaped run of stairs in plan view, and then add a railing and extend the stairs to another level in a three-dimensional (3D) view. When you are adding stairs that turn corners in plan view, it is easier to align the stairs if you mark the edge of the landing with a reference plane first.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset from the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Draw a reference plane
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on the stairwell on the left side of the building.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 4 On the Options Bar, click and enter 528 mm for Offset.

5 Move your cursor over the left edge of the exterior wall and place a vertical reference plane to the left of the exterior wall face as shown.

Creating Stairs | 231

measured from the exterior wall centerline.The new reference plane. 15 In the Materials dialog box. 14 Under Materials and Finishes. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 915 mm for Width. and click OK. and click OK. and then click Edit/New. 10 In the Name dialog box. 16 Under Materials and Finishes. 17 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. 20 Move the cursor up 2040 mm and specify the stair run next point as shown. select for Tread Material Value. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth. select Metal .Paint Finish.Exterior: Precast Concrete Panels for Name. Dark Gray Matte for Name. select Metal . enter Exit Stairs for Name.Paint Finish. Dark Gray Matte for Name. 13 In the Materials dialog box. Specify the exit stairs parameters 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Draw the exit stairs 19 Click to specify the midpoint of the landing edge as the stair run start point as shown. click Duplicate.5 mm as indicated by the temporary dimension. select for Stringer Material Value. select for Riser Material Value. select Finishes . 18 Click OK three times. 232 | Chapter 8 Stairs . select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type. and then click Stairs Properties. 8 Under Dimensions. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. is at 864. under Treads. click Stairs.

Creating Stairs | 233 . 22 Drag the cursor down and specify the intersection of the landing edge and the reference plane as the stair run endpoint as shown. The exit stair run layout is complete.21 Move the cursor to the right and specify the intersection of the next-to-last riser line and the reference plane as the stair run next point as shown.

23 On the Design Bar. 26 Hold CTRL and select two of the exterior walls of the exit stairwell. and the exit door. expand 3D Views. and double-click Exit Stairs. 234 | Chapter 8 Stairs . expand Views (all). View the exit stairs 24 In the Project Browser. 25 Zoom in on the exit stairwell. click Finish Sketch.

The selected objects are hidden. click Modify. click Edit/New. 29 On the Design Bar. Creating Stairs | 235 . click . and the exit stairs are visible. 35 Click OK three times. 31 On the Options Bar. and select both railings. under Posts. click Edit for Baluster Placement.27 On the View Control Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 30 In the Type Selector. in row 2. 34 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. select M_Baluster . Specify a new railing type 28 Zoom in on the stair run. under Construction. click Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Object. select Railing : 900mm Pipe.Round1 : 25mm for Baluster Family. hold down CTRL.

select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level. Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run. 37 On the Options Bar. click . click Modify. and click OK. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. and select the exit stairs.Add another exit stairs flight 36 On the Design Bar. click Save. you create a semi-circular run of stairs and then modify the winders and the railing. Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run In this exercise. 236 | Chapter 8 Stairs . click Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 40 On the File menu. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Constraints. Turn on the display of the exit stairwell exterior walls and exit door 39 On the View Control Bar.

select for Monolithic Material Value. Training_Stairs. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box under Dimensions. click Stairs. Draw the semi-circular stair run 14 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. 8 Under Materials and Finishes. click Run. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. Under Treads. click Duplicate. click OK. and click OK. and double-click Level 1. and then click Stairs Properties. select Monolithic Stairs. Under Risers. select 9 In the Materials dialog box. expand Views (all). enter 0 mm for Nosing Length. and click Edit/New. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 0 mm for Landing Overlap. select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. TIP You can use the shortcut key SM to snap only to midpoints. for Tread Material Value. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Construction. select Concrete . Under Construction. Under Stringers. and click OK. enter 200 mm for Landing Carriage Height. expand Floor Plans. Under Risers. enter 200 mm for Maximum Riser Height. enter 5 mm for Riser Thickness. Creating Stairs | 237 . 2 Zoom in on the exterior concrete pad above the north exterior wall of the building. Under Treads.rvt. click . Under Stringers.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 1 mm for Tread Thickness. select Concrete . enter 300 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. select 16 for Desired Number of Risers. Under Risers. 11 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. 16 Click to specify the midpoint of the concrete slab edge as the stair run center point as shown. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. Specify the semi-circular stair run parameters 1 In the Project Browser. enter 1300 mm for Width. 6 In the name dialog box. enter Semicircular Stairs for Name.

and click to specify the arc end point. enter 1310 for Radius as shown.17 Drag the cursor to the right along the slab edge. 19 Move the cursor counterclockwise until the display indicates that there are 0 risers remaining. The semi-circular stair run is complete. 238 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 18 On the keyboard. as shown. and press ENTER.

TIP You may need to select the outer railing and flip its orientation to align it to the pad. and double-click Exterior Stairs. expand 3D Views. Creating Stairs | 239 . click Finish Sketch. expand Views (all). Modify the semi-circular stair run parameters 21 In the Project Browser.20 On the Design Bar.

The underside of winder parameter is smooth. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Stepped for Underside of Winder. 26 Click OK twice.

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with no overlap. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 28 On the Options Bar, click .

29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, enter 300 mm for Landing Overlap. 31 Click OK twice.

240 | Chapter 8 Stairs

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with a 300 mm overlap.

Specify new semi-circular stair run railing parameters
32 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 33 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe.

34 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save. 35 On the File menu, click Close.

Working with the Stair Calculator
In this exercise, you create two sets of stairs side by side within a new project. The first set of stairs uses the default settings to calculate the slope. The second set of stairs uses the stair calculator to calculate the slope of the stairs. After creating both stairs, you add dimensions to them to see how the tread depth and stair slope adjust based on the changes made in the stair calculator.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤  Project. In the New Project dialog box, under Template File, click Browse. Open the DefaultMetric.rte file located in the Metric Templates folder.

Creating Stairs | 241

Create a set of stairs using the default settings
1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 2 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click OK. 4 In the center of the Level 1 Floor Plan, click to specify the stair run start point, move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete, and click to specify the end of the stair run.

5 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 6 On the View Toolbar, click .

When you created these stairs, the slope was calculated automatically. In the steps that follow, you create a set of stairs using the stair calculator to define the stair slope.

242 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Create a set of stairs using the stair calculator
7 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 9 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 12 In the Name dialog box, enter Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope, and click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Calculation Rules. 14 In the Stair Calculator dialog box, select Use Stair Calculator for slope calculation. The Stair Calculator computes actual tread depth using the following Calculation Rule equation: X * Rise + Y * Depth = Z X is the value to multiply the actual riser height indicated by the stair properties; Y is the value to multiply the actual tread depth, and Z is the result that lies within threshold minimum and maximum values range based on either design standards or building codes. 15 Enter 680.0 mm for Z, enter 695.0 mm for Maximum Result for Stair Calculator, and enter 670.0 mm for Minimum Result for Stair Calculator. 16 Click OK. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 19 To the right of the stairs you created previously, click to specify the stair run start point, and move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete. NOTE When specifying the stair run starting point, try to align it with the bottom of the stairs you created previously. This allows you to make a better comparison of the slope when you view the stairs together in a 3D view at the end of the exercise.

20 After all the risers have been created, click to specify the stair run end point. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Notice the stairs created using the stair calculator have a longer run than the first set of stairs you created. 22 On the View menu, click Zoom  ➤  Zoom in Region, and draw a zoom region around both sets of stairs. 23 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 24 On both sets of stairs, add dimensions to the bottom tread and the stair run as shown.

Creating Stairs | 243

25 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 26 Select the right stair run, Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog box, notice the Actual Tread Depth is 332.2 mm. Within this project, the project units are set to display length dimension values on screen rounded to the nearest 1 mm. Even more exact dimension values are displayed to the nearest .1 mm where appropriate in the Element Properties dialog box. In this case, the actual tread depth dimension is 332.2 mm; it becomes 332 mm when rounded to the nearest 1 mm in the drawing area. The actual tread depth is determined by using the following Calculation Rule equation derivation: Tread = (Z - X * Riser) / Y Substituting with the current values (X = 2, Y = 1, Z = 680 mm and Riser = 173.9 mm) yields: Tread = (680 - (2 * 173.9))/1 Tread = (680 - 347.8) Tread = 332.2 mm 29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 30 On the View Toolbar, click 31 On the View Toolbar, click . and spin the model as shown.

244 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Notice the difference between the slope of the two stairs. 32 On the File menu, click Close. You can close the project file without saving your changes. This completes the Working with the Stair Calculator exercise. This also completes the Stairs lesson.

Creating Stairs | 245

246 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Walls

9

247

Creating Walls
In this lesson, you learn about walls. Sketch wall segments, work with compound walls, and create new wall types. Create curtain and foundation walls, join walls to floors, and assign wall top and bottom attachments.

Sketching Walls
In this exercise, you use sketching tools to draw and modify straight and arc wall segments, and then add a floor with an opening.

Draw the first exterior wall segment
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.
■ ■ ■ ■

In the New Project dialog box, under Template file, click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box, click the training files icon. Select the m_Tutorial_Default.rte file located in the Metric folder, and click Open. In the New Project dialog box, click OK.

2 Zoom in on the center of the viewing window. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 4 Specify the wall segment start point, and drag the cursor to the right 2900 mm.

5 Click to specify the wall segment endpoint and select the dimension. 6 Enter 3000 mm for the new horizontal dimension.

7 Press ENTER.

The wall segment length is updated with the new dimension.

Draw the second exterior wall segment
8 Specify the right endpoint of the first wall segment as the second wall segment start point.

9 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the wall segment endpoint.

Both vertical and horizontal dimensions display.

248 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the third and fourth exterior wall segments
10 Specify the lower end of the second wall segment as the third wall segment start point. 11 Press and hold SHIFT, drag the cursor to the right 2400 mm, and click to specify the third wall segment endpoint.

NOTE Hold down SHIFT as you drag the cursor to constrain your drawing direction orthogonally. 12 Specify the right end of the third wall segment as the fourth wall segment start point. 13 Hold down SHIFT, drag the cursor up 2100 mm, and click to specify the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Stretch the fourth exterior wall segment
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 15 Select the fourth wall segment and select the upper drag control.

Observe that the first wall segment has an assigned lock icon that references the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint. 16 Drag the cursor up to 3600 mm.

Only the fourth wall segment is stretched. 17 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor down to 2100 mm. 18 Click the first wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Creating Walls | 249

19 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor up to 2900 mm.

Observe that the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint maintain their alignment. The second wall segment stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the first wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw the fifth and sixth exterior wall segments
20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 21 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 22 Specify the upper end of the fourth wall segment as the fifth wall segment start point. 23 Drag the cursor to the right 5500 mm, and click to specify the fifth wall segment endpoint.

24 Drag the cursor down 5500 mm, and click to specify the sixth wall segment endpoint.

250 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the seventh, eighth, and ninth exterior wall segments
25 Drag the cursor to the left 7000 mm, and click to specify the seventh wall segment endpoint.

26 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the eighth wall segment endpoint.

27 Drag the cursor to the left 3900 mm, and click to specify the ninth wall segment endpoint.

Move the eighth wall segment
28 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the eighth wall segment. 29 Drag the cursor to the right until the centerline of the eighth wall segment aligns with the fourth wall segment centerline.

Creating Walls | 251

30 Click the eighth wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline. 31 Select the eighth wall segment, and drag the cursor to the right 2100 mm to specify the new wall segment location

Observe that the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline maintain their alignment. The third, fifth, seventh, and ninth wall segments are stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the eighth wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw an arc wall segment
32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 33 On the Options Bar, click .

34 Specify the left end of the ninth wall segment as the arc start point.

252 | Chapter 9 Walls

35 Specify the left end of the first wall segment as the arc endpoint. NOTE Do not snap the cursor to 180 degrees.

36 Move the cursor along the preview arc wall, and click to place the arc wall. 37 Select the radius value, and enter 4900 mm.

38 Press ENTER.

Creating Walls | 253

Move wall segments by modifying dimensions
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the fourth wall segment. 40 Select the 3200 mm dimension value, and enter 4000.

41 Press ENTER.

254 | Chapter 9 Walls

Both the fourth and eighth wall segments are shifted 800 mm to the right.

Draw a diagonal exterior wall segment
42 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 43 Specify the midpoint of the fifth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment start point.

44 Specify the midpoint of the sixth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment endpoint.

45 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 46 On the Toolbar, click .

47 Select the left side of the fifth wall segment as the first wall segment to trim.

48 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to. 49 Select the lower side of the sixth wall segment as the next wall segment to trim.

Creating Walls | 255

50 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to.

Draw a floor by picking walls
51 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor, and then click Pick Walls. 52 Place the cursor over one of the walls, press TAB, and click to select the entire chain of walls.

All of the wall segments are highlighted. 53 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch a rectangular floor cutout
54 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening. 55 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box, select the first option, and click OK. 56 Place the cursor over the edge of the floor until it highlights, and click.

256 | Chapter 9 Walls

57 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 Using the following illustration as a guide, specify an approximate location for the first corner of the rectangular floor opening.

60 Specify the second corner of the rectangular floor opening, creating a 1800 mm X 3000 mm floor opening.

TIP The cursor snaps to dimension values based on the zoom of the view. To get the rectangle to the exact dimensions, you may need to zoom in. 61 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 62 On the Toolbar, click .

63 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 64 On the Toolbar, click .

65 In the Dynamic View dialog box, select Spin, and then, while holding the left mouse button down, move the cursor in the viewing window to orient the view as shown.

Creating Walls | 257

This completes the Sketching Walls exercise.

Working with Compound Walls
In this exercise, you work with compound walls. Convert generic wall styles to new custom wall styles, add dimensions, edit fill patterns that display in section views, and apply surface patterns.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the m_Gallery.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

Access wall properties
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 Zoom in on the upper part of the floor plan. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 4 Select the 200 mm exterior wall.

258 | Chapter 9 Walls

11 Select row 2. and click Down twice. Click OK.5 On the Options Bar. under Name. and select Finish 1 [4].Exterior Insulation and Finish System. 13 In row 1. select Finishes . click . do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field.GRG (Glass Reinforced Gypsum). click . under Name. select Wood . click Edit/New. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. Enter 50 mm for Thickness. and in the Materials dialog box. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. ■ 14 In row 3. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. click . under Name. click Duplicate. enter 200 mm Stud Wall for Name.Exterior . and select Finish 2 [5]. and select Structure [1]. under Layers. Click in the Material field. click Insert twice. 8 In the Name dialog box.Interior .EIFS . Enter 15 mm for Thickness. Enter 135 mm for Thickness. and in the Materials dialog box. Click OK. and click OK. and in the Materials dialog box. ■ Creating Walls | 259 . Add two layers to the new wall type 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Finishes . click Edit for Structure. 12 Select row 3. . and click Up.Stud Layer. Click in the Material field. Click in the Material field. ■ 15 In row 5. click Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. 10 In the Edit Assembly dialog box.

and expand Basic Wall. 17 Click OK three times. 260 | Chapter 9 Walls . Assign the new wall style to the remaining exterior walls 20 In the Project Browser. expand Walls. Specify the view detail level 18 On the View Control Bar. 19 Zoom in on the left end of the new 200 mm Stud wall segment.200mm. expand Families. and click Select All Instances. 21 Select Generic .16 Click Preview. Add a wall centerline dimension 23 Zoom in on the lower part of the floor plan. The style of the selected walls is updated in the building model. 26 Select the upper horizontal wall segment centerline as the first dimension point. right-click. 22 In the Type Selector. select Wall centerlines for Prefer. click Dimension. select Basic Wall : 200 mm Stud Wall. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 24 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Options Bar.

27 Select the lower horizontal wall segment centerline as the second dimension point. 28 Specify a point to the left as the dimension location point. Add a wall face dimension 29 On the Options Bar. select Wall faces for Prefer. Creating Walls | 261 . The vertical wall centerline to centerline dimension displays. 30 Select the upper horizontal wall segment exterior face as the first dimension point.

31 Select the lower horizontal wall segment exterior face as the second dimension point. 34 Select the left vertical wall segment exterior core face as the first dimension point. Add a wall core face dimension 33 On the Options Bar. 262 | Chapter 9 Walls . select Faces of core for Prefer. The vertical wall exterior face to exterior face dimension displays. 32 Specify a point to the right as the dimension location point.

Creating Walls | 263 . The horizontal wall core face to core face dimension displays. 36 Specify a point below as the dimension location point.35 Select the right vertical wall segment exterior core face as the second dimension point.

48 Zoom in on the gypsum board representation in the wall section. and click Import. 42 In the New Pattern dialog box. click OK. 45 In the Materials dialog box. 50 On the View Control Bar. click Fill Patterns.Dense for Import.GRG .25 for Import scale. expand Sections (Callout 1). 46 In the Fill Patterns dialog box.Glass Reinforced Gypsum. click for Pattern. 40 In the New Pattern dialog box. select Custom. Assign a masonry surface pattern in a 3D view 49 In the Project Browser. and under Cut Pattern. 264 | Chapter 9 Walls .Interior . 43 Click OK twice. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 41 In the Import dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sand .pat.Create a custom gypsum fill pattern 37 In the Project Browser. Enter Gypsum for Name. and click Open. 39 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. click New. navigate to \Program Files\Autodesk Revit Building\Data. click Materials. select revit. and click OK. 38 On the Settings menu. expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}. Assign the new gypsum fill pattern to a wall layer in section view 44 On the Settings menu. 47 In the Materials dialog box. Enter 0. select Gypsum. select Finishes . and double-click Callout of Section 3. The new Gypsum pattern is assigned to the gypsum wall board representation in section view.

51 On the Settings menu, click Materials. 52 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks, and under Surface Pattern, click 53 In the Fill Patterns dialog box, select Model for Pattern Type, select Block 8x16, and click OK. 54 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 55 Select the low circular wall segment. 56 On the Options Bar, click . for Pattern.

57 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Structure. 59 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, click 60 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks. 61 Click OK four times. 62 Zoom in on the low wall segment. for Material.

Align a masonry surface pattern in an elevation view
63 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations, and double-click East.

64 Zoom in on the right retaining wall.

Creating Walls | 265

65 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the wall. 66 On the Toolbar, click .

67 Select the building wall edge as the alignment reference.

68 Select the CMU edge as the line to align.

The upper left corner of the CMU pattern is now aligned with the upper left corner of the retaining wall. This completes the Working with Compound Walls exercise.

Working with Vertically Compound Walls
In this exercise, you modify vertically compound walls and create and modify wall layers in sections view.

266 | Chapter 9 Walls

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Townhouse.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Access the exterior wall properties
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the right front exterior wall.

6 On the Options Bar, click

.

7 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 9 If the Preview pane is not displayed on the left side of the Edit Assembly dialog box, click Preview. 10 On the Preview pane, ensure that Section: Modify type attributes is selected for View.

The wall section displays at its default sample height of 6096 mm.

Creating Walls | 267

Assign split regions to the wall section
11 Right-click in the preview window and click Zoom In Region. 12 Zoom in on the bottom of the wall section. 13 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 14 Specify a point up 300 mm from the bottom of the wall on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the first split point.

15 Specify a point up 300 mm from the first split point on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the second split point.

Merge split regions in the wall section
16 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Merge Regions. 17 Select the upper split line as the region to merge.

268 | Chapter 9 Walls

The previously split regions are now merged.

Adjust the split line location
18 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 19 Select the split line, and click the 300 mm dimension value. 20 Enter 3680 mm.

Creating Walls | 269

21 Press ENTER. 22 Zoom out on the wall section.

The split line now occurs 3680 mm above the bottom of the wall.

Adjust the sample wall height
23 Scroll up to view the top of the wall. 24 Move your cursor over the top of the wall and press TAB until the outer boundary of the wall is highlighted (watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the interface to be sure you are highlighting the outer boundary), and then click to display the lock icon and the 6096 mm dimension value. 25 Click the 6096 mm dimension value, and enter 5500 mm.

270 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Press ENTER. The sample wall height is now 5500 mm.

Add another split line
27 Zoom in on the existing split line. 28 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 29 Specify a point up 240 mm from the existing split line on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the new split point.

The new split line now occurs 240 mm above the previous split line.

Creating Walls | 271

Add a new layer to the wall style
30 Under Layers, select row 1, and click Insert. 31 In row 1, select Finish 1 [4] for Function. 32 Select for Material.

33 In the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Masonry Brick - Soldier Course, and click OK. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, select row 1. 35 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Assign Layers. 36 On the Preview pane, select the 240 mm high region between the split lines as shown. Place the cursor at the bottom of the region to select it.

37 Click OK three times. 38 Zoom in on the front brick wall.

The soldier course displays in the exterior wall.

272 | Chapter 9 Walls

Specify allowance for layer extension
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the front brick wall. 40 On the Options Bar, click .

41 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 42 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 43 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, on the Preview pane, zoom in on the bottom of the wall. 44 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 45 Select the outer boundary of the wall at the masonry brick layer.

46 Click the lock icon to unlock the masonry brick layer for layer extension. 47 Click OK three times.

Modify extended layers
48 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Callout 1), and double-click Wall Detail. 49 Select the brick wall.

50 Using the drag control at the bottom of the brick wall, drag it down into the concrete wall approximately as shown.

Creating Walls | 273

51 On the Tools menu, click Join Geometry. 52 Select the brick layer of the wall as the first layer to join.

53 Select the concrete foundation wall as the second layer to join.

The concrete foundation wall is cut away to accommodate the brick course.

54 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 55 On the Options Bar, click .

56 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter -150 mm for Base Extension Distance, and click OK.

274 | Chapter 9 Walls

Add a wall sweep
57 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 60 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Sweeps. 62 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box, click Add and do the following:
■ ■

Select Sill : Sill for Profile. In the Material field, click Concrete. Click OK. , and in the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place

■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 3860 mm for Distance. Select Base for From. Select Exterior for Side. Enter -90 mm for Offset.

63 Click OK. 64 On the Preview pane, zoom in on the applied wall sweep in the wall section.

65 Click OK three times. 66 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click 3D perspective. 67 Zoom in on the front wall, and view the sill.

Creating Walls | 275

This completes the Working with Vertically Compound Walls exercise.

Joining Walls to Floors
In this exercise, you work with joining walls and floors in section view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Floor_wall_joins.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Draw the level 2 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

6 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 7 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 8 For all four walls, select the outer edge of the wall core. Use the flip arrows to toggle the selection. TIP You can select each wall or use the TAB key to select the chain of walls.

276 | Chapter 9 Walls

9 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Wood Joist 255 mm for Type, and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 12 When prompted to cut the geometry from the walls, click Yes. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 14 Zoom in on the wall at Level 2.

The level 2 floor extends into the wall structural layer.

Draw the level 1 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 17 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 18 Select all four walls on the centerline (click each wall while pressing Ctrl).

19 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box, verify that the Type is Wood Joist 255mm, and click OK. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 22 When prompted to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor, click Yes. 23 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 24 Zoom in on the wall at Level 1.

Creating Walls | 277

The foundation wall is trimmed by the level 1 floor. This completes the Joining Walls to Floors exercise.

Working with Foundation Walls
In this exercise, you create and modify concrete foundation walls and footings.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall_Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

6 On the View menu, click View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select T.O. Footing for Underlay, and click OK. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 9 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 10 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select T.O. Footing for Depth. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 305mm for Offset.

11 Specify the outside upper left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment start point, and then specify the outside lower left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment endpoint.

278 | Chapter 9 Walls

12 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five foundation wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each foundation wall segment endpoint. 13 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Create a new 610 mm concrete footing wall type
14 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click T.O. Footing.

Creating Walls | 279

15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 16 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 20 In the Name dialog box, enter Foundation - 610mm Concrete for Name, and click OK. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 22 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, enter 610 mm for Thickness.

23 Click OK three times.

Draw the 610 mm concrete footing
24 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select Unconnected for Depth and enter 305 mm. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 460 mm for Offset.

25 Specify the outside upper left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment start point and then specify the outside lower left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment endpoint. If a warning about the objects not being visible in the current view is displayed, close the warning dialog.

280 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five footing wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each footing wall segment endpoint.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The concrete foundation walls and footings are now complete. This completes the Working with Foundation Walls exercise.

Working with Wall Wraps
In this exercise, you assign different wall wrap conditions to a window opening.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Creating Walls | 281

Assign window wall closure parameters
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on one of the level 1 windows.

Neither the interior nor the exterior wall components wrap around the window opening. 3 Select the window. 4 On the Options Bar, click .

5 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select By host for Wall Closure. 7 Click OK twice.

Assign an interior wall wrap parameter
8 Select the wall. 9 On the Options Bar, click .

10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 12 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Interior for At Inserts. 13 Click OK three times.

The interior metal stud wall with gypsum board now wraps around the window opening.

Assign an exterior wall wrap parameter
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the wall. 15 On the Options Bar, click .

16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 18 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Exterior for At Inserts. Both would wrap gypsum and brick. Exterior wraps only the brick. 19 Click OK three times.

282 | Chapter 9 Walls

The exterior brick wall now wraps around the window opening. This completes the Working with Wall Wraps exercise.

Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments
In this exercise, you assign wall bottom attachments to a curved floor in 3D view and wall top attachments to reference planes in elevation view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Attach_Top_Bottom.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Attach wall bottoms to floor surface
1 Select all four wall segments.

2 On the Options Bar, click Attach for Top/Base, and select Base for Attach Wall. 3 Select the floor as the object to attach to.

The walls are projected down to attach to the floor.

Creating Walls | 283

and select Top for Attach Wall. click Attach for Top/Base. 5 Select the south wall. 7 Select the first reference plane as the object to attach to. 6 On the Options Bar. and double-click South. 284 | Chapter 9 Walls . expand Views (all). expand Elevations. The south wall is projected up to attach to the first reference plane.Attach wall tops to reference planes 4 In the Project Browser.

click Attach for Top/Base. under Elevations. The north wall is projected up to attach to the second reference plane. double-click North. Creating Walls | 285 . 9 Select the north wall. 11 Select the second reference plane as the object to attach to.8 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Options Bar. and select Top for Attach Wall.

12 In the Project Browser. This also completes the Walls lesson. expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}. This completes the Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments exercise. 286 | Chapter 9 Walls .

you need to select a panel. Like walls. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. or you can use a specific curtain system command. to resize the system. For example.Curtain Systems 10 Curtain systems are not walls. To change grids. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. grid lines. you need to change the length of the wall. 287 . they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. panel. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. Unlike windows. To switch panel types. and mullions. This affects the entire curtain system. you select the grid. and you can change these elements individually. and they are not windows. Like windows.

rvt file located in the Metric folder. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. 2 Zoom in on Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor.Flat Curtain System In this lesson. expand Floor Plans. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you create a curtain system using the wall command. expand Views (all). click Open. click Wall. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. 4 On the Type Selector. Open the m_Curtain_Walls. 288 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. and double-click Ground Floor. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 1 In the Project Browser.

7 Zoom in on the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. Flat Curtain System | 289 .6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown.

290 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. and click OK. 9 On the View menu. 13 Specify 1200 for Top Offset. expand 3D Views. 11 Select the curtain system and click . 12 Under Constraints. 10 Zoom in on the curtain system you just added. and room bounding. and double-click Southeast Isometric. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint.8 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). top constraint. specify Up to level: TOP OF ROOF for Top Constraint. click Orient ➤ Northeast. top and base attachments.

19 Enter Entrance Elevation. and click OK. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 22 Place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line.Right now. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. Flat Curtain System | 291 . click Elevation. right-click on the elevation name Elevation 1 . and click Rename. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 20 In the drawing area. You are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels.a. using curtain grids. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. 18 In the Project Browser. the curtain system is a single glazed panel. and resize the crop boundary as shown. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. double-click GROUND FLOOR.

30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 26 Hold CTRL and select the 3 grid lines you just placed. click Copy to Clipboard. Click to place another grid line. Click to create a vertical grid. hold CTRL and select SECOND FLOOR. click Curtain Grid. and click OK. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. SIXTH FLOOR. and SEVENTH FLOOR. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. click Modify. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. FIFTH FLOOR. 27 On the Edit menu. click Modify. 28 On the Edit menu. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. THIRD FLOOR. one larger than the other. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. 292 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 29 In the Select Levels dialog box. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 33 On the Design Bar. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. FOURTH FLOOR. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel.23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 25 On the Design Bar.

Flat Curtain System | 293 . 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. click Add or Remove Segments. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. The segment line style changes to dashed. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. you add a doorway to the curtain system. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor.Next. 38 Using the same method. The two segments are removed. and on the Options Bar. Instead. You do not use the Door command. and then select the segment above it. 35 Select the left vertical grid line.

select One Segment. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 43 Delete the dimensions. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays.39 On the Design Bar. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. and lock them. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. Use the following picture as a guide. click Curtain Grid. 40 On the Options Bar. 42 Place dimensions as shown. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. 294 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added.

49 On the File menu.rfa. Now. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. click Modify. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. The panel changes to a double door. They are part of the curtain panel category.TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 55 In the Project Browser. select M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. under Floor Plans. 57 On the View Control Bar. not as curtain panels. on the new curtain system you added. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. Next. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. Flat Curtain System | 295 . This changes the graphics style of the view. click in any white space to exit the editor. click . 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. 54 On the Design Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. Next. 50 In the Doors folder. 56 In the Project Browser. double-click Entrance Elevation. 52 On the Type Selector. These panels schedule as doors. under Elevations. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. and click Open. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. and click Wireframe.

68 On the File menu. 296 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 61 With the panel still selected. click . 66 On the View Control Bar. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. click Shading with Edges for Graphics Style. 65 On the View Control Bar. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. 62 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 63 Click OK twice to close the Type Properties and Element Properties dialog boxes. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. click Save As.59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. The glazed panels display in blue. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel.rvt. Name the file m_rvt8_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. click Wireframe for Graphics Style. and the solid panels display in white. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. 60 On the Type Selector. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. click System Panel : Solid.

1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. because they reduce the doors’ size by their widths. 6 On the Options Bar. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. there are a few that you do not want. 2 On the Options Bar. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. however. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in on the set of doors. select All Empty Segments.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. select Entire Grid Line. click Mullion. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. You are going to change some mullion joins. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. so you remove them next. 9 Delete the mullions below them. select Grid Line Segment. Flat Curtain System | 297 .

Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. 298 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 13 Click the top mullion control. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. 12 Click the lower mullion join control. Two mullion join controls display. 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style.

click Modify. 7 Enter 1200 for Top Offset. 10 Place the second point at the lower right side.TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. Finally. 9 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. double-click Southeast Isometric. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. 4 On the Type Selector. you can also right-click and select Break at Join from the Join Conditions menu to break the mullion at both joins. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. 5 Click . 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. 16 Save the file. 1 In the Project Browser. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. Finally. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR for Top Constraint. 6 Under Constraints. 2 Zoom in on the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. click . Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. you add a curtain system using the wall command. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. double-click Ground Floor. 15 In the Project Browser. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. click Wall. 14 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. Curved Curtain System | 299 . You also learned how to modify grids and change panels.

13 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. Next. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids.11 Finish the arc by clicking at the top of the arc. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. eighths. Divide the halves into quarters. You are going to use one of these snaps points. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. 300 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . double-click East. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Project Browser. click Curtain Grid. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. 16 Zoom in on the cylinder. and then sixteenths. you place grids on the system. 14 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. under Elevations.

click Modify. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. select the bottom layer of panels.300mm. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system.17 On the Design Bar. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. 19 On the Type Selector. click Basic Wall: Generic . Remember to click from the selection except Curtain Walls. Using walls as panels 18 Using a selection box. to filter out all other elements 20 Save the file. Next. Curved Curtain System | 301 . you change some panels in the system. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system.

10 Under Identity Data. 3 In the Project Browser. and click . 5 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. click Model Lines. . enter 100 for Depth. 11 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Metric templates folder. 1 On the File menu. click 12 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. 9 Select the extrusion. double-click Metric Curtain Wall Panel. and on the Options Bar. specify Glass for Subcategory.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK.rft. double-click Exterior. 8 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. click New ➤ Family. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Lines. 302 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . click Finish Sketch. 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Start the sketch at the upper lefthand reference line intersection and finish at the lower righthand reference line intersection. click .

19 Highlight a panel in the arc. 24 In the Project Browser. All fifth floor panels are selected.Pattern. 20 On the Type Selector.Solid. 25 Highlight a panel in the arc. . 14 On the File menu. All the panels change to the solid panel. 17 Load the Curtain Panel . 15 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu. under Floor Plans. 22 Right-click.rfa. click System Panel . click Save As. and click Flip Orientation. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 16 On the File menu. Hold Shift and spin the model so that you can see the The curved curtain system’s structure now matches that of the main part of the building. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select Curtain Panel .13 On the Design Bar. Curved Curtain System | 303 . right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. All fourth floor panels are selected.Pattern. under Floor Plans. 23 On the View toolbar. right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu. 21 Select the curved arc curtain wall. and save the family as Curtain Panel . click curved curtain system.Pattern. double-click FIFTH FLOOR.rfa family. 18 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and return to your project file. 26 On the Type Selector. and then click .

click Lines. 8 On the Design Bar. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. click Family Category and Parameters. 9 On the Options Bar. click Mullion. 7 Specify Mullion for Profile Usage. click New ➤ Family. 27 Save the file. 304 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . For vertical mullions. click . This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 On the File menu. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. 5 In the Metric Templates folder. double-click Metric Profile.rft. 6 On the Settings menu. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 8 for Sides. and select Radius and specify 50 mm for the radius. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. under Elevations. double-click East. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion.The finished arc wall should look like the following picture. 1 In the Project Browser.

11 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box. click Modify. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. Click again to specify the ending point. click Visibility. 18 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 19 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. clear Fine. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 On the File menu. click the Training Files icon. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. click Detail Component.detail.rfa file from the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Detail Components folder.10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and click OK. Curved Curtain System | 305 . 17 Open the m_Cylinder Mullion .

24 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. double-click GROUND FLOOR. under Floor Plans. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 29 Click . 33 Click Edit/New. 30 On the Modelling tab. so next you remove the unwanted ones. click Modify. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. click Mullion. 26 On the File menu. right-click and use Select Mullions on gridline from the Select Mullions menu. click Save As. 40 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. select Circular Mullion for Family. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. specify Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion for Profile. it can be added as a mullion type. and click DELETE. 37 Click OK twice. 28 In the Project Browser. and return to the project file.rfa family. 36 Under Construction. 22 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box. After the new profile is loaded. 31 Click . select All Empty Segments. 41 In the Project Browser. 38 On the Options Bar. click Modify to exit placing mullions. 25 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu.rfa. double-click Southeast Isometric. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box. clear Coarse and Medium. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. and click Visibility. and click OK. click Duplicate. 27 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 306 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .20 On the Design Bar. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 23 On the File menu. You have placed more mullions than you want. 21 Select the detail component.

This completes the exercise for adding mullions. and you can click to select them all. select Defines slope. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. a storefront system. and then apply those custom elements to the system. 2 Zoom in on the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. double-click TOP OF ROOF. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. All the inside faces highlight. 5 On the Options Bar. make custom curtain panels and mullions. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. In this lesson.43 Save the file. and press TAB. you learned to create a curved curtain system. Additional Curtain Systems | 307 . click Pick Walls. and a ruled curtain system. under Floor Plans. TIP To chain select all the walls. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls.

16 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. click Shaded with Edges for Graphics Style. 9 Under Constraints. 19 Save the file. click Mullion. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. 308 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . and click OK. double-click Southeast Isometric. 13 Zoom in on the skylight. Storefront System In this exercise. click Roof Properties. 14 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Entire Grid Line. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. under 3D Views. 17 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. click Finish Roof. 18 On the View Control Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 11 In the Project Browser. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. 15 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. click System Family: Sloped Glazing for Family.7 On the Design Bar.

This curtain wall cuts the original wall. select Unconnected for Height. and enter 2400. Additional Curtain Systems | 309 .Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in on the wall at the eastern-most area of the model. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Type Selector. click Wall. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. under Floor Plans. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline.

and press ENTER. For this wall. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. enter 45 for Angle (Grid 1) and 15 for Angle (Grid 2). The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. The type parameters under the Pattern heading create the predefined layout. which is specified in the type. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. The Offset (Grid 1) is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. You see these same parameters for Grid 2. under 3D Views. and the Spacing (Grid 1) is set to 1524 mm. see the Revit Building help. Justification (Grid 1). 14 After you have looked at the Pattern parameters.8 Click the temporary dimension. 12 Select the storefront wall. the Layout (Grid 1) is set to Maximum Spacing. and the Spacing (Grid 2) is set to 2400 mm. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. and Offset (Grid 1). 11 Zoom in on the new storefront wall. 310 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . This specifies an exact length for the wall. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog box and return to the Element Properties dialog box that displays the instance parameters. even if the wall height changes. To see how the grid layout is defined. or end. This means that the panel heights will be exactly at a 2400 mm height. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. enter 10200 mm. Angle (Grid 1). By setting the Angle (Grid 1) value. you find Number (Grid 1). you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. The Number (Grid 1) is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. The Justification (Grid 1) specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. Click OK. The Grid 2 counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. center. double-click Southeast Isometric. The Layout (Grid 2) is set to Fixed Distance. and click . 13 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties dialog box. Under the Pattern heading. 10 In the Project Browser.

you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 17 Select a curtain grid. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. under 3D Views. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. click Mullion. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. In this exercise. Additional Curtain Systems | 311 . 18 Save the file. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. double-click Southeast Isometric. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. and select All Empty Segments on the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style.16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. 6 Click the highlighted line. making sure Thin Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. A panel between the 2 lines is created. and highlight the thin line.5 Place the cursor at the bottom edge of the SECOND FLOOR. 8 Select the highlighted line. 312 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the thin line.

This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. 13 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. embed a curtain system inside another wall. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. 10 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog box. 15 On the Type Selector. 12 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. click Curtain Grid. 14 Highlight a top level glazed panel. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. 9 Select the panel. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. Additional Curtain Systems | 313 . Finally.A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. click System Panel : Solid. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. right-click and use Select Panels along Grid 2 from the Select Panels menu. Next. quarters. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. 17 Save the file. and then eighths. and then eighths. and define a ruled curtain system. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. quarters. and click . 16 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid.

314 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .

and schedules. Sheets are defined by borders.Creating Drawings 11 In this tutorial. you learn how to create drawings from a building information model in an Autodesk Revit Building project. elevation. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create. 315 . begin by first creating sheets. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your building model. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan. and are accessible from the Project Browser. three-dimensional views. usually contain a title block. which are a type of view in a project. section. you can add different views of the building model directly to the sheet.

adjust the view scale. you create a drawing sheet that includes a floor plan of the first level of the building model. The project used in the following exercises is a small office building model. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You begin by duplicating an existing floor plan view that includes furniture. click the Training Files icon. Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise. how to add views to the sheets. and observe that the changes are made in the floor and furniture plan views of the building model. you enter the project information and create a drawing sheet with a title block that displays the project information. click Open. Next. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. You turn off the visibility of the furniture in the duplicated view to create a floor plan view and rename the original view as the furniture plan. and dimension the exterior walls of the building to complete the floor plan drawing sheet. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. you learn how to create sheets within an Revit Building project. Open m_Drawing_Exercise located in the Metric folder. You also reorient the swing of one of the doors in the floor plan view on the sheet.Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. 316 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . You then add the floor plan view to the sheet. how to create new views from a building model.

4 In the Rename View dialog box. expand Views (all). A copy of the Level 1 Floor plan view is displayed in the Project Browser. Casework. click Visibility/Graphics. and click Duplicate. The changes in visibility are applied to this view only. and specialty equipment continue to display in the Level 1 Furniture plan. and expand Floor Plans. and click Rename. furniture. furniture. 9 Under Visibility. 8 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 11 On the Settings menu. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 10 Click OK. 2 Under Floor Plans. lighting fixtures. furniture. Casework.Copy the Level 1 floor plan view to create a Level 1 Furniture plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and specialty equipment in the Level 1 Floor Plan view 6 On the View menu. right-click Level 1. enter Level 1 Furniture. Turn off visibility for casework. double-click Level 1 to redisplay the floor plan. click Edit for Project Address. click the Model Categories tab. 5 In the Project Browser. click Project Information. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. and specialty equipment are no longer displayed in the Level 1 floor plan view. 3 Right-click Copy of Level 1. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 317 .

The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. click Sheet. Smith for Client Name. select A0 metric. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. Enter Residence for Project Name. Enter J. 2005 for Project Issue Date. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. right-click. 18 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and click OK. The text fields of the title block on the sheet automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered in step 14. 17 On View tab of the Design Bar.13 In the Edit Text dialog box. 15 Continue to change the remaining type parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 31 March. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. MA 12345 14 Click OK. and click View. Enter Client Approved for Project Status. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. 16 Click OK. 318 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .

expand Sheets (all). and select the title block. and click OK.Unnamed. on the Options Bar. click . enter Ground Floor Plan for Sheet Name. and you can modify it within the sheet by activating the Level 1 floor plan view and changing its scale. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 319 . click Modify. under Identity Data. 23 Ground Floor Plan is displayed in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. 19 In the Project Browser. select Floor Plan: Level 1. 20 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 21 When the title block highlights. click Add View. and click Add View to Sheet. View scale is a property of the view. 26 Move the cursor to the center of the drawing sheet. and click to place the view in the center of the drawing sheet.NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. but the scale of the view is too small for the drawing sheet. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A101 . 25 In the Views dialog box. The Level 1 floor plan view is displayed on the drawing sheet. 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

click Deactivate View. Center the view on the sheet and reposition the drawing scale 30 On the View menu. right-click. on the View menu. indicating the view is deactivated. The scale of the view on the sheet changes.27 With the view selected. and click View Properties. you would see that the scale of the Level 1 floor plan view is now 1:20. indicating that the Level 1 floor plan View is active and you can modify it. 33 Drag the viewport to the center of the drawing sheet. The border and the title block are no longer grayed out. If you were to open the Level 1 floor plan view. and click View Properties. 28 Right-click the view. 29 In the Element Properties dialog box. 31 Select the viewport and from the Type Selector. click Viewport : Title w Line. 32 Select the viewport. under Graphics. The border and title block are grayed out. and drag the grips that display on the scale to lengthen it. 320 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . and click OK. Any changes that you make to it on the sheet while it is active display when you open the Level 1 floor plan view. select 1:20 for View Scale. click Activate View.

40 Click the control arrows until the door swings open to the interior. and then select the outer face of the east exterior vertical wall. This creates aligned dimensions that originate at the wall faces. click . ■ 38 Dimension the west exterior wall of the building by selecting the outer faces of the north and south exterior walls and placing the dimension to the left of the west wall. 36 On the Options Bar. as shown in the following illustration. click Dimension. as shown in the following illustration. Move the cursor above the north exterior wall. 35 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Reorient the door in the upper exterior wall 39 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension.Dimension the exterior walls of the building 34 Right-click on the viewport on the drawing sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 321 . and click Activate View. and select the door on the north exterior wall (in the upper right corner). 37 Dimension the north wall of the building: ■ Select the outer face of the west exterior vertical wall. click Modify. and select Wall faces for Prefer.

The dimensions that you added to the Level 1 floor plan view are not displayed. but the door reflects the change you made to its orientation in the Level 1 floor plan. When you change the geometry of the building model while the view is activated. double-click Level 1 Furniture. right-click. and the door is updated. double-click Level 1. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. This means that when you reoriented the door swing in the Level 1 floor plan. The two dimensions that you added to the view in the previous steps have been added to this view. the changes are made within the building model and not restricted to the current view. Adding a Sheet to the Project. Dimensions. 322 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 43 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 42 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.41 Select the view. however. the change is also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. and click Deactivate View. are specific to the view in which they are created.

m_Drawing_Exercise. In the Project Browser. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 323 . 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box.Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise. 3 Select the title block.rvt. and adjust the scale of the view to create a furniture plan drawing. is displayed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Sheets (all). select A0 metric. the new sheet. you add a new sheet to the project. Furniture Plan Level 1 is displayed in the title block as the sheet name.Furniture Plan Level 1. and click OK. A102 . enter Furniture Plan Level 1 for Sheet Name. Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. add the furniture plan view. under Identity Data. The sheet is incrementally named A102. click Sheet. click .

9 Center the cursor in the drawing area of the sheet. and select the lamp next to the lounge chair. 8 In the Project Browser. and select 1:20. double-click A102 . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet In this exercise. verify that M_Floor Lamp 2 : 150 watt Incandescent is displayed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click and drag Level 1 Furniture onto the sheet. 6 On the View Control Bar. click the scale value. 3 On the Design Bar. and click to place the view. 2 Zoom in on the lower left corner of the building. under Sheets (all).Change the scale of the view before you add it to the sheet 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and then observe that the changes are also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. 324 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. click Modify. under Floor Plans. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the Type Selector. Change the lamp type in the furniture plan 1 In the drawing area. 5 Select M_Floor Lamp 1 : 100watt Halogen in the Type Selector to change the lamp type. right-click on the view on sheet A102. 7 In the Project Browser. and click Activate View. You change a lamp type and the length of an interior wall in the furniture plan view on Sheet A102.rvt. m_Drawing_Exercise.Furniture Plan Level 1. double-click Level 1 Furniture.

8 Select the wall as shown in the following illustration. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets. 9 Click the temporary dimension value of the distance between the wall and the centerline of the exterior horizontal wall. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 325 . The desk. and the wall position in Sheet A102 are reflected in the Level 1 Furniture plan view.6 Select one of the furniture components. and notice that Moves with Nearby Elements is selected in the Options Bar. furniture. click Modify. select Floor Plan: Level 1 Furniture. The changes made to the lamp. and press ENTER. 11 Select the same wall you selected in step 8 to view the change in dimension. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 On the Window menu. 7 On the Design Bar. enter 5200 mm. chair. and file cabinet adjacent to the wall move when the wall is resized.

click Modify. 3 Draw a rectangle around the room in the lower left corner of the drawing to define the boundaries of the room. A callout tag is placed inside the walls of the building model. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 326 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . m_Drawing_Exercise. 5 Select the blue border grip adjacent to the view tag.Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise. and section views of the building model and add them to a single drawing sheet. you learn how to create new elevation. double-click Level 1 Furniture. under Floor Plans. click Callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. callout. Create a callout view 1 In the Project Browser. and select the dashed callout view border. and move it to the position shown in the following illustration.rvt. 4 On the Design Bar.

and select 1:20.6 On the Design Bar. position the view. 10 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the scale value. and click Add View to Sheet. 12 Move the cursor to the upper left corner of the sheet. is displayed under Sheets (all) in the Project Browser. 9 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and add the callout view to a new sheet 7 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. TIP You can also drag the Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture view from the Project Browser to place it on the sheet. A103 . and click to place the view. 8 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Unnamed. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 327 . select Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture. click Add View. and double-click the callout tag to display the callout view. click Sheet. Change the callout view scale. click Modify. The new sheet. 11 In the Views dialog box. select A0 Metric.

click Elevation. 17 Move the cursor to the lower left room. center it in the room so that it points north. select the elevation symbol arrow. 14 Zoom in around the view tag of the callout. 328 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . and click to place the elevation symbol. Create a new elevation view. 18 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1 Furniture. The elevation extents do not display when you select the body of the elevation symbol. and zoom out to view the elevation extents. 16 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The tag now displays the drawing sheet and detail number. and place it on the sheet 15 Adjust your zoom to display the lower left corner of the view. click Modify.13 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor in the drawing area. the elevation symbol points to the closest wall. As you move the cursor.

a and Elevation 1 . 25 Click to place the elevation next to the callout view on the drawing sheet. and notice that two new elevation views display: Elevation 1 . Add the new elevation views to sheet A103 22 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). The symbol is displayed as in the following illustration. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 329 . click Add View. 24 In the Views dialog box.Unnamed.a. expand Elevations. 23 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Elevation: Elevation 1 .c. 21 In the Project Browser under Views (all). double-click A103 . and click Add View to Sheet.19 Select the body of the elevation symbol. 20 Select the box under the elevation symbol to create a new elevation view 180 degrees from the first elevation view you created when you placed the elevation symbol.

330 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . The sheet (drawing) number and detail IDs of the views are displayed in the symbol.Furniture Plan Level 1.26 Add Elevation 1 . 28 Zoom in on the elevation tag in the lower left room. under Sheets (all).c to the sheet either with the Add View command or by dragging it from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 27 In the Project Browser. double-click A102 . 30 Zoom in on the right side of the building. double-click Level 1 Furniture. Create a section view. and add it to the sheet 29 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

Move the cursor down and click outside of the south exterior wall of the building to place the section tail and complete the section line. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 331 . ■ 34 Click the arrows at the head of the section line to flip the section so it points to the west. 32 In the Options Bar. select 1:50 for Scale. click Section.31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 33 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click outside the north exterior wall of the building to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag).

and click Activate View. such as callouts. click Save As. 332 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 43 Place the section view on the drawing sheet as shown in the following illustration. The drawing sheet is now complete. 45 Close the exercise file. you learned how to create new drawing sheets. 38 Right-click on the viewport. and click View Properties. and click Deactivate View. 44 If you want to save your changes. By completing the exercises in this lesson. click Add View. and to create new views of your building model. click Custom for View Scale. and click Add View to Sheet. select Section: Section 1. 36 On the View tab of the Design Bar. add views to your sheets. 41 Enter 25 for Scale Value. 37 In the Views dialog box. elevations. modify the building model from your sheets. under Graphics. double-click A103 . on the File menu. and click OK. and sections.Unnamed. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 39 Right-click on the view. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box.35 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). 42 Right-click on the view.

and click OK.Upgrade : 6 mm M_Wall Tag : 12mm Door Tag metric Window Tag metric Using Legends | 333 . and so on). ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head . click New ➤ Legend.Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. click Open. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or noteblock. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. and click Rename. and door frames. click the Training Files icon. you add the completed symbol legend to a cover sheet for the construction documents. 3 Right-click Legend 1. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 2 In the Project Browser. windows. On construction documents. Open m_Legends. click Symbol. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Building building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. Finally. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view.Filled Level Head . On construction documents. enter Symbol Legend for Name. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. door frame schedule. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. doors. 4 In the Rename View dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. expand Legends.

expand Sheets (all). 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 Under Text. and click OK. select Text : 6mm. 8 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. 14 Enter Detail Callout (detail #/sheet #) for the text note. You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. and click to place it. On the Design Bar.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area. and double-click A100 . click Symbol Legend. 13 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Marker (Level name/Elevation in mm) Wall Tag (Wall Type #) Door Tag (Door #) Window Tag (Window Type #) Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser. 334 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . click Text. enter 3mm for Name. 9 On the Options bar. 17 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Design Bar. click . click Modify to end the command.Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. you create a text type with the necessary size. enter 3mm for Text Size. drag it to the lower-right corner of the cover sheet. and click OK twice. verify that Text : 3mm is selected. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 15 Working from the top down.

7 Select Section for View. and click Rename. 8 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. click Legend Component. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.138mm Partition (1-hr) directly below the first wall. select Walls: Basic Wall: Exterior . m_Legends_in progress. click Save As.rvt. name the file m_Legends_in progress. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. click New ➤ Legend. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. enter Wall Type Legend for Name. 9 Repeat the procedure to place a wall of type Interior . Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. Creating a Wall Type Legend. and click Save. Using Legends | 335 . 2 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. 20 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click OK. Add components to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Wall Type Legend In this exercise. expand Legends.rvt. 3 Right-click Legend 1.Brick on CMU for Family. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model.The symbol legend is added to the project cover sheet. 6 On the Options Bar. 19 On the File menu. You then add the completed legend to a project cover sheet.

verify that Text : 3mm is selected. click to add a single-segment leader. 17 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component.Add text to the legend 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 336 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 16 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the remaining text annotations on the upper wall component. 11 In the Type Selector. click Text. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 15 Enter (1) Layer 16mm GWB. 14 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 12 On the Options bar. and click Modify on the Design Bar. 13 Click in the far left portion of the Brick on CMU wall to specify the leader start point.

Place the legend on a sheet 25 Using extension reference lines. You capture the wall type properties in the tool.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area. click Modify to end the command. click Detail Lines. 27 In the Project Browser. select Text : 6mm. click to add text without a leader. The wall type legend is added to the project cover sheet. Using Legends | 337 . double-click A100 . 23 In the Type Selector. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. 20 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. 28 On the Design Bar. click Wall Type Legend. draw a detail line that extends as far as the longest component callout. and click to place it above the symbol legend. 24 Below the title text of the upper component. and then select the wall to which you want to apply the same properties. 29 On the File menu. drag it onto the sheet. 22 On the Design Bar. Using a Legend View to Match Types. you use the Match Type tool to convert a wall in the floor plan to the component type used in the Wall Type Legend. 19 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Project Browser. add an identical detail line below the lower component. select Medium Lines. click Save.Add titles to the legend components 18 In the Type Selector. and enter Wall Type 1. Using a Legend View to Match Types In this exercise. 21 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2.

4 In the Wall Type Legend view. 5 In the floor plan view. click Tile. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. 6 Draw a rectangle around the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Match a component type 3 On the Tools toolbar. so that you are zoomed in to the walls. 8 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 338 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 7 Click on the wall at the top of the view. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. 2 On the Window menu.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. Tile views in the drawing window 1 Close all project view drawings except Floor Plan: Level 1 and Wall Type Legend. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. select the wall type 1 component. click . The open drawings are both visible. m_Legends_in_progress. select Medium for Detail Level.

Using Revision Tracking | 339 . Using the table. click Revisions. contractor inquiries. In general. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog box. When you use this option. the revision is locked and issued to the field. and enter a date. click Open. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. In this exercise. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. 10 Proceed to the next lesson. if the active revision is number 1. For example. Using Revision Tracking. Using Revision Tracking Revit Building provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. If you select By Sheet. When Issued is selected. click the Training Files icon. Add a revision to the project 3 Click on the value for Release Date. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. You can create a sequence of revisions. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Open m_Revisions. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. 2 In the Revisions dialog box. 9 On the File menu. Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. These changes can be due to owner requests. click Close. 4 Click on the value for Description. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method.rvt located in the Metric folder. or changes in building material availability. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. and enter Moved window and added second window to Living Room.The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 1 from the Wall Type Legend. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. yet as concise as possible.

3 In the small empty room. and click Save.rvt. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 8 On the File menu. 340 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . The selected window is moved to the left 900 mm. enter 1200 mm. expand Views. select the window. including revision number and revision date. Modify a window 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Select the dimension value to the left of the window. name the file m_Revisions-in progress. and expand Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 9 Navigate to your preferred directory.rvt. 7 Click OK. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. you make changes to the project floor plan.If Visible is not selected. In most instances. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. and press ENTER. Revision clouds have read-only properties. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Double-click Level 1 to open it in the drawing area. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. click Save As. m_Revisions-in progress. Sketching Revision Clouds.

Add a revision cloud 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 Move the cursor to the right until the distance from the midpoint is 1800 mm. 15 On the File menu. m_Revisions-in progress. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified windows. 13 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed.Add a window 5 Verify that the modified window is still selected in the drawing area. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 8 Click to place the second window. Using Revision Tracking | 341 . click Save. Tagging Revision Clouds. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Revit Building is now in sketch mode. on the Edit toolbar. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. 9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise.rvt. 12 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. and click 6 Select the midpoint of the casement window as the start point. 11 In the drawing area. you load a revision tag into the project. click near the windows you have changed. 14 On the Design Bar. click Revision Cloud. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. click Modify to end the command.

3 In the Tags dialog box. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. and click OK. the cloud is tagged as number 1. you need to add one. 4 In the drawing area. 2 On the Options Bar. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. m_Revisions-in progress. Working with Revisions. and click Open. click to place the floor plan. and drag it onto the sheet view. click New ➤ Sheet. on which you place a revised view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.Load a revision tag 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you create a sheet view in your project. verify that A0 Metric is selected. Create a sheet view 1 On the View menu. 6 Draw a rectangle around the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. 6 In the Tags. under Floor Plans. In the Tags dialog box.rvt. select Level 1. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. Tag a revision cloud 7 On the Options Bar.rfa. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. click Tags. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud. 8 In the drawing area. scroll down to Revision Clouds. and because the revision is the first in the project. click Save. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. dialog box. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. 4 Click Load. Add a revised view to a sheet 3 In the Project Browser. clear Leader. 5 In the Open dialog box. A new sheet view is created in the project. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. click OK. You then issue a revision. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 9 Click to place the tag. 5 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. 342 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 10 On the File menu. Because you chose to number by project. click Tag. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. browse to Annotations\M_Revision Tag. you create additional revisions in the revision table.

click Revisions. NOTE After you issue a revision. 8 In the Revisions dialog box. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. clear Visible for each issued revision. 11 In the Revisions dialog box. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. you can no longer modify it. 13 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. click New. 9 Select Issued. and click OK. under Add. 15 On the File menu. 12 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. 14 Click OK. click Revisions. click Close. you prevent further changes to the revision. On the Settings menu. Issue a revision 7 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. Using Revision Tracking | 343 . On the Settings menu. Create additional revisions 10 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. You do this by issuing the revision. enter a name for Issued to. You can continue to add revisions.The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.

344 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .

For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. and metal studs. plywood. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. In this tutorial. like a standard detail that you want to add to a library. These components scale with the building model. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. you also learn how to change the detail component display order and visibility settings in a detail to create depth and show varying levels of detail. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. 345 .Detailing 12 In this tutorial. you learn how to create details in Autodesk Revit Building.

you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. Open m_Cape_House. You create the callout view by adding a callout to the section view. The callout defines the extents of the callout view. The section line that you see in the floor plan indicates that a section view has been added to the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open. you create a callout view that references the foundation sill of the house. In order to detail from the building model. Modify the section view 1 In the Project Browser. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. expand Floor Plans. add detail components. Creating a Callout View In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. and double-click First Floor. 346 | Chapter 12 Detailing . In the callout view. you detail the foundation sill of a small house. The callout view is a larger view of the area that you define in the section view with the callout.rvt located in the Metric folder.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you trace over the building model geometry. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. expand Views (all). Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

3 Click the break symbol to create a gap in the section line.2 On the Design Bar. Blue grips and a break symbol display on the section line. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 347 . 4 Select and move the blue grips of the interior end points of the section line so the section line is displayed as in the following illustration. click Modify and select the section line.

Click in the section view where the lower right corner displays. 11 Select the grip near the callout head and move it to the bottom left side of the view as shown in the following illustration. click Modify. 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and select the callout border. The callout border and tag highlight and display blue grips. ■ Reposition the callout head 10 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. 9 Add the callout by drawing a rectangle around the left side of the foundation: ■ Click in the section view where the upper left corner of the callout rectangle displays in the following illustration. 6 Double-click the head of the section line to display the section view. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and click the tab in the context menu. select 1:5 for Scale. click Callout.Add a callout to the section view to specify the callout view 5 On the Design Bar. 348 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Modify.

Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 349 . 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. 16 In the view. Notice that the alignment of the level is locked to the site level. select the First Floor level line. change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ Enter Section Detail @ Foundation Sill for View Name.Display and modify the callout view 12 On the Design Bar. 15 Click OK. 13 On the View menu. Select Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style. The callout view is displayed. click Modify and double-click the callout head. click View Properties.

that you add to the view are visible only in this view. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. region objects. 2 On the Design Bar. 5 Trace the region representing the sloped grade using the following illustration for reference. you detail the view of the foundation sill. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and insulation objects. You start by adding a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside of the foundation wall. m_Cape_House. click Lines. and an anchor bolt.rvt. TIP If you do not see the Filled Region command.17 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that the Design Bar is now in Sketch mode and the model geometry is grayed out. Detailing the View. select Wide Lines. 350 | Chapter 12 Detailing . which means that any detail components. click Filled Region. Exact dimensions are not important. turn off the display of some of the Design Bar tabs. Create a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside the foundation wall 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. Detailing the View In this exercise. as well as detail lines. and then add detail components to the detail that represent lumber. They are also view specific. sub-flooring. TIP Enter SO on your keyboard to turn off snapping as you sketch. siding. select Chain and click .

6 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. click in the Fill Pattern type parameter Value field. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 351 . select EARTH. 14 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. select <Invisible lines>. click Finish Sketch to complete the filled region. 13 On the Design Bar. If you are zoomed in too far. and click OK. enter Earth for Name. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. 15 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Name dialog box. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Name and Pattern. NOTE You may have to zoom out to view the earth fill pattern in the filled region. 12 Click OK three times. click Modify and select the two lines shown in the following illustration. click Edit/New. 11 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. The earth fill pattern is displayed in the filled region. the pattern does not display.

22 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber Section counter-clockwise. 21 In the Type Selector. navigate to Detail Components\Structural\Wood in the Metric Library. select the following lumber components: ■ ■ ■ 38X140 38X235 38X286 20 Click Open. 23 Place the 38X235 Lumber component in the detail view as shown in the following illustration.rfa. click . 17 On the Options Bar. 352 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Detail Component. select M_Dimension Lumber-Section. 19 At the bottom of the dialog box. select M_Dimension Lumber-Section 38X235.Add lumber detail components 16 On the Design Bar. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber. 18 In the Open dialog box.

select M_Dimension Lumber.Section: 38x140. 25 In the Type Selector. and place it in the detail view. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 353 .24 Place a 38X235 lumber component as shown in the following illustration.

TIP You may need to use the Align tool to place the plywood component. 27 In the Type Selector.Add a plywood detail component to represent the sub-flooring 26 On the Design Bar. select M_Plywood : 25mm. Add a plywood detail component to the exterior wall face 29 Place another plywood component on the exterior face of the wall as shown in the following illustration. click Detail Component. 28 Place the plywood component above the last 38X235 that you added as shown in the following illustration. 354 | Chapter 12 Detailing .

When you place the repeating detail component. select m_anchorbolt and place it in the detail view as shown in the following illustration. Verify Detail Rotation is set to None. click Edit/New. Select Inside. click . and click OK. click Duplicate. and click OK. 35 On the Options Bar. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. ■ ■ 40 Click OK twice. click Repeating Detail. until enough lap siding displays to cover it. change the following type parameters: ■ ■ Select m_lap siding for Detail. enter 19 mm for Thickness. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 355 .30 On the Design Bar. 41 Add the lap siding to the plywood on the exterior face: ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the plywood detail component. Move the cursor up along the plywood component. enter Lap Siding for Name. Add an anchor bolt detail component 32 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Type Selector. this parameter determines the appropriate spacing between the repeated components so that they fill the space that you select evenly. . and click 31 In the Element Properties dialog box. Verify Fill Available Space is selected for Layout. 38 In the Name dialog box. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. select the plywood on the exterior face of the wall. click Detail Component. and click to place the lap siding. Add a lap siding to the exterior wall as a repeating detail component 34 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

rvt. Adding Detail Lines. If you need to make modifications to the lap siding after you place it. The lap siding is displayed along the plywood. m_Cape_House. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Type Selector. on the Design Bar. they are view specific. Like detail components. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 3 Sketch detail lines to enclose the bottom end of the lap siding as shown in the following illustration. you add lines to your detail.NOTE You may need to move your cursor above the crop region of the detail view to place the lap siding along the entire length of the plywood. meaning they display only in this view. click Detail Lines. 356 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Select and move the blue grips on the repeating detail line to shorten or lengthen the lap siding. click Modify and select the repeating lap siding detail component. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Wide Lines. 42 Proceed to the next exercise.

The model geometry that displays underneath the detail components and lines is grayed out. click Filled Region. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 357 .4 On the View menu. select Medium Lines. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. 12 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. select . select Medium lines. sketch a 20 x 100 mm baseboard. 8 Using the underlay inside wall face and floor as references. Create a filled region that represents the15 mm gypsum board 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Chain. 6 On the Design Bar. click View Properties. 9 Add two more detail lines as shown in the following illustration. and click OK. select As underlay for the Display Model instance parameter. and click . 13 Trace over the interior wall face as shown in the following illustration.

16 In the Type Properties dialog box.14 On the Design Bar. click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field. under Name and Pattern. 21 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. click Finish Sketch to view the gypsum board. 17 In the Name dialog box. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 20 Click OK three times. 358 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Edit/New. click Duplicate. select Gypsum-Plaster. 18 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter Plasterboard for Name. click Region Properties.

Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation. click Edit/New. under Name and Pattern. 33 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box. 28 In the Type Properties dialog box. 2 In the Line Styles dialog box. Add a vapor barrier 1 On the Settings menu. select Concrete. under Modify Subcategories. click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field. you add a vapor barrier and insulation to the detail. 24 On the Options Bar. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation In this exercise. click Region Properties. enter Concrete for Name. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 359 . click Line Styles. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. the region would be blank. 23 In the Type Selector. Near the end of this lesson. click Finish Sketch to view the concrete filled region. click Duplicate. select . click New. click Filled Region. you turn off the display of the model geometry. and click OK. 32 Click OK three times. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Cape_House. and click OK. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Vapor Barrier for Name. 25 Trace a rectangle over the foundation wall. select Medium Lines.Create a filled region that represents the foundation wall 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 26 On the Design Bar.rvt. 3 In the New Subcategory dialog box. 29 In the Name dialog box. If there were no filled region to represent the foundation walls. 31 In the Fill Patterns dialog box.

12 Sketch the insulation: ■ ■ Click at the top and to the right of the exterior wall face underlay of the wall to specify the start point. 8 On the Options Bar. Adding Break Lines. Add insulation 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Break Lines In this exercise.4 Under Lines Styles. click Detail Lines. Move your cursor down to the top of the 38x140 and click to specify the endpoint. 9 Click the right face of the interior wall to create a line as shown in the following illustration. click Insulation. make the following changes to Vapor Barrier: ■ ■ ■ Select 3 for Line Weight/Projection. Select Black for Line Color. 360 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Select Dash for Line Pattern. you add break lines to the detail. click and enter 28mm for Offset. 11 On the Options Bar. 5 Click OK to complete the new line style. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Vapor Barrier. 7 In the Type Selector. enter 120 mm for Width and 65 mm for Offset to center.

click Modify. 8 Place the break line approximately in the center of the floor as shown in the following illustration.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the view displays as in the following illustration. and select the crop boundary of the detail view. verify that M_Break Line is selected. click Detail Component. Add a break line to the floor 6 On the Design Bar.rvt. Add a break line to the top of the wall section 1 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Type Selector. 4 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. select M_Break Line. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 361 . 7 In the Type Selector. 3 Place the break line at the top of the wall section as shown in the following image. m_Cape_House.

362 | Chapter 12 Detailing . and select the break line. NOTE You may need to drag the shape handles of the break line to resize it to the illustration. Turn off the visibility of model components to view detail components only 11 On the View menu. 10 On the Tools toolbar. click and rotate the break line until it displays as shown in the following illustration.9 On the Design Bar. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Do not display for Display model. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added previously. as shown in the following illustration. When you turn the display model off. click Modify. click View Properties. and click OK.

click Text. m_Cape_House. on the File menu. Click again to set the elbow position of the leader. you add text notes to complete the detail. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 363 . Enter the text. select 4 mm text for Text size.13 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Adding Text Notes. 5 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. 4 Add the leaders and notes shown in the following illustration: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to set the location of the arrow. Click again to set the location of the text box. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. click to create a leader with two segments. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 2 On the Type Selector.

while other model elements. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. expand Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. display in coarse detail. Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View In this exercise. such as walls and windows. You also learn how to override line styles and detail level settings for each model element. The section line that you see in the top right corner of the floor plan indicates that a section view that cuts through the kitchen sink and cabinet has been added to the project. Open the detail view 1 In the Project Browser. A detail component can display in front or in back of all other components.Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views In this lesson. or can display in front of or in back of specific components. you can set only doors in a detail view to display in fine detail. For example. click Open. and double-click Basement. you change the order in which detail components in a detail view of a kitchen sink and cabinet display. 2 Double-click the section line head to display the section view. Open c_Office_Building. The filled regions in the detail section view do not overlap properly. you learn to modify the display of detail components in your detail views. 364 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Within a detail view. expand Views (all). click the Training Files icon.rvt located in the Common folder. you can arrange the order in which detail components display.

behind the cabinet. The sink now displays as if it was in front of the cabinet detail component. Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 365 . click . Display the sink behind the cabinet 5 Select the sink and. on the Options Bar.Display the sink in front of the cabinet 3 Move your cursor over the kitchen sink detail component. click . The sink is now sent to the back of the drawing. on the Options Bar. and when it highlights. select it. 4 With the sink selected.

Open four different views 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.There are three stacked detail components in this detail: a sink. Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Zoom ➤ Zoom In Region. Display the furniture in the basement view in halftone 4 On the View menu. 2 On the Window menu. using halftone. Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View In this exercise. you change the visibility settings of several views by overriding line styles. select Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 366 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 3 On the View menu. and overriding detail level settings. and a simple fill pattern. select Tile. c_Office_Building. Select the base cabinet and try the various depth options on the Options Bar. 5 Click in the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view and draw a zoom box around the furniture as shown in the following illustration. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. a cabinet.rvt. double-click Level 1.

click the Model Categories tab. The door tags are not displayed. 7 On the View menu. 15 Clear the Visibility for Door tags. Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 367 . click the Annotation Categories tab. 12 On the View menu. 13 On the View menu. and click Apply. and select Halftone. expand Views (all). 14 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. select Visibility/Graphics. The furniture within this view is displayed in halftone. expand Floor Plans.6 Maximize the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view. select Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and double-click Level 1. 10 Click OK. 9 Under Visibility. select Visibility/Graphics. scroll down to Furniture. Turn off door tags in the Level 1 Floor Plan 11 In the Project Browser. 16 Move the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box so you can view the floor plan. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box.

18 For Walls. The cut line style of the walls is now significantly heavier. The walls in this view display in a coarse level of detail while the rest of the floor plan is displayed in a fine level of detail. 21 Click OK twice. 20 In the Select Line Style dialog box.Display walls in coarse detail in the Level 1 Floor Plan 17 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. All the walls in this view are displayed as coarse regardless of the settings in the View Properties dialog box. and click Apply. Change the cut line style for walls in the view 19 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. select Coarse for Detail Level. click Override under Line Style Cut for Walls. Select 8 for Line Weight. click the Model Categories tab. Select Solid for Line Pattern. 368 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Select Black for Line Color. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Override.

5 Proceed to the next exercise. In the next exercise. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. you create a door detail in this new drafting view. click Save As. These details do not update with changes to the building model. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. The new drafting view. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View In this exercise. click Open. The building model is no longer displayed in the drawing window because you have created a drafting view that is not associated with the building model. enter the following: ■ ■ Enter Door Detail for Name. Creating a Drafting View In this exercise. on the File menu. Create the new drafting view 1 On View menu. expand Views (all). You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model.22 If you want to save your changes. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog box. you create a drafting view that is not associated with a building model. Select 1:5 for Scale. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Building or by importing details from an existing detail library. After you create a drafting view.rvt located in the Metric folder. Open m_Drafting_views. click New ➤ Drafting View. and expand Drafting Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 23 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 4 In the Project Browser. named Door Detail. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View. Creating a Drafted Detail | 369 . Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. you create a door detail in the new drafting view. 3 Click OK to create the new drafting view. is displayed in the Project Browser. you learn how to create a drafted detail. click the Training Files icon.

2 In the Type Selector. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. 5 Permanently dimension the door jamb sketch so that the dimension values match those in the following illustration. 3 Sketch the door jamb shown in the following illustration. right-click in the Design Bar. click Dimension. When the dimension value displays in blue. m_Drafting_views. you can change it. After you create a dimension. and click the tab in the context menu. and then use the Split and Trim tools to complete the sketch.rvt. TIP You may want to use the Chain option when you sketch the door jamb. You can also use the Rectangles sketching tool to create the basic shapes. select Wide Lines. Create a drafted door detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you can change its value by clicking Modify on the Design Bar and selecting one of the lines the dimension references. 370 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Detail Lines.

click Lines. and click OK. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. under Name. and click OK 3 times. Creating a Drafted Detail | 371 . 21 Sketch the 50 mm x 15 mm door trim as shown. 8 On the Options Bar. verify Drafting is selected. 10 Sketch two 15 mm thick rectangles as shown. 9 Turn off automatic snapping to facilitate sketching in close detail: ■ ■ On the Settings menu.Create filled regions 6 You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 18 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. The detail with filled regions (the gypsum wall board with the sand drafting pattern) is displayed. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. click Region Properties. enter Sand. On the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. 14 In the Name dialog box. click Filled Region. 17 Under Pattern Type. click for the Fill pattern type parameter. clear Length dimension snap increments. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Detail Lines. click . select Sand. click Snaps. 16 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. select Wide Lines. 20 In the Type Selector. Under Dimension Snaps.

Adjust witness lines 23 Select each door jamb dimension.22 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and add 2 dimensions to the door trim. 372 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 25 Add an overall dimension of the door jamb. 24 Drag the door jamb dimension controls to pull the dimensions away from the detail.

and click OK. Select the desired dimensions. click Duplicate. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. click the Hide/Isolate command. 35 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Detail Component. 27 In the Type Selector. Creating a Drafted Detail | 373 . and click Hide Object from the context menu. 34 In the Name dialog box. enter 38 x 125. click Edit/New. 28 Draw lines that represent the door as shown. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber. 31 On the Options Bar. select Medium Lines. select M_Dimension Lumber 38X140. TIP You may find it helpful to temporarily hide the dimensions in the view when sketching the door. click . 37 Place the lumber component in the detail. 36 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber counter-clockwise. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 125 for the Width type parameter. and click OK twice. click Detail Lines. and on the View Control Bar. Add the dimensional lumber for the header 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 30 In the Type Selector.Sketch a door 26 On the Design Bar.

Add two break lines 39 On the Design Bar. TIP Rotate and move the bottom break line to adjust its masking element. 40 In the Type Selector. 41 Add two break lines as shown. select Break Line.38 Stack another 38 x 125 directly above the one that you placed in the previous step to complete the header. click Detail Component. 374 | Chapter 12 Detailing .

46 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. click Modify to end the command. Place the drafting view on a new sheet 45 On the View menu. and click OK. verify that A0 metric is selected. click Text. and expand Drafting Views. and drag it onto the sheet. 47 In the Project Browser. click to create a leader with two segments. 43 In the Options Bar. expand Views. 50 On the Design Bar.Add text notes to complete the detail 42 On the Design Bar. 49 Click to specify an insertion point. Creating a Drafted Detail | 375 . 44 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. click New ➤ Sheet. 48 Select Door Detail.

the DWG entities are converted into Revit Building elements. enter the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Rail Detail for Name. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. Enter 5 for the Scale value. 7 On the View menu.51 Proceed to the next exercise. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View. Import a complete detail in DWG format 4 On the File menu. select m_Rail_detail. The detail is imported as an import symbol.dwg from the Metric folder in the Training Files. 376 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The detail that you import is in DWG format. 5 In the Import/Link dialog box. select New ➤ Drafting View. you must explode it. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. DXF. In order to modify it. select Preserve colors. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog box. under Layer/Level Colors.rvt. m_Drafting_views. and then click Open. 6 At the bottom of the Import/Link dialog box. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the detail. Create a new drafting view 1 On the View menu. Select Custom for Scale. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. 3 Click OK. DGN. After you explode it.

Change the text color to black and add text leaders 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click . 9 Right-click. and click OK 3 times. The lines of the detail are converted to detail lines. select black. The text retains the DWG layer color. 15 In the Color dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. The text is displayed as black after you click in the drawing area. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. 10 If an error dialog box displays. click Delete Element(s). and select all of the text blocks in the detail. click Edit/New. and click Full Explode. and then select the detail. and the text within the detail is converted to Revit Building text. click Modify. Creating a Drafted Detail | 377 . press and hold CTRL.Explode the imported detail 8 On the Design Bar. click the button in the Color type parameter Value field.

20 Proceed to the next exercise. click . click Modify. 378 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 17 On the Options Bar. A leader is added to the text note. and select the bottom text note. MET STUD FRAMING. 18 Select and move the leader grips to position the leader as shown. 19 Add leaders to the remaining text notes to complete the detail as shown. Creating a Reference Callout.Add leaders to the text notes 16 On the Design Bar.

rvt. it appears in the Reference other view list with the detail number and sheet number displayed after the view name. m_Drafting_views. 6 Select the callout. click Callout. The callout head displays the detail and sheet information (1/A101) because the referenced drafting view is already placed on this sheet. and select Drafting View: Door Detail (1/A101). NOTE When a view has been placed on a sheet view. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Sections. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the door detail that you previously created. Display the reference view 7 On the Design Bar. The door detail that you drafted previously is displayed. and double-click Section 1. 5 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble over the upper left door corner. The section view is displayed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Drafted Detail | 379 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). click Modify.Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. 4 Zoom in on the Level 1 doors. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click the callout. select Reference other view.

380 | Chapter 12 Detailing . and save the exercise file with a unique name.8 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. on the File menu. Otherwise. close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Scheduling 13 In this tutorial. you learn how to create different types of schedules in your Autodesk Revit Building projects. 381 .

creating a type schedule. you learn how to create type and instance schedules. you can list each component as a separate line item. or a schedule that lists every window in the building.Creating Type and Instance Schedules In this lesson. You begin by creating an instance schedule. or you can group components of the same type into a single line item. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. creating an instance schedule. 382 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. When you schedule building components in Revit Building.

4 Under Available fields. click the Fields tab. Create a new window schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and click OK. and click View. you change the window instance schedule to a window type schedule.Next. Finally. or a schedule that lists the windows by window type. 5 Using the same process. under Category. click the Training Files icon.rvt located in the Metric folder. select Comments and click Add. right-click in the Design Bar. click Open. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 6 Under Scheduled fields. select Windows. Creating Type and Instance Schedules | 383 . 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 7 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. Open m_Schedules.

NOTE By clicking Show. under Other. click Show. 11 In the Project Browser. 384 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . click the Sorting/Grouping tab. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. 10 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog box. and double-click Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. expand Schedules/Quantities. The window schedule is displayed. 9 In the warning dialog box that is displayed. and click View Properties. on the Options Bar. 16 Click OK twice. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. in large building models with many views. However. sorted by type mark. 15 Select Type Mark for Sort by.Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 8 Select any cell in the first row of the window schedule and. click Close. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 12 Right-click on the schedule. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

you create a room schedule from the floor plan of a large building model. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. 21 If you want to save your changes. The window type schedule is displayed. 20 Click OK twice. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click View Properties.Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 17 Right-click on the schedule. click Save As. click Edit for the Sorting/Grouping instance parameter. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. you learn to add schedules and schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 385 . on the File menu. 22 Close the exercise file. clear Itemize every instance. 19 In the Schedule Properties dialog box.

In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open m_Schedules. right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. Several rooms and room tags exist in the floor plan. 5 Under Available fields. select Rooms. and double-click flr 3 to make it the active view. 3 In the New Schedule dialog box. select Number and click Add. expand Views (all). and click View. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. click Open. under Category. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 386 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . click Schedule/Quantities. click the Training Files icon. click the Fields tab. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt located in the Metric folder.

you define the font for the schedule headers. 10 Click OK. next to Rows:. because the room is not tagged with a room tag. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.6 Using the same process. Add new rooms to the schedule 11 On the Options Bar. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Tagged. Next. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 7 Under Scheduled fields. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. 9 To the right of Header text. click New. The room Number is 1. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 387 . NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. 8 Click the Appearance tab. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

388 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 15 Select 1 in the Number column for Room 1. add a second room. and enter Conference to change the room name. 17 Zoom in on the right side of the building. double-click flr 3. and select Conference from the list. The second room is displayed at the bottom of the list and is numbered sequentially. 14 Select Room in the Name column for Room 1. Add two room tags to the floor plan 16 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. None of the rooms have tags placed on them.12 Using the same process. and enter 30. 13 Select Room in the Name column for Room 29.

select 30 Conference for Room. TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. 19 On the Options Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. and click Drafting. 23 In the Project Browser. select 29 Conference for Room. 20 Move your cursor into the large room in the upper right corner of the floor plan. 21 On the Options Bar. The boundaries of the room highlight before you place the room tag. and verify that Horizontal is selected. and click to place the room tag. expand Schedules/Quantities. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 389 . 22 Place the room tag in the small room across from the large conference room. click Room Tag. and double-click Room Schedule to view the updated room rows.18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

double-click Room Schedule to view the 11 rooms that you added to the schedule. 28 In the Project Browser. click Room Tag. 26 On the Options Bar. 27 Place the room tags as shown in the following illustration.Add eleven additional room tags 24 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. select Auto for Room. 25 On the Design Bar. 390 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . double-click flr 3. under Schedules/Quantities.

click Modify. click Modify. under Floor Plans. 32 With the room tags selected. click . click . 33 In the Element Properties dialog box. and select the seven room tags shown in the following illustration.11 square meters. select Office for Name. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 391 . 31 On the Design Bar. 34 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and select Circulation for Name. and select the tags in the three remaining rooms named Room. double-click flr 3. and zoom in on the room. locate the room with an area of 92. press and hold CTRL. and click OK. 30 In the Project Browser.Modify room tags 29 In the schedule. 35 With the room tags selected. press and hold CTRL. The name in the room tag is now Circulation. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Identity Data. select Services for Name.

click the Key Name field. 38 In the New Schedule dialog box. under Category. select Rooms. and Wall Finish. Floor Finish. select Base Finish. 40 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. under Available fields. Enter Carpet 1 for Floor Finish. 45 On the Options Bar. 46 Add information to the rows so that the schedule displays as shown in the following illustration. Enter Paint for Wall Finish. 392 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . and enter Std Office. 43 In the new row. 39 Select Schedule keys. press and hold CTRL. click New twice to add two rows to the schedule. click New to add a row to the schedule. enter the following information in the row: ■ ■ ■ Enter Vinyl for Base Finish. and click Add. and click OK. 41 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. Define three new room styles 42 On the Options Bar.Add a schedule key 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 44 Using the same process. click Schedule/Quantities.

Apply the new room styles to the room schedule 47 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. View the room schedule 54 In the Project Browser. and click Add. press and hold CTRL. 49 On the Options Bar. 57 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 39) in the lower right corner of the floor plan. click Edit for Fields. 51 On the Design Bar. 38. select Exec Offices for Room Style. and click OK. select Exec Offices for Room Style. double-click flr 3. and click OK. and select the room tag in the large conference room (29) in the upper right corner of the floor plan. under Other. and select the room tags in the three offices (37. click . click View Properties. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 393 . under Other. under Available fields. double-click Room Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. 59 Click OK twice to update the schedule. 56 Under Other. 48 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 53 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Room Style. click . click Modify. 50 In the Element Properties dialog box. 52 On the Options Bar. 58 Change the order of the schedule as shown in the dialog box below. 55 On the View menu.

61 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a room color diagram based on the names of the rooms in the floor plan.60 For the rooms in the schedule that are named Services. 394 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Creating a Room Color Diagram. select Services from the list in the Room Style column. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise.

3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog box. expand Floor Plans. click Edit Color Scheme.rvt. scroll all the way to the left. 4 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 10 In the PANTONE® Color Picker. click PANTONE. The fill color in the rooms named Conference are displayed as green. Create a room color diagram 1 In the Project Browser.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click OK. under Views (all). Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 395 . and double-click flr 3. 9 In the Color dialog box. 11 Click OK three times. and click the color green. m_schedules. The rooms in the floor plan automatically change color. click the color button for Conference. click Modify. 5 In the alert dialog box. A legend displays at the tip of your cursor. click Color Fill. 7 On the Options Bar. Change the fill colors that are applied to the conference rooms 6 On the Design Bar. and select the color legend. 2 Zoom out so you can view the entire building model.

TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. right-click in the Design Bar. number. click Save As. select Project Units from the Settings menu and change the appropriate formats to metric. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Open c_Schedules_2. 15 If you want to save your changes. 16 Close the exercise file. 2 In the New Schedules dialog box. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you learn how to schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Building components. NOTE Because the next two lessons use common files. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. select Walls. select the following fields and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. 4 Under Available fields.rvt located in the Common folder. Room no longer displays in the key/legend. click Schedule/Quantities. and click View. graphics are displayed with imperial values. The color diagram and legend reflect the changes that you made. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. under Categories. To display graphics with metric values. click Open. 396 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. under Schedules/Quantities. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click Room Schedule. click the Fields tab. and level. You also learn how to create a furniture schedule that includes room name. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.Change the name of the single room named Room 12 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. select Services for Room (10) in the Name column. on the File menu. double-click flr 3. and click OK. Create a new wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 13 In the Room Schedule.

add Assembly Code and Assembly Description to the schedule. and click Properties to view the element properties of the wall schedule that you created. 7 Right-click Wall Schedule. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 397 . under Other. click Edit for Fields. The Assembly Code and Assembly Description fields display in the schedule.Schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes 6 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 Click OK twice.

and select C1010115 .Brick Veneer w/ Stud.Partitions . and double-click Level 1. 398 | Chapter 13 Scheduling .Interior Construction.Partitions. and then click in the schedule.Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project within the schedule 11 In the wall schedule. click in the Assembly code column in the first row of the schedule. expand C1010100 . and click . 14 Click OK in the dialog box that explains that the change will be applied to all elements of the chosen type. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project from the building model 15 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. expand C1010 . 12 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box.Fixed Partitions. expand C10 . 13 Click OK. expand C . under Views (all). All of the walls of this wall type are updated.Interiors.

Partitions .Drywall w/ Metal Stud. under Schedules/Quantities. 22 In the Project Browser. 21 Click OK three times. 20 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box. and then click . click in the Assembly Code field. click . expand C. and select C1010145 . expand C10. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box. double-click Furniture Schedule. expand C1010100. under Identity Data. expand C1010.5 1/2" Partition (1hr) walls. Schedule building model components by level and room 23 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New.16 Select one of the Interior . 17 On the Options Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 399 . double-click Wall Schedule.

click Sheet. 29 Click OK twice. and click Properties. 32 Drag the furniture schedule from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 27 Add Room: Name and Room: Number to the schedule. and click to place it. and then add Level and Manufacturer to the schedule. click Edit for Fields. and click OK. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : 30 x 42 Horizontal. 400 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . select Room for Select available fields from. Change the appearance of the schedule 33 Zoom in on the schedule on the sheet.24 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 28 Select Furniture for Select available fields from. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. 34 Adjust the row length in the schedule by selecting and moving the blue grips that are displayed on the top of the schedule. under Other. Place the Furniture Schedule on a new drawing sheet 30 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click Furniture Schedule. 31 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box.

These shared parameters can be added to any family. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson.35 Split the schedule into multiple segments by clicking the blue break line that is displayed on the right border of the schedule. 37 If you want to save your changes. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Building multi-category schedules. adding the shared parameters to a family. ensuring consistency across families and projects. regardless of category. and creating a multi-category schedule. Creating a Multi-Category Schedule In this exercise. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 401 . click Save As. you create a multi-category schedule. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. 38 Close the exercise file. and are defined and stored in an external file. on the File menu. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in pre-defined instance and type parameters either within family components or within the project template. 36 Select the blue crosses that are displayed in the center of each schedule segment to reposition the schedule segments as shown. and save the exercise file with a unique name. The new schedule segments are automatically placed to the right of the original schedule and are top aligned.

Shared parameters are saved to an external file. click New. create a multi-category tag that you use to tag a simple floor plan.You create shared parameters. verify that Hardware is selected for Parameter group. 10 After you add the parameters. 9 Add three additional parameters. 7 Under Parameters. select Text for Type. 5 In the New Parameter Group dialog box. 402 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . and click OK. and click Save. enter Hardware. under Groups. ID. Create a shared parameter file 1 On the File menu. If you are working on a network. click Create. click OK. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. 3 In the Save As dialog box. enter a file name. Click OK if the alert box indicates that the shared parameter file does not exist. Create parameters in the Hardware group 6 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. add them to a door family. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Hinge. and click OK. The shared parameter file (TXT) is created. and then generate the multi-category schedule. click New. click Shared Parameters. and Lock Set. and assign Text for Type. Create a new parameter group to store individual parameters 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. You store all of your hardware-related parameters within this group for use in the project. enter Closure for Name. make sure you save your shared parameter files in a location where other users can access it.

23 On the File menu. click Close to close the file. so that you can use it later in this exercise. 14 On the Design Bar. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 403 . setting them as Type parameters. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 21 Click OK. You are now working in the Family Editor. 20 Assign the new parameters the following values by entering them in the corresponding Value field. The parameters are displayed in the Family Types dialog box. and click Select. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 22 Save the file as NewDoor in an appropriate location. select Shared parameter. click the Training Files icon. 17 In the Shared Parameters dialog box. and click OK. 15 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter Chrome for Hinge.rfa located in the Common folder. under Parameters. select ID. 19 Repeat the steps for the other parameters. click Family Types. 13 Open c_ Door. under Parameters. 12 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and click OK. click Open. click Add. Enter N/A for Closure. select Instance. Enter 1 for ID.Add the shared parameters to a family 11 On the File menu. The Family Types dialog box displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Yale for Lock Set.

rft in the Annotations folder. 26 On Design Bar. select Hardware. 27 Click at the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog box. select Multi-Category Tag. select c_Hardware_Plan. 404 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . under Parameter Group. 31 Under Parameters. Use the multi-category tag in a project 40 On the File menu. This option ensures that this tag attaches only to a component with that same filter parameter (i. as shown. select ID. 34 Zoom in to the tag at the intersection of the reference planes.e. 35 On the Design Bar. the tag cannot attach to any component. click Lines. 39 On the File menu. A multi-category tag must have at least one label with an external parameter set as a filter parameter. NOTE If you do not specify a filter parameter for the tag. 28 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click . and click Open. select Filter parameter. 36 On the Options Bar. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 25 In the New dialog box. click Close to close the file. click Label. ID). click Add. and click Open. 33 Click OK.rvt located in the Common folder.Create a multi-category tag 24 On the File menu. 37 Draw a rectangle around the tag. Open. 41 In the Open dialog box. click Select.. 32 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. and click OK twice. 38 Save the file as HardwareTag in an appropriate location. 30 In the Shared Parameters dialog box.

select Multi-Category Tags for Category.rfa that you just created. 46 Move your cursor into the drawing window. and click OK. Notice that you can highlight only those components that have the filter parameter that you set earlier to ID. select Multi-Category from the list. click Tag All Not Tagged to quickly tag all the components with the filter parameter. Notice that the HardwareTag is reading the shared parameter that you created earlier and attached to the Door family. click Schedule/Quantities. Create a multi-category schedule 50 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rfa and NewDoor. 48 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 44 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 43 Replace any existing doors by selecting them and changing their type to the NewDoor type that you just loaded. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ID Mark Type Family Closure Lock Set NOTE Do not be concerned with duplicate ID and Lock Set fields. 45 In the Type Selector. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 53 Click OK. click Tag. and load into the project the multi-category tag files HardwareTag. 47 Click to place the tag. select the multi-category HardwareTag that you just loaded. and click OK. 51 In the New Schedule dialog box.42 On the File menu. 49 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. 52 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 405 .

The floor plan is displayed. 406 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 55 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.The multi-category schedule is displayed. you create a level based door schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Save As. and double-click Level 3. you want to filter out all doors that are not on level 3 to include only the 11 doors listed above. Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules In this lesson. you create two schedules. click the Training Files icon. View the third floor of the building 1 In the Project Browser. The first schedule that you create is a level-based door schedule that uses a filter to exclude all of the doors that are not on floor three of the building model. There are 11 doors of the following types on this level of the building model: ■ ■ ■ 5 . expand Views (all). Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.UK_Single-Flush: SO 1010 x 2410 mm If you created a standard door schedule. click Open. and save the exercise file with a unique name. expand Floor Plans. You use both filters and a formula to create the second schedule.M_Single-Flush Vision: 864 x 2032 mm 3 . Open m_First_Project-West_Wing. However. click Schedule/Quantities. Create a new door schedule for level flr 3 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 54 If you want to save your changes.rvt located in the Metric folder. all of the doors in the project would be scheduled. based on wall area. Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. The second schedule that you create is a wall schedule that calculates the cost of the walls in the project.M_Single-Flush Vision: 915 x 2134 mm 3 . on the File menu.

and specify the following options: ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort by. enter Doors . 6 Under Available fields. and it causes the schedule to include only the doors on Level 3. under Other. select Level. select the following fields. The counts for the door types represent the door schedule for the entire model. Hide the Level field in the schedule so it is used only to filter the doors that are not on level 3 and not included as a column in the schedule 9 Click the Formatting tab. The schedule includes the count and type for only doors on floor 3. Under Name. Clear Itemize every instance to group the like door types into one row. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 12 Right-click the schedule. This filter checks each door in the project to see which level it is associated with. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Select Level 3 in the third menu. select Doors. Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules | 407 .Level 3. click the Fields tab. and click View Properties. click Edit for Filter. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Level in the first menu. and select (none) for Filter. Select equals in the second menu. 15 Click OK twice. click the Filter tab. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Sill Height Head Height Width Level 7 Click the Filter tab. 11 Under Field formatting. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. Verify Schedule building components is selected. select Hidden Field.3 In the New Schedule dialog box. 10 Under Fields. Verify New Construction is selected for Phase.

and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Cost Area 6 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 3 Click OK. 7 Select Family and Type for Sort by. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Use the cost values in the following illustration. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula. select Walls. 13 Click OK. and then under Field Formatting. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula In this exercise. The schedule is displayed. click Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. 5 Under Available fields.16 On the Standard toolbar. enter a cost value for each type in the schedule. 8 Clear Itemize every instance to group the like wall types into one row. 12 Under Fields. 11 Under Heading. 9 Click the Formatting tab. Verify Schedule building components is selected. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. m to more accurately represent the data. select Area. you create a wall schedule that provides a total cost of all of the walls in the project based on the total square footage of each wall type. select the following fields. click the Fields tab. click once so the schedule represents only the doors on Flr 3. select Calculate totals so that the total area of the each type is calculated. select Cost. The wall type information for each wall is updated when you enter this data.rvt. 10 Under Fields. m_First_Project-West_Wing. enter Cost/Sq. Create a new schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Verify New Construction is selected under Phase. 408 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 14 Since no cost has been assigned to these wall types.

16 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK twice. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. Scheduling Project Parameters | 409 . select Calculate totals to ensure that a total of all the walls is returned. you learn how to schedule project parameters. click Save As. Enter Area * Cost/(1 m^2) for Formula. Scheduling Project Parameters In this lesson. 25 Click OK. m column. 29 Close the exercise file. Select 2 decimal places for Rounding. Project parameters are instance or type parameters that you can use to schedule information specific to the project that you are working with. Notice that there is no grand total displayed for the Cost/Sq. select Total Cost. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Edit for Fields. 28 If you want to save your changes. Select Fixed for Units. 27 Select Grand totals to have the schedule display the sum of any row for which you selected Calculate totals on the Formatting tab.Determine the total cost for each wall type by multiplying the total area of the wall by the cost per square foot 15 Right-click the schedule. and click View Properties. under Other. without the value it would have a unit of area. Verify that Number is selected for Type. 23 Click Field Format. on the File menu. NOTE The /(1 m^2) in the formula is required to make the resulting value unitless. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. The schedule is displayed. 24 In the Format dialog box. 20 Click the Formatting tab. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. 21 Under Fields. This is because you did not select to calculate the totals for that field. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. They cannot be shared with other projects and. unlike shared parameters. 19 Click OK. you cannot use them to tag objects. click the Sorting/Grouping tab. click Calculated Value. 22 Under Field formatting.

Assign the new Occupant parameter to the project and create the room schedule 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 410 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . click Add to create the new parameter. Create a project parameter 1 On the Settings menu. Occupant.Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters In this exercise. The new project parameter Occupant is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog box. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog box. click Project Parameters. After you create the schedule. Under Categories. You begin by adding the Occupant parameter to the project and creating the room schedule to include the Occupant parameter as a column in the schedule. right-click in the Design Bar. click Room Tag. either by entering it directly. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and click Drafting. you can add information to the Occupant column in the schedule. 7 Tag the rooms as shown in the following illustration.rvt located in the Metric folder. Enter Occupant for Name. you create a room schedule for the following office floor plan that includes the project parameter. or by entering it in the properties of the room tag. select Rooms to associate the Occupant parameter with the Room category. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Project Parameter. click Open. TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 5 Click OK. Open m_Office_2. 4 Click OK.

and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Area Department Occupant 12 Click OK to generate the schedule. click the Fields tab. 14 If you want to save your changes. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. on the File menu. 10 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 13 Add names to the occupant field by entering them directly in the schedule or by entering them in the room tag properties. click Save As. 15 Close the exercise file. 11 Under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities.8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The Occupant field is displayed in the schedule. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. select the following fields. Exporting Project Information with ODBC | 411 . The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. and click OK. 9 In the New Schedule dialog box. select Rooms to create a room schedule. under Categories. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

under Database Name. select a location for the database file. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. so that each table of elements includes an “Id” column. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialog boxes. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. click OK.mdb for Database Name. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). 3 Click New. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. 10 When the confirmation displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 13 Close the exercise file. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Building exports. instance tables include a “TypeId” column containing the ID of the instance’s type. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. click the Training Files icon. 6 Click Finish. and open the database in Microsoft Access. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. click Create. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog box. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. Additionally. 9 Under Directories. click Open. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog box.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 1 On the File menu. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. 8 In the New Database dialog box. These parameters are exported as well and contain the ID of the key element. in addition to the Id column. Open c_Schedules_2.rvt located in the Common folder. Revit Building creates two tables for the following categories of elements: one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below). under Database. 412 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . and click Next. click OK in the dialog box. click the File Data Source tab. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. and some instance tables include a “RoomId” column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. and click Next. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. enter Revit_Project. and click OK to create the database. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. For example.

413 . and how to annotate and dimension your Autodesk Revit Building projects. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.Annotating and Dimensioning 14 In this tutorial.

In the left pane of the Open dialog box. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at sea level. Project levels report elevation as it relates to other levels in the project. and double-click South. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 m and Level 2 is 4 m above the base elevation. while Level 2 reads 4 m. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 meters and Level 2 is 4 meters above the base elevation. you can relocate the project at a base elevation of 1500 m and define the levels as shared so that Level 1 reads 1500 m. expand Elevations. You accomplish this in Revit Building by defining levels as either project or shared levels. 414 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . the elevation value of the second level of the house (4000 mm above Level 1) reports an elevation of 14000 mm. Setting the Base Elevation of a House In this exercise. expand Views (all). or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. For example. After you define the levels as shared and relocate the project.Setting the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. Level 1 reads 1500 m. Shared levels report an elevation value relative to an origin that you establish when you relocate the project.rvt located in the Metric folder. For example. and not 1504 m. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. you relocate the base elevation of a small house from 0 m to 10000 m. click the Training Files icon. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. and Level 2 reads 1504 m. and not 4 m. Open m_simple_house. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. click Open.

and click OK. Relocate the project 9 On the Tools menu. The south elevation is displayed. 13 Select the Level 2 line.Shared. enter 10000 mm.2 Select the Level 1 line. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. By selecting the Level 1 line. you would change the parameter for all the levels in the Project. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. 8 Click OK twice. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. 10 Select the Level 1 line. and you must create a new level type. 3 On the Options Bar. click . The elevation of the other levels remains the same. 12 On the View menu.Shared. enter Level . only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Constraints. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Shared for Elevation Base. and press ENTER. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. select Level : Level . Setting the Base Elevation of a Project | 415 . you specify the new location of the project. click Edit/New. By entering 10000 mm in this step. If you did that now. The reported value of Level 2 changes to take the value of the global elevation into consideration. 14 In the Type Selector. However. In order for Level 1 to report the global elevation after the project is relocated. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 6 In the Name dialog box. you specify the point from which you want to relocate the project. 11 Move the cursor above the elevation line. click Duplicate.

define the roof level as shared. In this case. except when you sketch profiles to create families. under Elevations. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs. there are two types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. so it reports an elevation of 18000 mm. 416 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . permanent dimensions are created automatically. although you must turn on their visibility to view them.15 In the Project Browser. click Save As. on the File menu. double-click North. Dimensioning In this lesson. 17 If you want to save your changes. 18 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. as well as other views of the building model. 16 Using the same method. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. In Revit Building. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view.

click Open. radial. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. Create permanent dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select it. The different types of dimensions that you can add include aligned. that you can add to your drawings. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. 2 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.Creating Dimensions In this exercise. and angular dimensions. By default. 4 Move the cursor over the wall at the very bottom of the view. move the cursor over the top straight wall on the floor plan. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. multi-segmented. and when the centerline of the wall highlights. linear. Open m_Dimensions. you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions. Dimensioning | 417 . click the Training Files icon.rvt located in the Metric folder. select it. 3 When the centerline of the wall highlights. click Dimension.

418 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click to set the location of the dimension. outside of the wall. The dimension displays in the drawing. A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it. Create multi-segmented dimensions 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Click the lock. An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. 8 Dimension the four vertical walls: ■ ■ Select the four vertical wall segments sequentially. Move the cursor below the lowest horizontal wall.5 Move the cursor to the left. In addition. The lock displays as locked. and click to place the dimension. click Dimension. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length. indicating that the dimension can be modified.

11 On the Options Bar. and the are dimensions permanent and constrained to each other. Create a radial dimension 10 On the Design Bar. click 12 Dimension the curved wall: ■ ■ . The slash no longer displays through the equal symbol. Dimensioning | 419 . Select the curved corner wall to display the radial dimension.9 Click the equal symbol to make all dimension segment lengths equal. click Dimension. indicating that the segments are now equal. Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall. and click to place the dimension.

click and select Wall faces for Prefer. Select the inside face of the wall. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 18 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing window. The dimension is snapped to the wall center. select the dimension line of the radial dimension. and place the dimension as shown in the following illustration. 420 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . and zoom in around the curved wall. click Dimension. 17 Dimension the curved wall again: ■ ■ Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights.13 On the View menu. click Modify. 16 On the Options Bar. and press DELETE. the default dimension option. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Design Bar.

20 Dimension the slanted wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the inside face of the slanted wall. The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis. The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. Create an angular dimension 19 On the Options Bar. Create a linear dimension 21 On the Options Bar. Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. and click to place the dimension. and then select the inside face of the vertical wall above it. Move your cursor to the right. and then select the bottom point of the exterior face. as shown in the following illustration. and depends on the cursor tracking behavior.You can now view the radial dimension within the floor plan. Dimensioning | 421 . and click to place the dimension. click . You can override the cursor tracking by toggling with the spacebar. 22 Dimension the vertical wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the top point on the exterior face of the wall. click and verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. Move your cursor to the left to size the dimension arc.

2 On the Options Bar. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. click Dimension. in some cases. and change the origin of dimension witness lines. but do not select anything. Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise. 4 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer bottom wall face.23 On the Design Bar. 5 Hover the cursor near the center of the bottom wall. you learn to add. 422 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. a different wall selection choice highlights. select it. including the wall centerline. delete. 6 When the outside face of the wall highlights. However. 3 Move the cursor over the bottom wall. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. for a multi-segmented dimension. Override dimension defaults 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. 24 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. m_Dimensions. Each time you press TAB. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. because the Prefer wall face option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. and press TAB repeatedly. Controlling Witness Line Location. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. When you place dimensions. click Modify. For example.

click Modify. 11 Select the dimension line shown in the following illustration. and select it. The dimension highlights and control boxes display on each witness line. 9 Place the dimension as shown in the following illustration. Dimensioning | 423 . press TAB until the wall centerline highlights. Edit dimension witness lines 10 On the Design Bar. 8 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall and select the exterior face.7 Move the cursor over the middle horizontal wall.

12 Click once on the control box on the lowest witness line. but do not select it. 13 Click the control box again. 424 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . The witness line moves to the inside wall face. The witness line moves to the wall centerline. 14 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line at the top wall.

15 Right-click the control box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Dimensioning | 425 . 19 Proceed to the next exercise. click in the drawing area away from the floor plan. If you right-click the control box. Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 Select the outside face of the top wall. Modifying Dimension Properties. 16 Right-click the remaining dimension line and click Edit Witness Lines.rvt. The full dimension string is displayed again. IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. The witness line is deleted. a shortcut menu with different options is displayed. you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions. Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. click Modify and select the dimension that you modified in the previous exercise. m_Dimensions. 18 To end the editing command. and click Delete Witness Line.

Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. Under Text. Working with Alignments and Constraints. you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings. 6 On the Design Bar. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. select Right. Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. then Up for Read Convention. when sketching walls. For example. click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort. a lock symbol immediately displays. A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the components is moved or modified. As you create components. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 5 mm for the Text Size. on the File menu. click Modify. change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text.2 On the Options Bar. 5 Click OK twice. 426 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . click . click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. if two or more walls are colinear. 7 If you want to save your changes. The dimensions update as shown in the following illustration. 8 Proceed to the next exercise.

rvt located in the Metric folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click . Align the three short horizontal walls below the two walls that you aligned 4 On the Tools toolbar. When you align two components. click the Training Files icon. 3 Click the lock. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. while the second component moves to complete the alignment. Dimensioning | 427 . Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. The short horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall. click 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ . the first component that you select remains fixed in position. 5 On the Options Bar. The symbol changes to a closed lock. indicating the two walls are not constrained to each other. indicating that the alignment of the two walls is now locked. indicating that the Align command is active. select Multiple Alignment. Align the two uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Tools toolbar. The lock symbol displays as unlocked. Open m_Alignment. Select the exterior face of the short horizontal wall on the left. 6 Select the lower center wall to define it as the fixed wall to which the other walls will align. The cursor displays two arrows at its tip.

click Modify. 428 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it. Do not lock this segment of the alignment. 10 On the Design Bar.7 Select the short wall to the left. 11 Select the middle wall and drag it downward. 9 Select the short horizontal wall on the right. 8 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls. but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the two walls is not constrained (locked).

click . the Prefer wall faces or centerline option on the Options Bar does not apply to the doors. 16 Select the centerline of Door 4 on the upper right side of the model. Move the walls to verify the alignment. click once to undo the move. 13 Click the right wall.12 On the toolbar. select Multiple Alignment. NOTE Because you are not aligning walls. 15 On the Options bar. Align doors in the floor plan 14 On the Tools toolbar. Dimensioning | 429 . and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall.

17 Select the centerline of Door 3 to the left. 18 Click the lock to constrain the movement of the doors. 19 Select Door 2 and lock it to constrain it Doors 3 and 4. 430 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . Door 3 aligns with Door 4. click Modify and select one of the aligned doors. 21 On the Design Bar. 22 Slide the door up or down the wall and notice how the other doors move with it. 20 Select Door 1 and lock it to constrain it to the other doors.

on the Design Bar. 30 Click the lock to unlock it. 31 On the Tools toolbar.28 to align the windows.Align the windows in the floor plan 23 On the Tools toolbar. Dimensioning | 431 . The two windows align. click and repeat steps 27 . 27 Select the far right window in the bottom wall. 29 To view the constraint. The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension. 26 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall. 25 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan. indicating the constraint. click Modify. A lock is displayed. and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall. 24 On the Options Bar. click . clear Multiple Alignment. 28 Select the far right window in the top wall.

m_Alignment. you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall. instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.32 Align the remaining windows. 432 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise. 1 View the lower horizontal wall and notice that it includes five windows. You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each window displays in the dimension string. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions. as shown in the following illustration.rvt.

3 On the Options Bar. indicating the start and end of the dimension string. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. select Openings. 5 Click OK. The two vertical walls highlight. on the File menu.2 On the Design Bar. 6 Select the lower horizontal wall. Click Options. the windows). and then Widths. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. click Dimension. click Save As. 8 If you want to save your changes. Select Entire Walls for Pick. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. Verify Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Dimensioning | 433 . 7 Move your cursor below the lower horizontal wall and click to add the dimension. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click .

sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan. 4 Dimension the three windows near the east entrance by selecting the centerline of each window and placing the dimensions as shown in the following illustration. you dimension the three windows on a floor plan. rotate tags with building components. click . 434 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .rvt located in the Common folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.Annotating In this lesson. tag doors and windows. you how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Building. Open c_Area. expand Floor Plans. Create angular dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. click Open. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). Creating Angular Dimensions In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click the Training Files icon. You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ create angular dimensions. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You learn how to create angular dimensions and how to use an equality constraint to space the windows equally. and double-click Level 1.

The enclosed area that represents the room highlights to indicate that it will be tagged. Tag rooms sequentially 1 On the View menu. Annotating | 435 . click Room Tag. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan.5 Click the equal sign associated with the angular dimension string to equally space the windows. c_Area.rvt. and click to place the room tag. 3 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you sequentially tag the rooms on the floor plan. Sequentially Tagging Rooms. Sequentially Tagging Rooms In this exercise. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

click Room tag. Move the cursor into the room below the one previously tagged. Click to place the new tag. The room tag number displays in blue. 6 Place another room tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Sequential letters are also supported. enter 101. 7 Continue to place room tags. 5 Zoom in on the tag number. 436 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify. ■ The second tag that you place displays the sequential number 102.4 On the Design Bar. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. and press ENTER. click it. indicating that it can be edited. and select the room tag.

2 In the Type Selector. c_Area. 3 On the Options Bar. and select Leader. 4 Place the door with the tag in the room at the bottom left. Tagging Doors and Windows. select a door type that you want to add to the floor plan. and clear Leader. verify that Tag on placement is selected. to add a tag with a leader. Place a door with a door tag and leader 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to place door and window tags. click Door. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. and to tag doors and windows that are not tagged. Annotating | 437 . You learn how to add a door to the floor plan that includes a tag. Add a door and tag 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 7 Place the door as shown in the following illustration. click Door. as shown in the following illustration. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Tag on Placement to add a tag when you place the door in the floor plan.8 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. Notice that the door is placed without a tag. 10 Place the door below Door 6. 12 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. All of the windows that were not tagged are now tagged. clear Create.Place a door without a tag 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 16 Under Leader. Tag a door after placing it 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Tag on placement. select Window Tags. 9 On the Options Bar. click Tag All Not Tagged. 15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. and then click OK. The door is tagged with a tag and leader. select Create. click Tag All Not Tagged. under Category. 438 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 13 Under Leader. verify that Door Tags is selected for Category. click Door. Tag the windows in the floor plan 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

17 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As. Annotating | 439 . on the File menu. or close the exercise file without saving your changes.

440 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

you learn how to change the visibility of detail components.Viewing 15 In this tutorial. More specifically. you learn to create and customize views of building information models. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. 441 . how to control fill pattern colors. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotation within views.

442 | Chapter 15 Viewing . 2 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click . sections. locate the Project Browser. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotation within them. click Open. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. and three-dimensional (3D) views. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. expand Elevations. and double-click East. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. Open m_Viewing_Exercise.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotation within building model views. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you learn how to access different views of the building model. You create elevations. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. on the Standard toolbar. including elevation and three-dimensional views.rvt located in the Metric folder. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model.

click . 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog box. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. click Visibility/Graphics. The default name of the view is {3D}. click Model Graphics Style. 6 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. scroll down and clear Window Tags. 8 Click OK. click the Annotation Categories tab.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. Create a 3D view of the building model 9 On the View toolbar. the east elevation. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. This change is applied only in this elevation view. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. This change is applied only to the active view. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. 7 Under Visibility. and click Hidden Line. Viewing a Building Model | 443 .

Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. double-click My 3D View. 444 | Chapter 15 Viewing . expand Views (all). NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. The view follows the movement of the cursor. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button while moving the mouse. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click to reorient the view. click X to close the view. 18 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. and click OK. 16 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. right-click {3D}. Save the current 3D view 15 In the Project Browser. 14 View the Dynamic View dialog box in the lower left corner of the screen. and expand 3D Views. You can pan. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera. and click Rename. 12 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. zoom. . 11 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. 13 Press and hold CTRL. . under 3D Views. 19 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Rename View dialog box. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. enter My 3D View.10 On the View toolbar. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog box.

expand Views (all). Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Cameras define the eye point. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view.Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. click Camera. right-click in the Design Bar. Viewing a Building Model | 445 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as shown in the following illustration. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. and click View. eye height. m_Viewing_Exercise. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. expand Floor Plans. After you specify the second point (the view target).rvt. outside of the dimension lines. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Level 1. and distance from the target.

You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog box to move the camera position and change the view. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. click Dynamically Modify View. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog box. Move the cursor up. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog box. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. 5 On the View menu. Press and hold the left mouse button. down. and sideways to see how the view changes. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. Press and hold the left mouse button. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.4 Select the blue grips that display on the crop region of the view and move them to resize the view so the view includes the entire building model. 446 | Chapter 15 Viewing .

Change the camera position. and target 12 On the Window menu. Press and hold the left mouse button. Four views of the model display in the drawing area. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. height. click Tile. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Viewing a Building Model | 447 .10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. 13 On the View menu.

16 Right-click. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. select the camera target point (the magenta grip).14 In the Project Browser. click 3D View 1. and move it to another location. under Floor Plans. and click Show Camera. under 3D Views. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. 448 | Chapter 15 Viewing . 17 In My 3D View. 15 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1.

■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. right-click. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. Viewing a Building Model | 449 .3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. under Camera. click to create a new 3D view. Click OK. In the Element Properties dialog box. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. and click Properties. click Model Graphics Style. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. 20 On the View Control Bar. and click Shading. 21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration.

22 On the View menu. A rotation tool is also displayed. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. under Extents. click View Properties. 450 | Chapter 15 Viewing . 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. select Section Box. A section box is displayed around the model. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. 24 Click the section box. as shown in the following illustration.

rvt. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. Creating a Section View In this exercise. and maximize this view.26 Click and hold the rotation tool and rotate the section box around the model. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Viewing a Building Model | 451 . m_Viewing_Exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Section View.

7 In the Go To View dialog box. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. click Modify. and double-click Section 1. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. right-click. and click Find Referring Views. View the section 5 To view the section. or in the Project Browser. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. and click Open View.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. 8 Select the section line. double-click the section head. 4 On the Design Bar. click Section. select Floor Plan: Level 1. 6 Select the section view. 3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. expand Sections (Callout 1). 452 | Chapter 15 Viewing .

15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view.9 On the Design Bar. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. Notice the change in section depth. double-click Level 1. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. Notice the change in the view direction.rvt. m_Viewing_Exercise. click Elevation. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. double-click Level 1. Creating Elevation Views. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 14 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select the section line. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. Viewing a Building Model | 453 .

place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. 10 In the Project Browser. 454 | Chapter 15 Viewing . 7 In the Project Browser. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. double-click Level 1. and click. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. Elevation 1 . Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. 5 On the Design Bar. Do not select the arrow. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. move the cursor around the building model.b. Elevation 1 .3 Without clicking in the drawing area. under Elevations. click Modify. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. double-click the elevation symbol arrow.a by default. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. 4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. under Floor Plans. The elevation is named Elevation 1 .b.a. double-click Elevation 1 . indicating the possible elevation views that you can create.

in this case. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and other families. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. a shade of gray. and the insulation color to pink. floors. such as Brick on CMU. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 455 . In addition. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. such as the one below.11 If you want to save your changes. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. roofs. For example. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. in a compound wall. click Save As. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. on the File menu. This includes walls. and applies to phasing override materials as well. where each layer is assigned a different material. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. and save the exercise file with a unique name. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model.

Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. and double-click Wall/Floor Join . Open c_Showroom. The brick cut pattern is displayed as red. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser under Views. expand Views (all). click Open. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog box. Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Settings menu. select Masonry .Filled). and double-click 3D.Brick for Name. 5 In the Color dialog box. select red. expand 3D Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The surface pattern of the brick is black. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. 456 | Chapter 15 Viewing . and click OK twice. 3 In the Materials dialog box. click Color.Level 3. expand Sections (Section Head . 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls.rvt located in the Common folder. click Materials. 4 Under Cut Pattern.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

expand Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select white. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. select Masonry .Brick for Name. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. c_Showroom. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. 11 In the Color dialog box. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. and double-click Level 1. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type.Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. expand Views (all). Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. 10 Under Surface Pattern. click Color. The floor plan in the view is displayed in the Coarse level of detail as indicated by the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. and click OK twice. 9 In the Materials dialog box. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 457 . click Materials.

click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field. click Edit/New. under Graphics. 10 On the View Control Bar. and click OK three times. and click . 5 In the Color dialog box. 12 If you want to save your changes. and click Properties. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 2 Select the south arced wall. 8 On the Design Bar. select Solid fill. under Floor Plans. 11 Zoom in on the arced wall. under Graphics. click Detail Level. right-click. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. View the arced wall in fine detail 9 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. 458 | Chapter 15 Viewing . The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. and click Fine. click the button in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Modify. select a shade of gray. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. including the current view. 7 In the Fill Patterns dialog box under Name. on the File menu. the Coarse Scale Fill Color parameter (under Graphics) is set to black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. 13 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. By default. click Save As.

you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. refer to the online Help for more information. although they may have coincident edges. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. and you cannot control their visibility. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Building. Creating a View Plan Region | 459 . line color. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Building files.Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. or pattern. line type. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. If you create more than one plan region in a file. the plan regions cannot overlap each other.

so you can view the height of the walls and windows. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. In the following illustration.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. right-click in the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. the south elevation is also displayed.rvt located in the Metric folder. 460 | Chapter 15 Viewing . expand Views (all). Open m_Plan_Region. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Plan Region. click Open. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and click View.

click . and the view depth plane. By selecting Parent View’s Level. Press ESC to end the command. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Creating a View Plan Region | 461 . 5 Select the red dashed line. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. view range. click Edit for View Range. 9 Click Apply. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. as it is displayed with hidden lines in this view. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut plane. click Lines. the top and bottom clip planes. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. On the Options Bar. click Modify. As the cursor moves across it. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. top and bottom clip planes. under Extents. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. 10 On the Design Bar. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. 7 In the View Range dialog box. 3 In the Level 1 view. You use the view range property to control cut plane. and enter 2800 for the Cut plane Offset. 4 Move the cursor across the area where you sketched the plan region. and then click OK twice. the plan region is displayed as a red dashed rectangle. that is similar to the view range for plan views. 8 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. click Finish Sketch. and click Properties. enter 4000 for the Top Offset.Plan regions have a single property. The plan region is no longer visible. right-click.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 11 If you want to save your changes. 462 | Chapter 15 Viewing . click Save As. on the File menu.The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region.

and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Autodesk Revit Building to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. billboards. to place and render decals to create signs. and posters. 463 .Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 16 In this tutorial. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Building that is used to produce rendered views.

change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. When you complete these changes. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. you select a scene that defines the model environment. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. the floor. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. 464 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and create the perspective view that you want to render. In this exercise. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. After you create the perspective view.

5 In the Type Properties dialog box. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. click Open. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. and click Edit/New. Open m_Cohouse.Cavity Wall . 3 On the Options Bar. click the Training Files icon. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . and click the tab in the context menu. Rendering an Exterior View | 465 . under Construction. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Wall. verify that Co-house . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. click .Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit for Structure.Brick.rvt located in the Metric folder.

17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click Modify. 24 In the Material Library. click Edit/New.Brick. under _accurender. under Name. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. under Construction. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. select the curtain wall mullion again. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. 8 In the Materials dialog box. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. 21 In the Materials dialog box. 19 Click OK four times. for Layer 2. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor.200mm. under Name.Plain. and click Aluminum. under _accurender.Asphalt. select Polished. TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. click Duplicate. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog box. select Site . Polished and click OK. click Edit for Structure. . select Carib. 466 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. 9 Under AccuRender. click Materials. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. 25 Under Name. 27 On the Design Bar. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. 22 In the New Material dialog box.Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. 12 Click OK twice. click Materials.Running. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. and click . Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. 26 Click OK twice. expand Metals. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. 11 Under Name. 14 On the Options Bar. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 23 Under AccuRender. select Masonry . expand Masonry and click Brick. under Name. 18 In the Materials dialog box. enter Aluminum.

and then click 32 In the Materials dialog box. under Materials and Finishes. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. producing a photorealistic effect. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). 35 Move the cursor over the building model. select Exterior under Type. floor. select Aluminum. click . . click in the Material field. click Edit/New. click No. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. verify that New is selected. The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls.29 On the Options Bar. Rendering an Exterior View | 467 . 36 In the Scene Selection dialog box. Polished. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. floor. 33 Click OK three times. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. click Region Raytrace. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. under Name. and click OK.

m_Cohouse. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. you place two different types of trees on the building site. expand Floor Plans. Adding Trees to the Site. when you render an exterior view of the model. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. expand Views (all). and double-click 1st Flr. 39 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. 468 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .38 On the Design Bar. In a later exercise. Cnst. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe.

4 In the Type Selector. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. Rendering an Exterior View | 469 . Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. click Site Component. and click to place a tree. and click Site.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. select M_Tree . TIP If the Site tab is not displayed.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple.9 Meters.

under Identity Data. 12 In the Plant Library. m_Cohouse. and click OK twice. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. to . 16 Move the cursor to the building site.rvt. click in the Value field for Plant Name. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter Black Oak. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. 7 In the Type Selector. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. under accurender. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. 13 Under Name. expand Trees and Shrubs. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. select Black Oak for Type Comments. as shown in the following illustration. and then click display the Plant Library. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. and click OK. and click Site Component. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. select Oak. 470 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and place two black oak trees. Creating a Perspective View. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. 15 Under Other. under Other. click Edit/New. 10 In the Name dialog box. Black. select any of the deciduous trees. click Modify. and click Deciduous.Create a new type of tree.

click Camera. 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. on the View tab of the Design Bar. Cnst. Rendering an Exterior View | 471 . view open. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. The new perspective view is displayed. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera.

472 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. expand 3D Views. Cnst. and click Show Camera. double-click 1st Flr. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). view. 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Cnst.

Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View. right-click 3D View 1. m_Cohouse.7 In the Project Browser. enter Exterior. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. and environment settings that you use to render the view. double-click Exterior. date. under 3D Views.rvt. you select a scene and specify time. You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. Rendering an Exterior View | 473 . 8 In the Rename View dialog box. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and click Rename. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. place. lighting. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day.Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click Settings. 6 Select By Date. 474 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). Time. click the Solar Angles tab. 7 Under Date. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. and click Sun. under Scene Settings. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. 8 Under Time.

00 (many clouds. 19 In the Material Library. select Grass. Dark. Rye. click No. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. click . click Image Size. MA. 18 Click Material. 16 In the Environment dialog box. The Ground Plane tab displays. click Environment. 13 Enter . 20 In the Name list.9 Click the Place tab. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 26 On the Design Bar. under Scene Settings.20 for Cloudiness. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. USA. 27 On the Options Bar.) 14 Click OK. select Autumn for Plant Season. under _accurender. and enter bo. select Good for Quality. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. click Site. 12 Click the Settings Tab. and click OK. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. click Raytrace. select Ground Plane. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. and select Boston. 10 Click in the Cities list. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. under Scene Settings. and click OK. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. 21 Click OK twice. under Background Color. Rendering an Exterior View | 475 . 17 Under Advanced. 11 Scroll down.

click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. define the view and render scene settings. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. Adding RPC People In this exercise. click Save As. Rendering an Interior View. 476 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. on the File menu. 32 If you want to save this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name.Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. To create the rendered scene. expand Renderings. and finally. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. 30 On the Design Bar. click Capture Rendering.

click Component. Cnst. 4 In the Type Selector. and double-click 2nd Flr. 7 Repeat steps 4 . 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. m_Cohouse. Rendering an Interior View | 477 .rvt.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown.6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). select Rotate after placement. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). expand Floor Plans.

8 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera.rvt. 478 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse. Creating the Interior Perspective View. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. click Camera.

Rendering an Interior View | 479 . 4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view.The interior perspective is displayed. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Cnst. double-click 2nd Flr.

Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. select Section Box. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. click View Properties. click to display the 3D view of the building model. click the dimensions for Size. 14 On the Design Bar. and select the section box. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 11 On the View menu. enter Interior. and click OK. right-click 3D View 1. enter 178 mm for Height. enter 229 mm for Width. under Extents. and click OK. under Size. 9 In the Rename View dialog box. 12 On the View menu. click Modify. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. and click OK.Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. 480 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Rename. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. Grips are displayed on the section box. A section box is displayed around the building model.

m_Cohouse. By limiting the geometry. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. Creating a New Render Scene. under 3D Views. date.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you create a render scene to specify the time. you reduce the rendering time. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view.15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. place. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. and environment settings used to render the view. Rendering an Interior View | 481 .

you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. and click OK. 14 Click Save. 18 Under Advanced. 21 In the Name list. under Background Color. and click Save. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View. click Site. and click OK. 4 Under Type. Dark. 22 Click OK twice. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. Time. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. and enter Interior Scene for Name. select New. under 3D Views. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. and enter bo. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click OK. select Summer for Plant Season. select Grass. USA. select Ground Plane. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. 11 Click in the Cities list. and click Sun. on the Main tab. 9 Under Time. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 8 Under Date. such as windows and doors. double-click {3D}. under Scene Settings. 19 Click Material. 20 In the Material Library. click Environment. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 13 Click the Settings tab. m_Cohouse. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. MA.Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 24 Under Scene Settings. click the Solar Angles tab. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. click Settings. You can select families with transparent materials. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. under Use View’s Section Box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 482 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select {3D}. under Scene Settings. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. 17 In the Environment dialog box. as daylight sources. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. under accurender. select Interior. 10 Click the Place tab. 7 Select By Date. and select Boston.rvt. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. Rye. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. 12 Scroll down. The Ground Plane tab displays.

which can take several minutes. 5 On the Design Bar. double-click Interior. click OK. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. click Radiate. 8 On the Options Bar. When radiate completes. . 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog box. Curtain Wall 1). Rendering an Interior View | 483 . Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. click Raytrace. The radiosity process.2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. click Daylights. begins. 7 On the Design Bar. the following rendered view is displayed. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution.

Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. on the File menu. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. or section view. but you can also define it in a 3D. and save the exercise file with a unique name. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. click Save As. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. you must select or define a scene. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. 10 Close the exercise file. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Building software.9 If you want to save your changes. elevation. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. The walkthrough path is a spline. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. 484 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building model in Autodesk Revit Building. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. In a plan view. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view.

and double-click 1st Floor. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. of the walkthrough. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. or the first key frame. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. right-click in the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. and click the tab in the context menu. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. proceeds through the dining room. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 485 .You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. and ends in the far corner of the living room. If you prefer to use Metric values. and click to specify the start point. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all).rvt located in the Common folder. expand Floor Plans. Open c_Townhouse. click Walkthrough. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. click Settings ➤ Project Units. and change unit formats as desired.

11 Under Change. 12 On the View menu. and click OK. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). verify Field of view is selected. and double-click Walkthrough 1. 486 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 9 On the Options Bar. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. If it is not. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. click . surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. expand Walkthroughs. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. select the crop boundary.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. on the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). and select the crop boundary.

The walkthrough plays. proceed to the next exercise. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 487 . The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. 16 On the Options Bar. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. enter 1 for Frame. 14 Click . and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). c_Townhouse.13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 17 Click . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog box.rvt. press ESC. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. click Edit Walkthrough.

You can move any camera target or key frame position. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. under Extents. clear Far Clip Active. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box.Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. select Path for Controls. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). 488 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. 2 On the Options Bar. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. click Edit Walkthrough. 6 On the Options Bar. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. click . and click OK. double-click 1st Floor.

Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 489 . specify 10 for Frames per Second. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. under Walkthroughs. shaded. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. 9 On the Options Bar. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users.rvt. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. and click Save. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. select <Shading> for Display mode. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. 8 If you want to save this exercise. 3 Under Output Length. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. Recording the Walkthrough. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or with AccuRender raytracing. shaded with edges. to play the walkthrough. click Edit Walkthrough. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. hidden line. 5 In the Video Compression dialog box. reducing the size of the image. 4 Under Format. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. on the File menu. without opening Autodesk Revit Building. When you export the walkthrough. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. click Save As. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 On the File menu. double-click Walkthrough 1.7 Click the third key frame position. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. The AVI is recorded. c_Townhouse. If you are unsure of what option to use. 2 In the Save As dialog box. click Export ➤ AVI. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. and click OK. specifying the number of frames. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

490 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

length. and Section Boxes. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Building can be found under Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs. A majority of tools in Autodesk Revit Building are intended to describe number. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. Advanced Model Graphics.Presentation Views 17 In this tutorial. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. In this series of exercises. and details. an outside reviewer. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. a consultant. 491 ." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. Co-house. Whether the audience is the general contractor. you explore the stylistic approach. Using the pre-built building model. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. elevations. type. For the realistic approach. To express texture beyond material specifics. In this tutorial. the Linework Tool. or the client. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. sections." In Revit Building. there are several options for expressing the architecture.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Cnst. you create a copy of the plan. expand Views (all). change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. you create a presentation floor plan. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. Open m_Cohouse.rvt located in the Metric folder. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. right-click 2nd Flr. and click Duplicate. expand Floor Plans. 492 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click the Training Files icon. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise.

and click Rename. Using Advanced Model Graphics. and clear DOWN Text. and so on in this view. click the Annotation Categories tab. dimensions. this represents the view getting smaller. UP Text. navigate to the folder of your choice. 7 Under Visibility. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Save As directory. Down Arrow. click the Scale control and select 1: 100. and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all tags. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation.rvt. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. click Visibility/Graphics.2 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and Up Arrow. expand the Stairs category. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the frame. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. Cnst. Notice that no annotations display in this view. and click Save. elevations. 8 Click OK. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 493 . 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. click Save As. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. 10 On the File menu. sections.

7 Select Boston. The higher the number. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. click for Place. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. the darker the shadows. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. ■ ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. click the Place tab. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. USA for City. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view.Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise.rvt. modify. you can create. under Sunlight Settings. 5 Under Sunlight Settings. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Under Shadows Properties. MA. specify 35 for Shadow. click . 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog box. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. At that place. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. 494 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Time and Place. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. select Cast Shadows. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click it in the Project Browser. select By Date. Under Intensity. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. 2 On the View Control Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Within a Project.

click This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. click Save. be aware that if you enter a different city. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 495 . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet. Cnst. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 10 Click OK. however. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. under Sunlight Settings.NOTE For this step. click OK. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. click OK. select Ground Plane and select 1st Flr. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. for At Level. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. under Sun and Shadows Settings. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. . clear Ground Plane. you can enter any city you wish. and click OK. 16 On the File menu. 9 Under Sunlight Settings. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. specify 10/27/2004 for Date and 1:00:00 PM for Time. Turn off the ground plane shadows 12 On the View Control Bar.

select Arch Portrait. 6 On the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. click Sheet. 4 In the Views dialog box. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. Notice the blank sheet is portrait oriented. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. and click to place it. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. and click View. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. and click OK. TIP If the View tab is not available. click Add View.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. click Modify. 496 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and notice a view title displays.

click Duplicate. select No for Show Title. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. For this analytique. 9 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. click . and click OK. To accomplish this. 12 In the Name dialog box. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. click OK. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 497 . you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. enter Presentation. click Edit/New. under Graphics. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box.

click Filled Region. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. 498 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. and select Chain. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. and draw a rectangle around the view as shown.Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. 20 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. fill properties. and click Activate View. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. 17 In the Type Selector. If necessary. 19 On the Options Bar. click . select Invisible Lines. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. click . and the boundary of the region. 18 On the Options Bar. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details.

22 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box. Name the sheet 31 Right-click the edge of the sheet. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 499 . and click OK. and click OK. select Solid Fill. you create an elevation and add it to the Presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. 30 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. When you are finished drawing the chain. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. click the Fill Pattern value and the arrow that displays within it. 21 On the Design Bar. under Graphics. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. click Finish Sketch. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. under Name. under Identity Data. 29 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Name dialog box. and click Deactivate View. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique. scroll down. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. click Edit/New. 27 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. click Save. and click OK. 33 On the File menu. enter Solid Black. 23 In the Type Properties dialog box. select the entire chain (use TAB ) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector.TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. click Region Properties. and click OK. 28 In the Element Properties dialog box. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. 34 Proceed with the next lesson. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Properties.

expand Elevations.rvt.Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique In this exercise. under Views (all). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click Duplicate. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 500 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. right-click South. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view.

3 In the Rename View dialog box. Apply advanced model graphics 9 On the View Control Bar. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. under Visibility. click OK. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. and click OK. scroll up. under Elevations. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. 15 In the Name dialog box. and clear Surface Pattern. 13 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. on the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. enter Presentation South Elevation. click .2 In the Project Browser. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 501 . scroll down. click Duplicate. specify 2:30:00 PM for Time. 6 Under Visibility. By changing the angle of the sun. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. under Sunlight Settings. 8 Click OK. and clear Elevation Swing. expand the Doors category. specify 35 for Shadow. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. select Cast Shadows. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. 12 Under Intensity. and click OK. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. right-click Copy of South. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. and click Rename. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. expand the Walls category. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 7 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 11 Under Shadow Properties. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation.18 On the File menu. 502 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Add view to sheet 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 19 Proceed with the next exercise. expand Sheets. and double-click A105 . TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet. click Save. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet.Presentation. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. 3 In the Views dialog box. and click Add View to Sheet. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Add View.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

Notice the view title no longer displays. select Viewport: Presentation. 5 In the Type Selector.Notice the viewport displays a view title. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 503 .

8 On the File menu. click Modify. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. 504 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Adding Section Views to the Analytique.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. click Save. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. 7 On the Design Bar. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique.

4 Add the section shown below. 3 On the Options Bar.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Cnst. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). under Floor Plans.rvt. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 505 . TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. and use the flip arrows if necessary. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Section. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 1st Flr. select 1: 100 for Scale.

To accomplish this. expand Sections (Callout 1). Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser.Section 2 is added to the building model. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. and double-click Section 2. click Callout. 506 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 7 On the Options Bar. select 1: 100 for Scale. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. To fit correctly in the analytique. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

expand the Walls category. click Modify. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. enter Presentation Section 2. scroll down. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click OK. 16 Under Visibility. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). and click Rename. 10 In the Project Browser. click the Model Categories tab. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 507 . click Visibility/Graphics. under Sections (Callout 1). and clear Surface Pattern. expand the Doors category. scroll up. 15 Under Visibility.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). 12 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Rename View dialog box. and clear Elevation Swing. right-click Callout of Section 2. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu.

and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box.17 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 18 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. 21 On the Options Bar. under Extents. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View. clear Crop Region Visible. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 508 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click . click Save. 19 Click OK. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. Hide the crop boundary 20 Select the crop boundary. 23 On the File menu. Notice the crop region no longer displays.

select Relative to View. Under Shadows Properties. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. In the steps that follow. click Duplicate. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. select Directly. In addition. specify 35 for Shadow. Click Apply. under Sections (Callout 1). open the Project Browser and. TIP You may need to move the dialog box off to the side in order to see the view. select Cast Shadows. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast.rvt. and click OK. 5 In the Name dialog box. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. and click OK. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. 2 On the View Control Bar. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. Under Intensity. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 509 . double-click Presentation Section 2. under Sunlight Settings. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. click . you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. click Apply.

Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. Silhouette Edges. 11 Proceed with the next exercise. 10 On the File menu.TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. click Save. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. 510 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . was added to this dataset for training purposes. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. Apply silhouette edges 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. NOTE The line style. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. select Override Silhouettes. under Silhouette Edges. and click OK.

and click to place the selected view.rvt. click Add View. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 511 . Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. 6 On the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. 3 In the Views dialog box. The view title no longer displays. double-click A105 . 5 In the Type Selector. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sheets (all).Presentation.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select Viewport: Presentation. select Section: Presentation Section 2.

To rotate an object.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. In the steps that follow. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. 512 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. Using a clock as a reference. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. and press ENTER. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. 9 On the Edit toolbar. under Sections (Callout 1). click . you click to specify the start radius. double-click Section 2.

Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). Notice that the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 513 .Presentation. Notice the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. double-click A105 . 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. the callout rotates 180 degrees.

Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. Working with a Presentation View Template. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. 15 On the Design Bar. 16 On the File menu. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. click Save.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. click Modify. 514 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . After applying the view template to a new section view. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. and drag it up and to the left as shown.

2 On the View menu. double-click Presentation Section 2. right-click Section 1.rvt. click Save as View Template. and click Rename.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the New View Template dialog box. click OK. under Sections (Type 1). Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). right-click Copy of Section 1. 4 In the View Templates dialog box. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. Now. and click OK. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 515 . under Sections (Type 1). rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. 7 In the Rename View dialog box. enter Presentation Section 1. enter Presentation. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Apply View Template. you can simply apply the presentation view template. and click OK. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate. 6 In the Project Browser.

19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. under Graphics. select Section: Presentation Section 1. click Add View. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. and click Activate View. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. and elevation swings no longer display. Notice the furniture. 14 In the Type Selector. double-click A105 . select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for View Rotation on Sheet. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. click View Properties. 16 On the View menu. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. and click Add View to Sheet. and click Deactivate View. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). lighting fixtures. 516 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . select Viewport: Presentation. annotations. 15 Right-click the viewport. 12 In the Views dialog box. 18 Right-click the viewport. and click OK.9 In the Select View Template dialog box.Presentation. and click OK. select Presentation.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 517 . you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. click Save. such as a tracery window or column capital. In this exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.20 On the File menu. Working in a Callout Analytique Traditional analytiques typically contain a detail.

click Modify. and click Rename. 4 In the Project Browser. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Rename View dialog box.rvt. right-click Callout of Section 1. click Callout.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. After you add the callout. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 518 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . double-click Section 1. under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Type 1). select the callout. enter Presentation Callout. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. and click OK.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 519 . under Extents.6 In the Project Browser. double-click Presentation Callout. and click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. under Sections (Callout 1). clear Crop Region Visible. 8 Right-click. 7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. and click View Properties.

Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. and click Activate View. select Section: Presentation Callout.Presentation. 12 In the Views dialog box. 520 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. and click OK. 17 On the View menu. click View Properties. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Deactivate View. select Custom for View Scale. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. under Sheets (all). and move it into the position shown below. 15 On the Design Bar. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. 14 In the Type Selector. select Viewport: Presentation. click Add View. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click A105 . and click Add View to Sheet. click Modify.

When finished. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. click Region Properties. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 24 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click Presentation Callout. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. under Sections (Callout 1). click Filled Region. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. activate the viewport. 23 On the Design Bar. and make adjustments as necessary. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog box. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 521 . you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. and click OK. select Solid Black for Type. In the steps that follow.

29 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. under Sheets (all). and sketch the rectangle shown below. and click Activate View. 522 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport.26 On the Project Browser. 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . double-click A105 .Presentation.

31 On the View menu. select Crop Region Visible.30 On the Design Bar. click View Properties. click Finish Sketch. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. under Extents. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 523 . Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 33 Select the crop region. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays.

clear Crop Region Visible. 524 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 38 Proceed with the next lesson. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. and click Deactivate View. 35 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK.34 On the View menu. under Extents. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes. click View Properties. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. 37 On the File menu. click Save.

Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. and click 1: 200.rvt. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaway. click Orient ➤ Southwest. 3 On the View Control Bar. click the Advanced Model Graphics control.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click the Scale control. double-click Isometric. and click Advanced Model Graphics. under 3D Views. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 525 .s and apply shadows to the views. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 2 On the View menu.

right-click Copy of Isometric 1. and click OK. specify 35 for Shadow. Under Shadows Properties. enter Isometric 2. under 3D Views. right-click Isometric. 13 In the Rename View dialog box. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. right-click Isometric 1. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. 14 In the Project Browser. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. under 3D Views. 15 In the Project Browser. Select 1st Flr. click Duplicate. under 3D Views. and click Rename. select Section Box. click . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. under Sunlight Settings. and click OK. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. under Extents. and click OK. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. select Cast Shadows. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. Cnst. click View Properties. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. 526 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and click Rename. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 16 In the Rename View dialog box. Under Intensity. and click OK. Select Ground Plane. under 3D Views.5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. for At Level. enter Isometric 1. 18 On the View menu. and click OK. under Silhouette Edges. and click Duplicate. double-click Isometric 2. Select Relative to View. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Override Silhouettes. 7 In the Name dialog box. 9 Click OK.

You can use this to rotate the section box. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 527 . and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. When you are finished. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar.20 Select the section box. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box.

NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. 24 In the Rename View dialog box.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. and click OK. click Modify on the Design Bar. right-click Isometric 2. When you are finished. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. clear Crop Region Visible. select Crop Region. 26 On the View menu. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. under 3D Views. double-click Isometric 2. under 3D Views. 25 In the Project Browser. 528 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 31 On the View menu. under Extents. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. click View Properties. 22 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 23 In the Project Browser. the stairs and railings may display. under 3D Views. and click Duplicate. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. either adjust the plane location. make a copy of the view. clear Crop Region Visible. and click OK. double-click Isometric 3. under Extents. Notice the section box no longer displays. 29 Select the section box. enter Isometric 3. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. select Crop Region. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. click View Properties. and click Rename. In such a case. under 3D Views.

34 In the Project Browser. Notice the filled region partially covers the view. select Viewport: Presentation. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. select Viewport: Presentation.Presentation. select Viewport: Presentation. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 529 . under 3D Views. under 3D Views. under Sheets (all). drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. double-click A105 .Next. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. in the Type Selector. in the Type Selector. under 3D Views. 35 In the Project Browser. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. in the Type Selector. 36 In the Project Browser. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow.

The image below shows the lines redrawn.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 44 Using the drawing tools. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. and on the Options Bar. 43 On the Design Bar. under Graphics. This will make it easier to draw lines. click Lines. 42 Click OK twice. 39 On the Design Bar. 41 In the Type Properties dialog box. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. 38 Select the poche filled region. and click Activate View. click Edit. 530 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . select Transparent for Background. click Region Properties. and then click Edit/New. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. select Concrete for Type. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box.

50 Proceed with the next exercise. 49 On the File menu. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. and click Deactivate View. a cutaway perspective view. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views. click Finish Sketch. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. 47 On the Design Bar. select Solid Black for Type. you add it to the presentation sheet. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. click Region Properties. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 531 . and click OK. 46 In the Element Properties dialog box.45 On the Design Bar. click Save. you create the final view for the analytique.

rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. then you specify the eye direction and range. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Cnst. 532 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . double-click 1st Flr. under Floor Plans. The view opens immediately. click Camera.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

Under Intensity. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box.4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. specify 35 for Shadow. Under Shadows Properties. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. and click OK. 5 On the View Control Bar. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 533 . select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. under Silhouette Edges. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. select Override Silhouettes. click . 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. select Cast Shadows. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK.

13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box.Add a section box 10 On the View menu. and click OK. 534 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Notice the controls that display on each plane. select Section Box. click View Properties. 12 Select the section box. A section box now cuts through the building model. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. under Extents.

After placing it. 15 On the Options Bar.Presentation. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. clear Crop Region Visible. under Sheets (all). click Size. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 535 . 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. drag 3D View 2 onto the presentation sheet. and click OK. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. under Change. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog box.14 Select the crop boundary. and click OK. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport: Presentation. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. under Extents. under 3D Views. 21 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . 18 On the View menu. 17 Under Size. enter 165 mm for Width. select Scale (locked proportions). you must specify the actual size of the image. click View Properties.

and click OK. 536 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. select Title. 9 In the Name dialog box. under Text. under Text. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. and click OK. specify a text size of 6 mm.rvt. select the same font as the title. click . 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. specify a text size of 40 mm. click Edit/New. and click OK. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter Description. 5 In the Name dialog box. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Duplicate. Annotating the Analytique. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. select a font. and click OK. enter Title. click Text. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. click Save. click Duplicate.22 On the File menu. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise.

15 In the Type Selector. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 537 . select Description. click Save. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 18 On the File menu.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text.

538 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

material set. In this tutorial. shape. each with a different size. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. 539 . thus the term family. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. they are still related and come from a single source.About Families and the Family Editor 18 All elements in Autodesk Revit Building are “family based. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. Even though various types within a family can look completely different.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Building to help you manage your data and make changes easily. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date.

This makes file management much easier. There are. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. exterior. there is another type of family that allows you create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Building recognize it as a particular component type. foundation. floors. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. exceptions to this rule. and partition wall styles. Walls.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Building is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. floors. and when and how to use it. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. however. and roofs. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. while many more are stored in component libraries. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. because there is only one file to track. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. for example. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. In this lesson. Revit Building has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Building and comprise principle building components such as walls. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project. but you cannot create new system families. Using the Family Editor. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another.rfa extension. and roofs are examples of these types of families. You also learn about the Family Editor. such as a dome roof. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. For example. generic. 540 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . The basic walls system family. In addition. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Building and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. has wall types that define interior.

You can load them into projects. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. You create in-place families only within the current project.Family templates are either host-based or standalone. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. and furniture. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. Using Families and the Family Editor | 541 . and also a standalone furniture family component. Standalone families include columns. The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall.rfa extension. transfer them from one project to another. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. trees. Host-based families have components that require hosts. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. for example. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. custom wall treatments.

After the family has been loaded in the project. you learn about the Family Editor. 3 Next. and click Open. open it in the Family Editor. or 3D. such as plan. you learned about the different types of Revit Building families and when to use them. In this section. If you find a close match. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. if you change the original family. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. navigate to a family file. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. it is saved with the project. if you have exhausted your external resources. elevation. 5 Finally. However. To start a new family. and when to use it. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. and click Open. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. you can double-click any file with an . it opens within the Family Editor. consider checking the web library and other web resources. presume it is a bay window that you require. modify it as needed.rfa extension and it will open Revit Building in the Family Editor. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. and then load it into the project. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. Load Family command on the File menu. you learn when to use the Family Editor. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. or you can load it using the Load From Library. 2 On the File menu. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. it should be available within the Type Selector. how to access it. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. such as newsgroups. 542 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . With Revit Building open. In this exercise. In the final exercise. In this case. When the family opens. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. To add a family to your project. you can click File ➤ Open.Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. how to access it. you can drag it into the document window. select the appropriate template. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. Within the Windows® environment.

2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. Using Families and the Family Editor | 543 .General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. 9 Save the newly-defined family. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry.

544 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor .

When you create an in-place family. In each lesson. 545 . you create it within the project file. you learn how to create specific Autodesk Revit Building families. a lighting fixture. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. Using the installed templates. not within the Family Editor. you create an in-place family. and several annotation families. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. In addition. You create a furniture family.Creating Components in the Family Editor 19 In this tutorial. you learn how to create a different type of component.

You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. The door type has a variable height and width. 546 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you draw the plan view components for the new door family. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively.Creating a Door Family In this lesson. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. and thickness. height. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion.

Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. and represent the door opening profile. Level. 7 Enter ZF. click New ➤ Family. and click Open. 6 Maximize the window. 9 In the Type Selector. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Floor Plan: Ref. Creating a Door Family | 547 .rft. Labelled dimensions. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. click Symbolic Lines. click Tile. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box.Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. part of the door properties. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. Notice the four tiled views. select Doors [projection]. click . 2 On the File menu. 4 On the View menu. 10 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Window menu. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. are also displayed. Select Metric Door.

548 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension.Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.

select Width for Label. click Modify. 19 On the Options Bar. Creating a Door Family | 549 . Because labelled dimensions are parameters. 17 On the Options Bar. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. select Thickness for Label. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness.

and select the command from the menu. When drawing an arc from center and end points. click Symbolic Lines. 22 In the Type selector. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. as shown. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. 24 Enter SI. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. click the down arrow button. select Plan Swing [cut]. you first specify the arc center. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. 21 On the Design Bar. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. 23 On the Options Bar.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry. along with the witness line controls. In the image below. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. then you specify each end point. 550 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click .

double-click Left. click Lines. and click . under Specify a new Work Plane. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. and click OK. enter 50 mm for Depth. click Set Work Plane. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name.1 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. click Finish Sketch. double-click Exterior. 3 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. Creating a Door Family | 551 . under Elevations.

552 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Ref. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. under Floor Plans. 12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Options Bar. then click to specify the dimension witness line. click Dimension. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. select Thickness for Label. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. click Modify and select the dimension. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion.10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Level.

19 Under Detail Levels.Dark. and click OK. click Modify. Medium. click Duplicate. click for Texture. It also defines its appearance when rendered. under Name. for Material. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. and click OK. 6 Click OK. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 On the Options Bar. you assign a material to the door leaf. select Front/Back. verify that Coarse. 2 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. click Visibility. Creating a Door Family | 553 . 17 On the Options Bar.16 Select the door leaf extrusion. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. click . The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. 7 In the Materials dialog box. 4 In the Materials dialog box. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. and Fine are selected. click OK. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. and clear Plan/RCP. under View Specific Display. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. under AccuRender. under Materials and Finishes. click 11 In the Materials dialog box.Red/Stained. click Materials. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak.No Gloss. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. click . enter Oak Door for Name. and When cut in Plan/RCP. 3 In the New Material dialog box. select Oak Door. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. select Panel for Subcategory. Assigning Materials to the Door Components. Left/Right. 20 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and click OK.

click 17 In the Materials dialog box. under 3D Views. The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. click OK.15 On the Options Bar. select Oak Door for Name. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 21 On the View Control Bar. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. click the Model Graphics Style control. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. and select Shading with Edges. for Material. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. under Views (all). 554 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. Click Apply. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Defining New Door Types Creating a Door Family | 555 . 27 Click OK. Try to move the dialog box off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. 24 On the Design Bar. By flexing the new component. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Under Other. enter 2500 mm for Height. Enter 1000 mm for Width. click Family Types. Under Other. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project.The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. In the Family Types dialog box. enter 2000 mm for Height. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog box and see how the new door reacts. Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.

select it. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. and click Open. Enter 1220 mm for Width. click Door. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 9 In the Name dialog box. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 2134 mm for Height. Define the second new door type. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 925 mm for Width. Enter 750 mm for Width. click New.rfa. 18 In the Open dialog box. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 556 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. click New. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. Define the third new door type. select Project. Place new door types in the project 19 On the Design Bar. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. click New. under Template file. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar.rfa. click New ➤ Project.rte is the Template file. 3 In the Name dialog box. Click Apply. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 6 In the Name dialog box. 15 In the New Project dialog box.Defining New Door Types In this exercise. 17 On the Options Bar. click Family Types. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. verify that DefaultMetric. 12 On the File menu. click Wall. Under Create new. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. Click Apply. 11 Click OK. Training Door. 8 Under Family Types. click Load. enter 2100 mm for Height. click Save. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. 20 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. Training Door. and click OK. enter 2000 mm for Height. 5 Under Family Types. and click OK. and click OK. under Family Types. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

26 In the Type Selector. 25 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. 27 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. click Door. click the Model Graphics Style control. 23 On the Design Bar. Creating a Door Family | 557 . select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. click . 22 On the View Control Bar. and select Shading with Edges.21 On the View toolbar. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. 24 In the Type Selector.

You create the window frame. Finally. default sill height. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. 30 You can close all files without saving. This completes the lesson. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. 558 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 29 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. and specify values for the window width. height. and mullion offset. and create the window sash as a sweep. Creating a Door Family.28 In the Type Selector. glazing and mullions as extrusions.

click Tile. 2 On the File menu.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. part of the window properties. The reference planes that display are part of the default window template and represent the window opening profile. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. The window opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. and click Open. Labelled dimensions. 5 On the View menu.rft. 7 Enter ZF. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. are also displayed. Select Metric Window. click New ➤ Family 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. 6 Maximize the exterior elevation view. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. 4 On the Window menu. equally spaced vertical mullions. Four views are tiled on your display. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. The window type has a variable height and width. you specify the parameters for the new window family. Creating a Window Family | 559 .

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. and click Apply. Click Apply. Enter 1800 mm for Width. 12 Click OK. is one of the type parameters.8 Two dimension strings display with their labels. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. 560 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. Change the height and width values again. also one of the window properties. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. This process is called “flexing the model. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. then sketching the sweep profile. and click Apply. This is the starting point for the new window. When you add labels to dimensions. enter 1300 mm for Height. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. The label name. Modify the new window type height and width parameters 9 On the Design Bar. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Height and Default Sill Height. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window opening. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Family Types.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry.

13 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. 9 On the View Control Bar. click the Scale control. select Elevation: Right. 12 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. click Lines. and select 1:10. click Ref Plane. and specify an offset of 50 mm. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 7 On the Design Bar. click . click Finish Path. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. 2 On the Design Bar. click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 8 In the Go To View dialog box. 3 On the Design Bar. and click Open View. Snap the cursor to each corner. 10 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall.Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. click Sketch 2D Path. click Sketch Profile. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. Creating a Window Family | 561 . 11 On the Design Bar.

15 On the Options Bar. 16 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. 562 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 19 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. and select the reference plane. Sketch the window frame profile 22 On the Design Bar. select Chain and click . enter Sash for the Name. select Prefer: Wall faces.14 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. and click OK. click Lines. click Modify. click . 17 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. and select the dimension. 18 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. click Modify. 20 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. 24 Below the red dot.

27 Select the left edge of the frame section. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. 26 Select the right edge of the frame section. click Modify. Creating a Window Family | 563 . Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. the exact dimensions are not critical. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. When the lock displays. When the lock displays. 25 On the Design Bar. However. and drag it to the interior face of the wall.NOTE When you sketch the frame profile.

click Modify. 564 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . TIP After adding the dimension. click Dimension. 30 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. select the line you want to move. 29 On the Design Bar. When the lock displays. as shown. and specify the dimension value.28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. click it to lock the line to the reference plane.

Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. this is the top of the window opening. click Finish Sweep. 36 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). Creating a Window Family | 565 . 33 On the Tools toolbar. Next. When the lock displays. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. 34 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot.Modify each dimension if necessary. click the lock to constrain the present value. click the lock to constrain the present value. When the lock displays. expand 3D Views. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. and double-click View 1. zoom out until it displays. 32 Select the 20 mm dimension. 37 In the Project Browser. click . The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. click Finish Profile. 35 On the Design Bar. If necessary. Align the new profile to the window opening edge 31 Select the 40 mm dimension.

566 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. under Elevations. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. double-click Exterior. and enter . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 On the Design Bar. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. click . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry. 5 On the Options Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. and select the option.38 In the Project Browser. Chain of walls or lines. click Lines. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. and select Lock. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name.45 mm for Depth. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. click Set Work Plane.

and lock icons display on each line. You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. ■ Click .The entire sash outline is selected. Enter . and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. Creating a Window Family | 567 .50 mm for Offset. set the following options: ■ ■ Click .

Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 In the Project Browser. 568 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Right. under 3D Views. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry. The window sash extrusion is now complete.9 On the Design Bar. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. click Finish Sketch. under Elevations.

double-click Right. under Elevations. click . and enter 30 mm for Offset. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. 3 On the Options Bar.Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. as shown. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. Creating a Window Family | 569 . Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. click Ref Plane.

570 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .5 On the Design Bar. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. click Dimension.

double-click Exterior. click . under Specify a new Work Plane. enter 12 mm for Depth. 8 Select the reference plane. under Identity Data. and click OK. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. and click to create the glass boundary. and click OK. click Set Work Plane. click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Modify. under Elevations. press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. 17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines. 11 In the Project Browser. click Lines.7 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Work Plane dialog box. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 16 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. and select Lock. 15 On the Design Bar. Creating a Window Family | 571 . select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name.

572 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click View 1. under Elevations. and click OK. click Modify. under 3D Views. 24 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. 23 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. double-click Right. sash.18 On the Design Bar. After the family is loaded into a project. View the window model with frame. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 20 Select the glass extrusion. click . and glass 19 In the Project Browser.

NOTE After flexing the model. Enter 2000 mm for Width. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply.Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. For example. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Creating a Window Family | 573 . You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Click OK. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. enter 1000 mm for Height. click Family Types. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. enter 1500 mm for Height. Move the Family Types dialog box off to the side so you can see the window model. Under Other. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Click Apply. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. 27 In the Family Types dialog box. Under Other. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. 26 In the Family Types dialog box. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters.

574 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Ref Plane. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. click Dimension. the exact location is not critical. double-click Exterior. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. 4 On the Design Bar. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown.Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. After adding the dimension. 2 On the Design Bar. under Elevations.

.. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. 9 On the Options Bar. Do not be concerned with dimension values. select <Add parameter. as shown.5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. Do not be concerned with dimension values. Creating a Window Family | 575 .> for Label. click Modify. as shown.

click Modify. Under Parameter Data. Click OK. enter Mullion Offset for Name. 15 On the Design Bar. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. Select Instance. 11 On the Design Bar. select Family parameter. select Dimensions. click Family Types. 576 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. 12 In the Family Types dialog box. and enter 350 mm as the new value. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. under Dimensions. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. Notice the dimension value becomes editable.10 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 14 Click the dimension value. Under Group parameter under.

select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. under Specify a new Work Plane. However.17 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Lines. and click OK. 21 In the Work Plane dialog box. 22 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. As you did before. click Set Work Plane. click Modify. 23 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. enter 14 mm for Depth. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. select Mullion Offset for Label. After you complete the sketch. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. Creating a Window Family | 577 . Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. and click . Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. move the dimension value as shown. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions.

30 On the Options Bar. 28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. 29 On the Design Bar. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. click Modify. Move the dimension values as shown. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion.26 On the Design Bar. select <Add parameter> for Label. 578 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. click Dimension.

32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint.31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. This is changed in later steps. click Finish Sketch. 33 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. Select Type. Under Parameter Data. select Dimensions. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. select Mullion Width for Label. Under Group parameter under. Creating a Window Family | 579 . Remember. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. select Family parameter. Select the dimension. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. enter Mullion Width for Name.

Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog box. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. evenly spaced. and aligned with the sash edge. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. click Family Types. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. NOTE After flexing the model. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. or undoing the same. 580 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 1500 mm for Height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. Click Apply.Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. In this case. Under Other.

click Lines. Click OK. 46 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 40 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Set Work Plane. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. Under Other. 39 On the Design Bar. 47 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion.37 In the Family Types dialog box. 43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. 45 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. Creating a Window Family | 581 . Enter 2000 mm for Width. 42 On the Options Bar. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. click Dimension. as shown. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. click Dimension. 44 On the Design Bar. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 38 On the Design Bar. enter 1000 mm for Height. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. click . 41 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. under Specify a new Work Plane. and click OK. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height.

582 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Select the dimension. Move the dimension value as shown. 50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges.48 On the Design Bar. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. Remember. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. 49 On the Options Bar. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. select Mullion Width for Label. click Modify. ■ ■ ■ 51 On the Design Bar. select Mullion Width for Label. and on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch.

double-click View 1. If necessary. and select the vertical mullions. Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. 56 On the Design Bar.The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. under 3D Views. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Join the mullion geometry 52 On the Tools menu. Flex the window model 55 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. you can still see the window. 53 Select the horizontal mullions. click Join Geometry. click Family Types. Creating a Window Family | 583 . spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. 54 In the Project Browser.

59 Proceed to the next exercise. Click Apply.57 In the Family Types dialog box. 58 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Enter 2000 mm for Width. sash. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. Click OK. Under Other. Under Other. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. 584 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 1000 mm for Height. enter 1500 mm for Height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you assign materials to the frame. Enter 1500 mm for Width. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Assigning Materials to the Window Components.

sash. click OK. double-click Exterior. click Duplicate. 2 In the Materials dialog box. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. 6 In the Materials dialog box. under AccuRender. 8 On the View Control Bar. click for Texture. select Stained. 3 In the New Material dialog box. 9 Select the window frame sweep. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. 4 In the Materials dialog box. Dark. and click OK. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. under Elevations. the sash. and select Shading with Edges. click Materials. Yellow/. enter Pine Frame for Name. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. and click OK. and the mullions. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. Creating a Window Family | 585 . navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click the Model Graphics Style control. No Gloss.

under Identity Data. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. 21 On the Options Bar. under Graphics. double-click Right. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. click for Material. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). under View Specific Display. 24 In the Project Browser. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. verify that Coarse. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click Visibility.10 On the Options Bar. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. double-click View 1. select Pine Frame for Name. and click OK. click . select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). click Modify. select Edit for Visibility. 20 Select the glass extrusion. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. under 3D Views. 13 In the Materials dialog box. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. verify that Coarse. and Fine are selected. and click OK. 18 On the Design Bar. 23 Under Detail Levels. clear the other view options. Medium. 16 Under Detail Levels. 586 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Medium. under View Specific Display. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click OK. and click OK. and Fine are selected.

sash. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. Defining New Window Types In this exercise. Creating a Window Family | 587 . you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. Defining New Window Types. The window frame. mullions. and glass display their assigned materials. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project.25 Zoom in on a window corner. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window.

The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog box. 3 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. click Family Types. 2 On the Design Bar. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. enter 2000 mm for Height. 588 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

under Family Types. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. 9 Under Family Types. click New.The window height is doubled. click New. Creating a Window Family | 589 . 10 In the Name dialog box. Enter 1250 mm for Height. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. enter 1000 mm for Height. 7 In the Name dialog box. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. and click OK. and click OK. Click Apply. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog box. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions.

select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. 24 On the Options Bar.11 In the Family Types dialog box. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Type Selector. click to start a new project based on your default template. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. Click Apply. click Save. select it. click Window. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. 13 In the Name dialog box. 15 On the File menu. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. 29 In the Type Selector. 25 In the Type Selector. and click Open. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. click Load. Training Window. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. 590 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rfa. 20 In the Open dialog box. 23 On the Design Bar. Notice the detail that displays. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. click Modify. click Wall. Click OK. click Thin Lines. click Window. 33 Zoom in on the center window. Click Apply. 19 On the Options Bar. Enter 1500 mm for Height. 32 On the View menu. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. navigate to the location of your Training Window. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. click New. clear Tag on Placement. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 31 On the Design Bar. Enter 1300 mm for Height.rfa file.

You begin by creating the desktop. and select Shading with Edges. and drawers as extrusions. and specify values for the furniture length and depth.34 On the View toolbar. Finally. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. drawer base. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. click the Model Graphics Style control. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. click . Creating a Furniture Family | 591 . You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. 35 On the View Control Bar. rolltop.

select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. 592 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. they represent the furniture centerline axes. 8 Draw two vertical reference planes. click Ref Plane. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. 9 On the Design Bar. and click Open. their exact location is not critical. Floor Plan: Ref. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.rft. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. click Dimension. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. 5 On the View menu.Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. 2 On the File menu. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. Level. Select Metric Furniture. click New ➤ Family. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 Maximize the view.

and ending at the right reference plane. Click the EQ icon to make the segments equal.10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm. as shown. click Modify. It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. Creating a Furniture Family | 593 . 13 Select the left reference plane. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. proceeding to the centerline reference plane.

proceeding to the centerline reference plane. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. click Dimension. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. as shown. 594 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 17 To the right of the dimension you just created. and ending at the lower reference plane.15 On the Design Bar. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. as shown.

19 Select the upper. horizontal reference plane. click Modify. Creating a Furniture Family | 595 . select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. Afterwards. 21 On the Design Bar.18 On the Design Bar. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. click Modify. TIP To do this. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown.

596 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Depth for Name. Under Parameter Data. Click OK. select Dimensions. select Family parameter.. select <Add parameter. 27 On the Options Bar. For Group parameter under. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. Select Type. select <Add parameter. enter Length for Name. Click OK.> for Label. select Family parameter. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. For Group parameter under..23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. select Dimensions.. 24 On the Options Bar.> for Label. Select Type. Under Parameter Data.. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.

so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 30 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating a Furniture Family | 597 .These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. enter 3000 mm for Length. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. it will also adapt to the same changes. you can still see the model. enter 2000 mm for Length. Click Apply. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Click Apply. click Family Types. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry. Click OK. Therefore. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.

6 In the Work Plane dialog box. click . under Elevations. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Design Bar. 598 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. double-click Front. and click OK. Level for Name. 2 On the Options Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. and enter 100 mm for Depth. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. Your lines may have a lighter weight. and click to select all four symbolic lines. 5 On the Design Bar. select Level: Ref. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. NOTE In the image below. click Finish Sketch. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. click . click Set Work Plane. 8 On the Options Bar.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Lines. click Symbolic Lines.

and select the bottom edge. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. click Dimension.. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. Creating a Furniture Family | 599 . 22 On the Options Bar. and select the top edge. select <Add parameter. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. click Modify. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar.> for Label. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. click Modify.The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. as shown. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. 18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop.. 12 On the Design Bar.

26 n the Parameter Properties dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.23 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.. 27 On the Design Bar. enter Height for Name. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 4000 mm for Length. Click OK. For Group parameter under. Select Type. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. 25 On the Options Bar. Click OK. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Apply. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters.> for Label. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. select Dimensions. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Under Parameter Data. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. you can still see the model. click Modify. select Family parameter. select Dimensions. Click Apply. 29 On the Design Bar. For Group parameter under. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Enter 750 mm for Height. and click Apply. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. and click Apply. Click OK.. enter 2000 mm for Length. Under Parameter Data. Enter 1200 mm for Height. Select Type. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. select <Add parameter. Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. 30 In the Family Types dialog box. select Family parameter. 600 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Thickness for Name. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry.

7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. click Dimension. and enter 100 mm for Offset. Click the lock icon as shown. Creating a Furniture Family | 601 . 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. Level. click . double-click Ref. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. under Floor Plans. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. 6 On the Design Bar.

click Set Work Plane. 10 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. Lock the dimension as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Lines. 11 In the Work Plane dialog box. 602 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. as shown. under Specify a new Work Plane. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. Level for Name. Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. select Level: Ref. click . 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. 12 On the Design Bar.8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it.

15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. 16 On the Design Bar. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. two lock icons display.After you complete the rectangle. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. Creating a Furniture Family | 603 . click Dimension.

19 Select the four sketched lines. click Modify. 604 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .18 On the Design Bar. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. 22 On the Tools toolbar. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. as shown below at the cursor. click the Mirror tool. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. 20 On the Tools toolbar. click . 23 For the align-to reference. . You can also highlight the entire line chain. using the TAB key. A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base.

click Dimension. Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. ■ Creating a Furniture Family | 605 . A lock icon displays.24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. 26 On the Design Bar. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension.

Click OK. 30 On the Options Bar. as shown.28 Add two final dimensions.. select <Add parameter. enter Drawer Base Width for Name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select Drawer Base Width for Label. Select Type. For Group parameter under. click Modify. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion.> for Label. 34 On the Design Bar. Under Parameter Data. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. 33 On the Options Bar. 32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion.. select Family parameter. 606 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Dimensions.

38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. under Elevations. double-click Front. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. a lock icon displays.35 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click . 39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. click it to lock the alignment. Creating a Furniture Family | 607 . 37 On the Tools toolbar. After the alignment.

49 In the Family Types dialog box. 608 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click Apply. 42 On the View menu. enter 4000 mm for Length. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click the Scale control and select 1:20. click Visibility/Graphics. click . The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. Click OK. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. enter 2000 mm for Length. 47 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.40 On the Design Bar. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. and click OK. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. Enter 1200 mm for Height. and click Apply. Enter 750 mm for Height. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry. However. and click Apply. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. notice that annotations display in this view. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. click Family Types. 41 On the View toolbar. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. you can still see the model. click Modify. Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 45 On the View Control Bar.

Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. under Elevations. double-click Right. 3 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. as shown. click Set Work Plane. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click to specify the upper left corner. 2 On the Design Bar. click Lines. and click OK. Creating a Furniture Family | 609 . 5 On the Design Bar. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser.

click Dimension. click . 10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. 610 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .8 On the Tools toolbar. and lock it. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. 9 Select the desk top. then the lower horizontal sketch line. then select the right parallel sketch line. 11 On the Design Bar. and lock the alignment. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. and lock it.

13 On the Design Bar. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. . Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. click Lines. The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. 16 On the Design Bar. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. the upper sketch line. Creating a Furniture Family | 611 . and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. click Finish Sketch. click the Fillet arc tool. 14 On the Options Bar.

select the left edge of the rolltop. double-click Front. and click the lock icon. and click the lock icon. 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. select the right edge of the rolltop. 612 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Elevations. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base.Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Tools toolbar. click .

and click Apply. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. and click Apply. You can also use dimension constraints. click Family Types. Enter 1500 mm for Height. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. click . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you can still see the model. The desk should adapt to all the changes. 23 On the Design Bar. If not. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. Creating a Furniture Family | 613 .21 On the View toolbar. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 1500 mm for Depth.

25 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

26 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry.

Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Create the desk drawer extrusions
1 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Pick a Plane, and click OK. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base.

5 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 6 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 On the Options Bar, click .

8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below.

614 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. 9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. Lock each dimension as you add it. There should be four dimensions as shown.

NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width, these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions, zoom the view until you do.

11 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

12 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers, select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first, and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. After selecting the line of an upper drawer, click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. 14 On the Tools toolbar, click set on the left. 15 On the Tools toolbar, click , and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the drawer

, and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers.

These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter 20mm for Extrusion End, and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 20 On the View toolbar, click .

Creating a Furniture Family | 615

Apply material to the desk
21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. 22 On the Options Bar, click . for Material.

23 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click 24 In the Materials dialog box, click Duplicate. 25 In the New Material dialog box, enter Desk - Wood, Cherry, and click OK. 26 In the Materials dialog box, under AccuRender, click for Texture.

27 In the Material Library dialog box, navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained, Dark, Polished. 28 Click OK. 29 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 31 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.

Flex the design
32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box, you can still see the model. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

616 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

34 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 4000 mm for Length, and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Enter 200 mm for Thickness, and click Apply.

The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints. 35 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson, Defining New Furniture Types.

Defining New Furniture Types
In this exercise, you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Creating a Furniture Family | 617

Define new furniture types with various widths and depths
1 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 2 In the Family Types dialog box, under Family Types, click New. 3 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name, and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog box, verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm, and click Apply. 5 Under Family Types, click New. 6 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth, and click Apply. 8 Under Family Types, click New. 9 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name, and click OK. 10 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth, click Apply, and click OK. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. 11 On the File menu, click Save. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name, Training Furniture.rfa.

Load the new window family into a new project

13 On the Standard toolbar, click 14 On the View toolbar, click .

to start a new project based on your default template.

15 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component. 17 On the Options Bar, click Load. 18 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Furniture.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 19 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 200 x 100mm. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk.

21 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk, and add the second desk.

618 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

23 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks, and click to add the third desk.

You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson.

Creating a Baluster Family
In this lesson, you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter.

Drawing a Baluster
In this exercise, you draw a baluster with an extrusion.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select Metric Baluster.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 Expand the left elevation view. 2 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

Creating a Baluster Family | 619

The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed.

Draw the baluster plan profile
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Ref. Level.

4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box, select Ref. Level for Name, and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations, double-click Front.

620 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

By default, the extrusion has a height of 250mm. 11 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the extrusion. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. 14 Click the lock icon.

15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster.rfa. The new custom baluster is now complete.

Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run
In this exercise, you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run.

Load the new baluster family into a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rtefile, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a straight stair run
3 On the Design Bar, click the Modelling tab. 4 On the Design Bar, click Stairs. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown.

Creating a Baluster Family | 621

6 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 7 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 8 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Baluster.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 9 On the View toolbar, click .

10 On the View menu, click Orient ➤ Southwest. 11 On the View menu, click Shading with Edges.

Apply the custom baluster to the stair run
12 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the existing railing. 13 On the Options Bar, click .

14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Baluster Family, select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster.

17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. 19 Click OK. 20 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters.

622 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson.

Creating Profile Families
A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings, balusters, soffits, cornices, and other sweep-defined objects. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. In this lesson, you create five different profiles: a sweep, a railing, a stair nosing, a reveal, and a host sweep. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall.

Drawing a Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you draw a sweep profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown.

3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Sweep.rfa. The new sweep profile is now complete.

Creating Profile Families | 623

Drawing a Rail Profile
In this exercise, you create a rail profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Rail.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default rail profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top.

Draw the rail profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the rail profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Rail.rfa. The new rail profile is now complete.

Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile
In this exercise, you create a stair nosing profile.

624 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Stair Nosing.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template
1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing.

Draw the stair nosing profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. In addition, the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Stair Nosing.rfa. The new stair nosing profile is now complete.

Drawing a Reveal Profile
In this exercise, you create a reveal profile. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Reveal.rft, and click Open.

Creating Profile Families | 625

Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face, and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal.

Draw the reveal profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Reveal.rfa. The new reveal profile is now complete.

Drawing a Host Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you create a host sweep profile. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface, which may be any vertical surface.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Hosted.rft, and click Open.

626 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile.

Draw the host sweep profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane, and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Host Sweep.rfa. The new host sweep profile is now complete.

Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path
In this exercise, you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Creating Profile Families | 627

Specify the family category
3 On the Modelling menu, click Create. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box, select Generic Models for Family Category, and click OK. 5 In the Name dialog box, enter Sweep for Name, and click OK.

Sketch the 2D sweep path
6 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Sweep. 7 On the Design Bar, click Sketch 2D Path. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path, the exact location of the path is not critical. 8 On the Design Bar, click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Path.

Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path
10 On the Options Bar, click Load Profiles. 11 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 12 In the Type Selector, beside Load Profiles, select Profile - Sweep. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sweep. 14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family. 15 On the View toolbar, click .

Modify the sweep profile configuration
16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.

628 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

17 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep.

18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 19 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown.

20 Select the sweep profile and, on the Options Bar, click Edit. 21 Select the sweep profile again and, on the Options Bar, click 22 In the Element Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

.

Under Constraints, enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. Under Other, select Profile Is Flipped.

23 Click OK. 24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.

25 On the View toolbar, click

.

The sweep profile application is now complete.

Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls
In this exercise, you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.

Creating Profile Families | 629

2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a wall group
3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. NOTE When you draw the walls, their exact location is not critical. 4 Draw four walls as shown.

5 On the View toolbar, click

.

6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. 7 On the Options Bar, verify that Horizontal is selected. 8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep.

9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep.

630 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep
11 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Host Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 13 Select the wall sweep and, on the Options Bar, click 14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Profile - Host Sweep : Profile - Host Sweep for Profile, and click OK. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 17 On the View toolbar, click . .

18 In the Dynamic View dialog box, click Spin [Shift]. 19 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath.

The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson.

Creating a Room Tag
In this lesson, you create a room tag which displays room name, floor and ceiling finish, and area with labels added to extract project data.

Specifying Room Tag Parameters
In this exercise, you specify the room tag parameters.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select M_Room Tag.rft, and click Open.

Creating a Room Tag | 631

Create a new tag based on the default room tag template
1 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.

Edit the 3mm label
2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Label. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box, select Underline, and click OK.

Add a 2mm label
6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter 2mm for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, enter 2 for the Text Size parameter, clear Underline, and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.

Combine labels into a room tag
11 On the Design Bar, click Label. 12 In the Type Selector, verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. 13 On the Options Bar, verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown.

15 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Name, and click OK. 16 Zoom in on the label.

The name label is displayed with the text underlined. 17 In the Type Selector, select Label : 2mm. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Floor Finish, and click OK.

632 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. and click OK. and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. select Area. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog box. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. and click OK. The new room tag is now ready for use. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. In the left pane of the New dialog box. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template.rft. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 633 . and click Open.20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson.rfa. notice that there is only one view available. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. Select Generic Annotation. select Ceiling Finish. select Training Files. The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.

4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. click . 3 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. 6 On the Options Bar. click .Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle.

click Modify. click Object Styles. under Modify Subcategories.9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. 12 In the Object Styles dialog box. and click OK. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog box. click Modify. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 635 . enter North Line for Name. 14 In the Object Styles dialog box. 16 In the Type Selector. 17 On the Design Bar. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. in the North Line row. and select the upper vertical line. click Modify. 10 On the Design Bar. select North Line. and click OK. click New. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. select 3 for Line Weight. The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit.

select Training North Arrow. select Training Files. 2 In the New Project dialog box. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete.18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. and click Open. 5 Click OK. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Selector. 636 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. 12 On the Design Bar. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. click OK. select it. In the New Project Dialog box. click Symbol. click Modify. 8 In the Open dialog box.rte file. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa. click New ➤ Project. select A1 metric. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. click Browse. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. 6 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 7 On the File menu. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. 11 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. and click Open. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template.rfa. click Sheet. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. Training North Arrow. Select the DefaultMetric.

and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. and labels.rft. Creating a Titleblock Family | 637 . and your project data. Select A0 metric. click New ➤ Titleblock. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. You customize the titleblock with a new text style.The titleblock has linework. 3 On the Options Bar. and click Open. click . click Lines. Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. text. and enter -25 for Offset. In the left pane of the New dialog box. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. graphics.

click . 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. 638 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and enter 140 for Offset. 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. and click . .Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new vertical line. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. 7 On the Options Bar. click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line.

Creating a Titleblock Family | 639 . and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. click Modify. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. click . and enter 20 for Offset. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. select Wide Lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. select Title Blocks. 16 In the Type Selector. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 21 On the Options Bar.12 On the Design Bar. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. press CTRL. 17 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. and select the second and third horizontal lines. 15 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. click Lines. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. enter 30 for Offset. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line.

click Import/Link ➤ Image. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. 2 In the Open dialog box. select Company Logo. click Modify. navigate to Training Files/Common. The titleblock linework is now complete. 640 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. text notes. you add a company logo.25 On the Design Bar. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. and click Open. and labels to your titleblock. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu.jpg.

click Edit/New. enter 10mm Bold for Name. 6 On the Options Bar. enter 10 for Text Size. and click OK. in the text box. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 In the Name dialog box. click . 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. under Text. click Text. and select Bold. Creating a Titleblock Family | 641 . 11 Click OK twice. click Duplicate. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc.4 Zoom in on the logo. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text.

17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Add consultant name. and add an address and phone number as shown. 18 Select the drag handle. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. address. select Text : 8mm. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and drag the text note down as shown. 19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. click Text. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text.Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. and select the last text note. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line.

25 Click inside the Consultant text group. 24 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Edit toolbar. Creating a Titleblock Family | 643 . select Constrain and Multiple. 26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. and select the consultant text note. click Modify. click .22 On the Design Bar.

644 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.

click Text. 29 On the Options Bar. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. and enter Checked By:. and enter Sheet Number:. click Duplicate. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. select Project Issue Date. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. select Text : 5mm. enter 5mm for Name. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. enter 5 for Text Size. 32 In the Name dialog box. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. and enter Date:. 41 On the Options Bar. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. under Text. click . and enter Drawn By:. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. 34 Click OK twice. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. click Label. and click OK. Creating a Titleblock Family | 645 . 33 In the Type Properties dialog box.

select Checked By and click OK. select Drawn By. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. and click to specify the label location. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog box. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click to specify the label location.44 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click OK. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field.

58 In the Select Parameter dialog box. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. 51 In the Element Properties dialog box. 55 Click OK twice. Creating a Titleblock Family | 647 . and click OK. click Edit/New. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 53 In the Name dialog box. click Duplicate. click Center and Middle. 62 Select the left drag handle on the label.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 59 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Label : 15mm Label. click Label. and click to specify the label location. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. enter 15mm Label for Name. and click OK. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 54 In the Type Properties dialog box. 52 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 15 for Text Size. select Sheet Number. select Project Number. 50 On the Options Bar. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. and click to specify the label location. click . Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. under Text.

select Project Name. 74 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click to specify the label location. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. 73 In the Name dialog box. enter 4mm Label. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label.63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. and click OK. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click Edit/New. 75 Click OK twice. 70 On the Options Bar. enter 4 for Text Size. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. select Client Name. under Text. and click OK. click . click Label. and click to specify the label location. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click OK. click Duplicate. 648 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 71 In the Element Properties dialog box. 72 In the Type Properties dialog box.

click New ➤ Project. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. The titleblock graphics. select Training Files. and labels are now complete. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. select File Path. select 4mm Label. click Left and Middle.Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. 2 In the New Project dialog box. 77 On the Options Bar. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. click Load.rte file. select it. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. and click to specify the label location. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. Select the DefaultMetric. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 80 On the Design Bar. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. 7 Click OK. and click Open. text. and click OK. Creating a Titleblock Family | 649 . click Sheet. click OK.rfa.rfa file. and click Open. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Open dialog box. In the New Project Dialog box. click Modify. click Browse. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder.

Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. under Other. enter Name for Drawn By. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. click Project Information. 11 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. click . you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. click Modify and select the titleblock. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 On the Settings menu. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. 650 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Enter Office Building for Project Name. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. and click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. 14 Click OK. This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. Enter In Progress for Project Status. 2005 for Project Issue Date.

and click Open. Set the Length units to millimeters.rvt. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. Creating In-Place Families | 651 . Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. Select c_Pantheon. on the Settings menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. expand Elevations. set the Area to Square meters. click Orient ➤ Southeast. click Open. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. and set the suffix to None. click Project Units. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. To change the units of measurement to meters. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. and double-click South. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). select Training Files and navigate to the Common folder. Next. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view.

13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 12 On the Options Bar. 652 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Set Work Plane. and click OK. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. and click Open View. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Name dialog box. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. The center wall section view is displayed. click Axis. 7 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Go To View dialog box. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Work Plane dialog box. select Roofs for Family Category. click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve.Center. and click OK.Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. enter Dome for Name. click Create. click . and click OK. select Section: Wall Section . select Pick a Plane.

15 On the Options Bar. Creating In-Place Families | 653 . click . 17 Move the cursor out. click Lines.Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane.

21 Snap to reference plane intersections. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. and select Chain. The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. click . 654 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 19 On the Options Bar. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown.The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line.

27 On the Options Bar.Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. Creating In-Place Families | 655 . 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. 23 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. click . click . Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. select Delete Inner Segment. click Lines.

click Lines. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. click and select Chain. and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. 656 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 32 On the Options Bar.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall.

40 On the Design Bar. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. click OK. click . click for Material. click Revolution Properties. select Concrete . Creating In-Place Families | 657 . 42 On the View toolbar. and click OK. click . under Materials and Finishes.Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. 41 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Finish Family. 38 In the Materials dialog box.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. 35 Select the interior face of the wall. The dome roof closed profile is now complete. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box.

and click Open View. and click OK. and click OK. double-click South. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. and click OK. 7 In the Work Plane dialog box. 5 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Go To View dialog box. click .Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. select Floors for Family Category. click Create. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. click Set Work Plane. 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. 658 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Axis. select Pick a Plane.Center. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve. 3 In the Name dialog box. select Section: Wall Section . enter Concave Floor for Name. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 11 On the Options Bar.

Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. Creating In-Place Families | 659 . 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown. and select Chain. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point.O. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Specify the intersection of the T. click Lines. Footing level line and the axis. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. click . 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm.12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. for the start point of the floor profile as shown. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown.

25 On the Design Bar. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click Finish Sketch. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar.18 Specify the intersection of the T. The concave floor closed profile is now complete.O. click for Material. 22 In the Materials dialog box. select Cobblestone for Name. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. 660 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. click Revolution Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click 3D Section View.O. click OK. 24 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. click Finish Family.

formula-based parameters. and detail level controls. In this case. 661 . In exercises that become increasingly complex. At the end of this tutorial. The truss also has multiple types. methodology. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems.Parametric Component Design Techniques 20 In this tutorial. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open-joist wood floor truss. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. not specifically how to make a floor truss. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Autodesk Revit Building. During this tutorial. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. you will understand the process. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. assigned subcatecories.

Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. you should avoid over-designing the component. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. In the next exercise. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. it is not the best solution. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. and structural walls. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 662 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. Although this solution is possible. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. It should also be an available option within a beam system. beams. For every complexity added to a family. a generic floor-based component might work. Two types should be created. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. NOTE When creating a new family. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. you determine the requirements of the new component. In this case. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. this must be a structural beam component. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. For training purposes. the design spec requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. Take this into consideration during your design planning.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. In addition. and also works intuitively with them. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. In this lesson. In this case.

only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required.■ What materials need the most control? These materials. would require Instance or Type parameters. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. the planning stage and questions may differ. In addition. How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. In the previous exercise. such as wood type. Selecting the Family Template. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. Depending on the family you are designing. Planning a Parametric Component Family | 663 . 4 Continue with the next exercise. ■ ■ ■ You have completed the planning stage for the new family. These materiails can be applied using Object Styles. What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. What types are most commonly used? In this training case. the means in which to gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise.

rft This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. Because of its simplicity. for example: wall based or floor based.rft. There are two structural framing templates provided. ■ Metric Structural Framing .rft. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project.Beams and Braces.Beams and Braces. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Notice that most of the template names include the component type.Complex and Trusses. and display functions required by structural beams. NOTE Although this is the template you use to start the tutorial. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). scroll to the structural framing templates. This template is the best starting point for the new family. In addition. spacing. Select it so that the preview displays.Complex and Trusses. select Metric Generic Model floor based. it is not the best starting point for the beam family. navigate to it. ■ Metric Structural Framing . For training purposes. Notice this template offers three horizontal planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. notice the preview. If you are not in this folder. 3 In the New dialog box. 5 In the New dialog box. 6 Select Metric Structural Framing .rft and notice the preview.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. The New dialog box opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog box. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back).Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. On the right side of the New dialog box. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. 4 In the New dialog box. this template resides within the training folders and should be opened from there. Like most generic family templates. 664 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . scroll through the various template options. do not open this template. and notice the preview.

Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line.rft located in the Metric  ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates ➤  folder. Like many templates. Floor Plan: Ref. Creating the Component Skeleton | 665 . under 3D Views. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. 11 In the Project Browser.Open the family template 8 In the left pane of the New dialog box. Floor Plan: Ref. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. under Elevations. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. you add the reference planes. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. however. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. Level. double-click View 1. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point.Beams and Braces. Therefore. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. 12 In the Project Browser. Creating the Component Skeleton. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. double-click Front. 9 Open Metric Structural Framing . 10 Maximize the view. lines. click the Training Files icon. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. Level In this view.

they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. Level. In the image below. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. 666 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. In the project plan view image below. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. Reference Plane: Left. notice the location of the beam extents. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to.Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. under Floor Plans. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. double-click Ref. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. you add reference planes to the beam design. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise.

In a later exercise. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. click . Creating the Component Skeleton | 667 . you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. Before adding new reference planes. click Ref Plane. it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. 5 On the Edit Toolbar.■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion.

Level. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Design Bar.8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Level as the mirror axis. under Elevations. select the lower horizontal reference plane. 668 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click on the Edit toolbar. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). double-click Front. click Ref Plane. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. To do this. Add ref. and select the Level: Ref. Level.

click to place it as shown. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. 14 On the Options Bar. click to place it. click . 13 On the Design Bar. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. click to place it as shown. click Ref Plane. click to place it as shown. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. Creating the Component Skeleton | 669 . and specify an Offset of 38 mm.These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane.

21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). under Floor Plans. double-click Ref. click to place it as shown. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. 24 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. Before you move on to the next exercise. click to place it as shown. Level. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. specify an Offset of 200 mm. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. 20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). which you do in the next exercise. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. specify an Offset of 238 mm.You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. 670 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier.

29 Proceed to the next exercise.25 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. Creating the Component Skeleton | 671 . you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it.rfa. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. Adding Dimensions and Constraints. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. After adding the dimension. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 28 In the Save As dialog box. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Dimension. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. navigate to the folder of your choice. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. Make sure you remember where you saved it. and click Save. Wood Floor Truss. click .

and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. and the lower horizontal reference plane. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. click Dimension. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. 7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. under Elevations.4 On the Design Bar. the Center reference plane. Level. 672 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Place the dimension as shown. double-click Front. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. 9 On the Design Bar. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. click Modify. click Dimension. 6 On the Design Bar. place the dimension to the left as shown. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref.

11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. Creating the Component Skeleton | 673 . Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. add two dimensions as shown. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. and place it below the dimension you added previously.

Creating New Length Parameters. You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. dimensions. Wood Floor Truss. If the component has material that varies per component. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. consider making it a type parameter. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Level. In this exercise. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. consider making it a type parameter. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. ■ ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. When you design a new family. In addition. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. consider making it an instance parameter. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Throughout the tutorial. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. and constraints as needed. In the next exercise. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. 674 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . double-click Ref. you will add additional reference planes. it becomes a parameter. under Floor Plans.15 Add four dimensions as shown.rfa.

Select Type. select Add parameter for Label. Click OK. double-click Front. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. select Family parameter. 7 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Under Parameter Data. enter Depth for Name. Click OK. Under Parameter Data. ■ Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. Select Type. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. select Family parameter. select Add parameter for Label. under Elevations. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. enter Chord Width for Name.2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. Creating the Component Skeleton | 675 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 3 On the Options Bar.

13 On the Options Bar. enter Center Chase Width for Name. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Type. Click OK. Under Parameter Data. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown. Click OK. select Add parameter for Label. Create chord thickness parameter 12 On the right side of the model. Select Type. enter Chord Thickness for Name. select Family parameter. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Under Parameter Data. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. 10 On the Options Bar. select Add parameter for Label. 676 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . select Family parameter. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under.Create center chase width parameter 9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior.

TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown. select Chord Thickness for Label. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions 15 On the right side of the model. 17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. Creating the Component Skeleton | 677 .

You should flex a new family after: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Adding or modifying an element. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Flexing the Component Model One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. Adding a new constraint. Dimensions. Flexing the Component Model. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save. When you change a parameter value and apply the change. you can drag it to the opposing corner. 20 On the File menu. you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. In the Family Types dialog box. Preparing the family for flexing 1 When flexing the model. it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained.18 On the Design Bar. these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog box for the beam. When you open the Family Types dialog. you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. Adding or modifying a parameter. When you flex a family. If you add a new material parameter. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family. After you verify this. ■ 678 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you can drag it off the Revit window as shown. Wood Floor Truss. You should flex the model after any major change to the design. or Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project. thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. When you load this family into a project. you should always do it from the Family Types dialog box. When you open the Family Types dialog box. Nesting a component. click Family Types. notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group. rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. This is not limited to length parameters. 19 Click Cancel. you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog box: ■ Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. Flexing the model means to change parameter values. Adding or modifying a parameter formula.rfa.

Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing. In addition. Creating the Component Skeleton | 679 . click Family Types. Flex the truss depth 3 In the Family Types dialog box. Level. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. and click Apply. and drag the dialog box so that you can view the model. 80 mm for Chord Thickness.Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog box. enter 600 mm for Depth. 4 Enter 450 mm for Depth. under Dimensions. and click Apply. 800 mm for Center Chase Width. 2 On the Design Bar. notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value.

you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. After adding the chords. Add chord extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. After creating the extrusions. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Adding Solid Geometry. you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends.rfa. Wood Floor Truss. under Elevations. you align and lock their position. After flexing the design. you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. 680 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. click Save.Reset parameters 5 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. Adding Solid Geometry In this lesson. Click OK. reset the parameters back to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 300 mm for Depth. 6 On the File menu. double-click Left. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design. When working within the Family Editor. Creating Solid Extrusions In this exercise. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed.

You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. Adding Solid Geometry | 681 . and click OK. and verify that Lock is selected. When using the Trim tool. click Name. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown. 11 On the Options Bar. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 10 On the Design Bar. click . the lines will no longer overlap. click .3 On the Design Bar. click the part of the line you want to keep. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. click . 6 On the Options Bar. click Lines. and select Lock. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 8 On the Tools toolbar. select Reference Plane: Member Left. 5 On the Design Bar. click Lines. Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry In this exercise.13 On the Tools toolbar.rfa. 3 Select the chord extrusions. under 3D Views. Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry. Constrain the extrusion ends 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. double-click View 1. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. click Save. 2 Enter SD. click . The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. 16 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 682 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. double-click Front. 15 On the Design Bar. Wood Floor Truss. 17 On the File menu. click Finish Sketch. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown. this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges.

7 In the Family Types dialog box. 5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left. enter 3000 for Length. and click Apply. Flex the design 6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. click Family Types. as shown. enter 6000 for Length. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. not the member right or member left reference planes. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. click Dimension. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. Adding Solid Geometry | 683 . This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes. Therefore. click Apply. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog box is open. and click OK. as shown. Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. On the Design Bar. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown.4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right. Add a new dimension and constraint 9 On the Design Bar. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

depth. under 3D Views. you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment. flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. Flex the length 12 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. Flex the chord width. 13 In the Family Types dialog box. use the Align tool and add the constraint. 14 Click OK. enter 6000 for Length. Later in this lesson. and thickness 15 In the Project Browser. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working. and click Apply. you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value. In this particular case. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. In a later exercise.11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. Therefore. Afterwards. 684 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you add the web members. double-click View 1.

21 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP When flexing. Enter 89mm for Chord Width. Creating Additional Solid Geometry. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. ■ The chords should adjust to each of the new values. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. such as doubling. Creating Additional Solid Geometry In this exercise. 17 On the Design Bar. Adding Solid Geometry | 685 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 600mm for Depth.16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges. that allows you to easily return to the original values. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. try picking a method. Wood Floor Truss. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.rfa. 18 In the Family Types dialog box. 20 On the File menu. click Save. Therefore. and click OK. click Family Types. you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase. 19 Specify the beam values shown below: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. Click Apply. Click Apply. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards.

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 11 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. click . click the Hide/Isolate control. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. 686 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 13 On the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the left. and verify that Lock is selected. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. 8 On the Tools toolbar. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines.Add the center chase extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Ref. 3 On the View Control Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown. Level. and verify that Lock is selected. click . click Lines. vertical member of the center chase as shown. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the right. click Lines. vertical member of the center chase as shown. the lines will no longer overlap. 6 On the Options Bar. vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left. 4 On the Design Bar. and click Hide Object. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. click . click .

click the lock symbol to lock the alignment. 16 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. and after the alignment. Adding Solid Geometry | 687 . click Align. it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. 17 Zoom in on the center chase. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options. and lock the alignment as shown. Align and lock the new extrusions 18 On the Tools menu. select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown.15 On the Design Bar. 20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions. double-click Front. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion. under Elevations. This next process is very important. 19 For the align-to reference. 21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord.

redo any problematic alignments and constraints. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. If it does not. Click Apply. The truss should adapt to all the changes. 25 In the Family Types dialog box.22 On the Design Bar. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. Clean up the view 26 Zoom to Fit. 688 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Add the truss end extrusions 28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. Flex the center chase 23 On the Design Bar. This will make subsequent work much easier. Click Apply. 27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. and click OK. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. 29 On the Options Bar. select Add Parameter for Label. click Modify.

and click OK. select the lower horizontal reference plane. click Family Types. 33 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. double-click Right. click Lines. click . under Dimensions. 41 On the upper chord. enter19mm for Offset. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. select the upper horizontal reference plane. 31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. Click OK. Select Instance. click Apply. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select Trimmable End Length for Label. on the lower chord. Adding Solid Geometry | 689 . under Elevations. 42 On the Options Bar. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. 34 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. 40 On the Options Bar. Sketch the right end extrusion 35 In the Project Browser. and verify that Lock is selected. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. 32 On the Options Bar. under Parameter Data. 39 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name. 37 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Work Plane dialog box.30 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.

45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown. and click OK. select the upper horizontal reference plane. select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name. 47 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . on the lower chord. 56 On the Options Bar. 54 On the Options Bar. verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value. 53 On the Design Bar. 48 On the Design Bar.44 On the Tools toolbar. select the lower horizontal reference plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 51 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. 52 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Finish Sketch. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. Sketch the left end extrusion 49 In the Project Browser. and verify that Lock is selected. double-click Left. click Extrusion Properties. 55 On the upper chord. enter 19mm for Offset. 46 On the Design Bar. click . and click OK. 690 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 50 Zoom around the truss elements. under Constraints. click Lines.

click Extrusion Properties. click . 62 On the Design Bar. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test. click Align. click Finish Sketch. 61 In the Element Properties dialog box. 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point. Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends. 65 On the Tools menu. and click OK. 60 On the Design Bar. Add alignment constraints 63 In the Project Browser. Adding Solid Geometry | 691 . 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. under Elevations. specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value. double-click Front. under Constraints.58 On the Tools toolbar. 59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

If it does not. Flex the design 72 On the Design Bar. TIP When you finish the alignments.67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion. double-click View 1. this is the align-to point. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. and lock the alignment. 68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion. and click OK. click Family Types. Click Apply. 692 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . if you select the end extrusion. 73 In the Family Types dialog box. and lock the alignment. 70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. 75 In the Project Browser. a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 71 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. Make adjustments to account for the right side. Click Apply. under 3D Views. The truss should adapt to all the changes. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. 74 In the Family Types dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth.

it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. click the Training Files icon. After you load it into the project. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. If you are comfortable with your design. Loading a Family into a Project In this exercise. click Open. Datasets Open the truss family ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt.76 Save the Family.rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder. NOTE Close any open families or projects. Testing the Family in a Project | 693 . Although you could continue using the previous family. you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. you can continue using it in the next lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 77 Proceed to the next lesson. a sill. and a rim joist. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. Testing the Family in a Project In this lesson. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. Open the m_Wood Floor Truss_1. you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls. Testing the Family in a Project. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way.

rfa. expand Families. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. Testing a Family Instance in a Project In this exercise. expand Structural Framing. a dialog box would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. Load the truss family into the project 1 On the Window menu. click Open. 694 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click the Training Files icon. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise. you add several instances of the truss family to the project. click Load into Projects. 2 On the Design Bar. click m_Wood Floor Truss_1. and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. 4 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Project Browser.rvt file located in the Metric folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt.Open the project file ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Testing a Family Instance in a Project. Open the m_WWF1. Notice that the project file is now active. If you had multiple projects or families open.

a slab. 6 In the Project Browser. 5 Using point-to-point insertion. under 3D Views. The rim joist was added as a beam. 4 In the Type Selector. the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another.Southeast Isometric. This project consists of foundation walls. and a wood rim joist. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. a wood sill. under Floor Plans. Testing the Family in a Project | 695 . double-click 3D . select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end. 2 In the Project Browser. therefore. and double-click 3D .Southeast Isometric. NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. expand Views. double-click Level 1. Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown. click Beam.Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser.

double-click Level 1. under 3D Views.Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected. NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. You do not need to be precise. double-click 3D . 8 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square. 9 In the Project Browser. not the wall or rim joist.Southeast Isometric. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes. 7 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 696 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .

Working with Nested Subcomponents | 697 . This should return the project to its original dimension. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. Working with Nested Subcomponents. 14 On the Options Bar. Because the family is already open. 12 In the Save as dialog box. click Undo Drag. you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. 16 Proceed to the next lesson. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name. you nest wood web members into the floor truss. click Yes. The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. click Edit Family. 11 On the File menu. 10 On the Edit menu.Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length. 15 When prompted to open the truss family for editing. IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. click Save as. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. Edit a family from within a project 13 Select one of the wooden truss components. In the next lesson.

Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. click Component. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown. Open the m_Wood_Web. click the Training Files icon. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. This family is a single extrusion as shown. double-click Ref. and click Hide Object. Level. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array. 2 In the Project Browser. This will make aligning the wood web easier. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. 7 In the Type Selector. 4 On the View Control Bar. click Hide/Isolate. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. 698 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder.rfa is the active file. This will aid in the placement of the wood web. 5 On the File menu. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web. under Floor Plans. ■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog box.

9 On the Design Bar. Do not select it. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. Align the nested web components 12 Enter . 10 In the Project Browser. In the following steps. you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. under Elevations. click Modify. double-click Front. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 699 . 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. 14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. 13 For the align-to point. select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. You will align the left web component first. Notice the model lines that surround the web component.

Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar. Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. 20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components. it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints.Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. In the steps that follow. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width. 18 Add two reference planes as shown. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component. In addition. 19 On the Tools menu. click Align. 700 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 16 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. click Modify. 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown.

Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. ■ ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component. Place the dimension as shown. Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 25 Add the following two dimensions: ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. ■ Working with Nested Subcomponents | 701 . Place the dimension as shown. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase.23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown.

under Parameter Data. you add new parameters to control the web components. length. This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. click OK. click Save As. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. 28 In the Save As dialog box. 27 On the File menu. under Constraints. or the width of the center chase. select WebDepth. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. you label these dimensions. under Other. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. In the Type Parameter dialog box. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog box to facilitate typing within the formula field. Select Length for Type. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. click Modify. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. When you refer to another parameter within a formula. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters. 26 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. Select Type. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. click Modify. under Parameters. Select Common for Discipline. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. click Edit/New. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. 5 Click OK. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. enter Depth . You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters. 702 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .In the next exercise. 12 On the Design Bar. click OK. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. click Add. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. and click Properties.

18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. under Parameters. under Parameters. which must remain at least 150mm long. enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. After you enter the formula. under Parameter Data. Select Instance. Select Length for Type.(CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. click Family Types. click Add. Select Instance. Click OK. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter 20 In the Family Types dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayLength for Name. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 703 . Select Length for Type. the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field. Select Common for Discipline. This parameter is primarily for convenience. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. click Add. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends.Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords. Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter 17 In the Family Types dialog box. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase 13 On the Design Bar. enter (Length . under Parameter Data. do the following: ■ Enter CC for Name. under Parameters. click Add. Click OK. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. In addition. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Other for Group parameter under. 19 Under Constraints. Select Common for Discipline. 16 Under Other.

704 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Select Instance. 31 Under Constraints. Select Common for Discipline. 27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. Click OK. Select Instance. Add parameter to anchor web array 24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown. click Family Types. under Parameter Data. click Modify. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. 25 On the Options Bar. 23 Click OK. enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. under Parameter Data. Select Integer for Type. 29 On the Design Bar.21 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select Webhalflength for Label. 28 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Webhalflength for Name. select Add parameter for Label. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayNum for Name. 32 Click OK. Add formula for Webhalflength 30 On the Design Bar. Click OK. 22 Under Constraints.

and click OK. under 3D Views. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. Because you have added and constrained new components. Click Apply. click Modify. click OK. it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. select WebArrayLength. under Other. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. 42 On the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth. 35 In the Type Properties dialog box. 39 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. Flex the design 41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog box. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 705 . The truss should adapt to all the changes. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. click Edit/New. If it does not. the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. click Family Types. double-click View 1.Associate web component parameters 33 Right-click the left web component. 34 In the Element Properties dialog box. In the Type Properties dialog box. and click Properties. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. 40 In the Project Browser. click OK.

add alignment constraints. 3 On the Edit menu. Array the left web component 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Front. and click OK. 706 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Arraying Nested Subcomponents. Select 2nd for Move to. First. Enter 3 for Number. Arraying Nested Subcomponents In this exercise. then you specify the move end point. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save. under Elevations. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth.44 In the Family Types dialog box. 4 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. Click Apply. click Array. 45 On the File menu. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Select Constrain. Creating an array requires two basic steps. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. you specify the move start point. you array the nested web components. When picking the corner. 5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point.

15 On the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Align and lock the arrays 17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 11 On the Options Bar. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. click Modify. When picking the corner. 19 In the left array. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 707 .6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. 16 Zoom out to view the truss. 14 Press ENTER to complete the array. Select 2nd for Move to. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. Select Constrain. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. click Array. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Edit menu. click Modify. place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights. When picking the corner. When picking the corner. 7 Press ENTER to complete the array. Array the right nested web component 9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. Enter 3 for Number. then select the line twice. 18 On the Tools menu. 12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. click Align.

select WebArrayNum for Label. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. 25 On the Options Bar. 28 On the Options Bar. select WebArrayNum for Label.Because there are two overlapping lines at this location. 21 Within the left array. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. align and lock the two right web components. NOTE Do not select the array value. Label the arrays 23 Select the middle web component of the left array. NOTE This step is very important. click Modify. 29 On the Design Bar. 30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss. 22 Within the right array. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges. 708 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . If you do not lock the edges of the array.

Member Left.Notice the arrays appear to be too long. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown. This is because earlier in the tutorial. Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. Left. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 709 . you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. 33 Delete the dimension. 35 Select the reference plane. 34 On the Tools menu. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. 36 Select the reference plane. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value. as the align-to point. click Align. and lock the alignment as shown.

click Modify. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth. Click Apply. this solution has little. click Family Types. enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. 47 In the Family Types dialog box. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. 37 On the Design Bar. under Dimensions. 710 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Enter 12000mm for Length. double-click View 1. The truss should adapt to all the changes. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends. under 3D Views.NOTE With most beam families. 44 Click Apply. 41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. significant impact. Flex the design 45 In the Project Browser. you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes. in this case. and click OK. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right. however. click Family Types. Therefore. If it does not. 46 On the Design Bar. Change trimmable end length value 42 On the Design Bar. and prepare the view for flexing. if any.

Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. click Save. m_WWF1. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 711 . the project. Enter 6000mm for Length. Reloading a Family into a Project In this exercise. you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly. 2 On the Design Bar. and click Yes. displays. click Load into Projects. Reload the truss into the project. Click Apply.TIP When flexing a complex model such as this. you reload the truss family into the project. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. Reloading a Family into a Project. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes. for training and time purposes.rvt. 1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View. select Override parameter values of existing types. should be open. however. 3 In the Reload Family dialog box. and click OK. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length. 49 On the File menu. these steps have been reduced. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. View 1. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. In addition to the truss family.

you create and apply subcategories and materials. Materials. you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. 712 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 9 Proceed to the next lesson. and Parameters In this lesson. 7 On the Edit menu. click Undo Drag. double-click 3D .4 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. Materials. under Floor Plans. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. You then create a parameter to specifically control material application.Southeast Isometric. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. and Parameters. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes. double-click Level 1. Applying Subcategories. Applying Subcategories. under 3D Views. In the next lesson.

Open the m_WWF2. Notice no material has been applied to the truss. you create new subcategories within the truss family. Within the family. click the Training Files icon.rvt file located in the Metric folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.Creating and Applying Subcategories In this exercise. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. In this dataset. Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. the material values were set to By Category by default. click Open. In addition. four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure. Applying Subcategories. Materials. and Parameters | 713 . Apply Object Styles 1 Zoom in around beam system. the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint.

and click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. If there was a metal beam in this building model. click in the material field until the button displays as shown. you have more control over component visibility within a project. 12 On the Settings menu. enter Wood Floor Truss for Name. click Undo Object Styles. under Modify Subcategories. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog box. Notice the Wood .Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components. click New.2 On the Settings menu. verify that the Model Objects tab is selected. 714 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 6 In the Materials dialog box. notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. In addition. 3 In the Object Styles dialog box. and expand the category Structural Framing. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. click Edit Family. When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor. click Object Styles. 13 In the Object Styles dialog box. click Object Styles. click OK. it would also have the wood material applied to it.Timber for Name. click Wood . 8 On the Edit menu. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. Create subcategories within the truss family 9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 4 On the Structural Framing category line. and click OK. 7 In the Object Styles dialog box. 5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field.

navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . select Natural. 29 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Materials dialog box. press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. click . under AccuRender. and click OK. and Parameters | 715 .No Gloss for Name. 20 In the Materials dialog box. Materials. click Check None. 25 On the Options Bar. The web component family opens in a 3D view. and click OK. and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. select Other. 16 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory. under Identity Data. and click OK. 19 In the Material Library dialog box. 23 On the Options Bar. Applying Subcategories. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. and click OK. 17 In the New Material dialog box. click Edit Family. Apply a subcategory to the nested web components 28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components. click Modify. enter Wood Floor Truss. 21 In the Object Styles dialog box. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 27 On the Design Bar. click OK. Apply the subcategory to the truss components 22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. click Duplicate. click . 24 In the Filter dialog box. Yellow.Apply material to subcategory 15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory.

and click OK. 40 In the Object Styles dialog box. click . select m_WWF2. and click OK. and click OK.No Gloss for Name. click Object Styles. 36 In the New Material dialog box.rfa. enter Wood Floor Truss . click .Webs. select Override parameter values of existing types. 38 In the Material Library dialog box. under Modify Subcategories. 35 In the Materials dialog box.Webs subcategory. 41 Select the web extrusion. By creating a separate subcategory for the web components. select Natural.Webs for Name. enter Wood Floor Truss . select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.Webs for Subcategory. 42 On the Options Bar. Reload web component into truss family 44 On the Design Bar. and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. under Identity Data. 34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss . Reload truss into project 47 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 716 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click New.31 On the Settings menu. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog box. click Load into Projects. 39 In the Materials dialog box. 48 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 43 In the Element Properties dialog box. under AccuRender. you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project. navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine. click OK. 32 In the Object Styles dialog box. and click OK. and click Yes. and click OK. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog box. 37 In the Materials dialog box.rvt. 46 In the Reload Family dialog box. click Duplicate. click OK. Yellow. select Wood Floor Truss . click Load into Projects.

under Visibility. under Categories. clear Wood Floor Truss Webs. 55 On the Edit menu. 58 Proceed to the next exercise. 56 On the File menu. and Parameters | 717 . 50 On the Settings menu. 57 In the Save as dialog box. select Override parameter values of existing types. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components. 51 In the Object Styles dialog box. expand Structural Framing. click Object Styles. Open truss family for editing 1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. and click Yes. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog box. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. the stick symbols continue to display. Materials. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. Creating Material Parameters. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice the web extrusions not longer display. Applying Subcategories. click Undo Visibility/Graphics. 2 On the Options Bar.49 In the Reload Family dialog box. expand Structural Framing. however. navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. 52 Click OK. Creating Material Parameters In this exercise. 53 On the View menu. click Save As. Notice the two new subcategories are listed. click Edit Family.

29 In the Materials dialog box. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box. click Family Types. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 718 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click . click OK. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box.Create material parameter 4 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. click Load into Projects. under Parameters. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box.Steel for Name. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. select Metal . click OK. and click Yes. 11 In the Filter dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. click Add. Link truss extrusions to material parameter 9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 28 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Check None. click . and click OK. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. 21 Click OK twice. click Modify. 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. 17 On the Options Bar. 8 Click OK. select Override parameter values of existing types. and click OK. under Parameter Data. click . click Edit/New. and click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. select Floor Truss Material. When reloaded into a project. 27 On the Options Bar. click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. click . under Materials and Finishes. notice the default material is By Category. Select Material for Type. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. click the button to the right of the Material value field. select Structural Framing (Wood Floor Truss). click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. under Other. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. In this case. select Floor Truss Material. Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar. and select the component. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. press TAB. select m_WWF2. 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. Select Instance.rvt. Click OK. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. do not assign a material to the parameter. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. 22 On the Design Bar. Select Common for Discipline. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box.

all elements display at all times in all views. and click Coarse.rvt file located in the Metric folder. You can save the open files if you wish. click Open. Controlling Component Visibility | 719 . a new dataset is supplied. 35 Proceed to the next lesson. you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Modify. Notice the rim joist no longer displays. Currently within the truss. 33 On the File menu. However. click Close.31 On the Design Bar. because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Open the m_WWF3. you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level. click the Training Files icon. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam. Change detail levels 1 On the View Control Bar. click Save. In the next lesson. Controlling Component Visibility. Controlling Component Visibility In this lesson. Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 32 On the File menu. 34 Close any open files. Assigning Detail Level and View Controls In this exercise. click Detail Level. notice the floor truss has not changed appearance.

11 On the Design Bar. Assign detail level to center chase extrusions 14 Select the center chase extrusions. Under Detail Levels. clear Plan/RCP. clear Coarse. 3 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. 9 On the Options Bar. clear Coarse. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels. click Load into Projects. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. and click Yes. Clear Left/Right.2 Select a floor truss. click Edit Family. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. 15 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the web extrusion. click Visibility. select Override parameter values of existing types. 18 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click Visibility. Assign detail level to truss ends 17 Select the end extrusions. 13 In the Reload Family dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. click Visibility. Under Detail Levels. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing.rfa. Click OK. Apply detail level controls to web components 5 Select a web component. Click OK. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing. clear Plan/RCP. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog box. clear Coarse. Click OK. click Edit Family. clear Plan/RCP. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. 720 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and click OK. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box.

Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar. click Detail Level. Controlling Component Visibility | 721 . 21 On the Options Bar. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed. 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. Click OK. Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. select m_WWF3. and click OK.rvt. 27 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box.Assign detail level to truss chords 20 Select the truss chords. and click Coarse. clear Coarse. specify the following: ■ ■ Under Detail Levels. click Load into Projects. and click Medium. Notice the symbolic representation of the beams. click Visibility. select Override parameter values of existing types. click Detail Level. 26 On the View Control Bar. 28 On the View Control Bar. and click Yes.

Creating Component Types.29 On the File menu. 31 Proceed to the next lesson. and click OK. and click Apply. Creating Component Types In this lesson. Notice the chord changes width. 10 Select 89x38 for Name. enter 64mm for Chord Width. 8 In the New dialog box. 9 In the Family Types dialog box. click New. In the final exercise. click Save As. Creating Multiple Component Types In this exercise. under Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 64x38 for Name. The truss returns to its original designed value. click New. under Family Types. Create new types 4 On the Design Bar. create types for those most frequently used in your projects. TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. NOTE When creating new components. 11 Click OK. click Family Types. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. Open the truss family for editing 1 Select a floor truss. 6 In the New dialog box. and click Apply. click Edit Family. 30 In the Save As dialog box. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project. creating predefined types can speed up the design process. 2 On the Options Bar. you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. under Dimensions. 722 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length. enter 89x38 for Name. and click OK.

22 On the File menu. click Edit Family. select 89x38. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. select m_WWF3. 21 In the Project Browser. enter 6000 for length.Southeast Isometric. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. 400))) 6 Click Apply. <result-if-true>. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. and click OK. 2 On the Options Bar. Creating Component Types | 723 . under Dimensions. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar.Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. click Save. click Apply. 286. if(Length < 9000. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. and click OK. click Family Types. under 3D Views. select 64x38. 16 In the Type Selector. double-click 3D . select Override parameter values of existing types. click Load into Projects.rvt. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space. and click Yes. click Beam. enter 8000 for length. Notice the truss depth increases. 20 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Reload Family dialog box. 13 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 400. 350. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise. 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. Creating Conditional Formulas. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. if(Length < 7500. click Modify. Notice the two beam types. Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog box.

double-click Level 1. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate. and click OK. 16 On the File menu.Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 11 In the Reload Family dialog box. 17 Close any open files. 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint. 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1. You have completed this tutorial. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change. double-click 3D . under Floor Plans.Southeast Isometric. Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. select m_WWF3. 724 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . select Override parameter values of existing types. click Load into Projects. and click Yes. under 3D Views.rvt. click Save. 14 In the Project Browser.

Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. 725 . you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. Finally. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed.Area Analysis 21 In this tutorial. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes.

View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. your values will be different. under Length. select m2 Click OK. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click OK. expand Floor Plans. These schemes define spatial relationships. For Rounding. select mm. and click Area Analysis. 6 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. Open the c_Area. In the Area Settings dialog box.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. there are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. select Millimeters. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 3 Under Area. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags. TIP If the Area Settings tab is not visible. click the Training Files icon. For Unit Suffix. Click OK. select Square meters. expand Views (all). you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Project Units. 4 In the Project Units dialog box. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags. 2 In the Project Units dialog box. 726 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . In the left pane of the Open dialog box. For Unit Suffix. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. In the final exercise. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. select 2 decimal places. right-click in the Design Bar. it is not necessary in this exercise. If you are using metric units. click Open. click Area Settings.rvt file located in the Common folder.

and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. the system-computed height defaults to the level. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. 10 In the New Area Plan dialog box. When you select Yes in this dialog box. forming a closed loop.7 In the Area Setting dialog box. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). If you select No. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. or 0. ■ At System Computed Height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. ■ 8 Click Cancel. Using Area Analysis Tools | 727 . under Views (all). click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. 13 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. 14 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. Create a gross building area plan 9 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. click Area Plan. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. click Area Tag. you must manually add these boundary lines. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. ■ 11 When the informational dialog box displays. click the Room Calculations tab. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. 12 In the Project Browser. At Specified Height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated.

Click OK. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. and store area. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). A room tag measures the area enclosed within the exterior face of room-defining walls. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. click Area Plan. click Area Boundary. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. Next.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 15 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. Add area boundary lines 19 On the Design Bar. 18 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. common areas. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 17 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. 16 In the New Area Plan dialog box. you create a new area plan for rentable space. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. 728 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass.

click . When you add area boundary lines. When you pick the walls. 22 On the Design Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. you can either draw them or pick them. If you do not select this option. 24 On the Design Bar. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. Using Area Analysis Tools | 729 .20 On the Options Bar. 21 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. 23 In the upper left corner of the building model. click Modify. click Area Tag. 25 Select the area tag you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model.

click Area Tag. 33 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. click . 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. Click OK.27 In the Element Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 29 Add the tag to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. 31 On the Options Bar. 730 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name. Select Office area for Area Type. In the Element Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 30 On the Design Bar. 28 On the Design Bar. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. Click OK. add a tag in the common area to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. Select Office area for Area Type. click Modify and select the tag. Click OK.

Notice that within the two store areas. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4.34 Add an area tag to the building model core. Using Area Analysis Tools | 731 . Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. enter Core for Name. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. 35 Add the last two area tags to the two areas on the right side of the building model. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. and select Store Area for Area Type.

Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Save.36 On the File menu. click Color Fill. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. 37 Navigate to your preferred directory. and when the color legend displays. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. name the project Area-in progress. In this exercise. and click Save. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. 732 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . click to place it. In the next exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Create a color fill plan 1 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar.rvt.

select Areas (Rentable). click the Fields tab. select Area Type and click Add. 5 In the New Schedule dialog box. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. under Category. Using Area Analysis Tools | 733 . 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog box. 7 Under Available fields. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes.3 When the dialog box displays.

The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog box are displayed as column headings within the schedule. 734 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis .9 Click OK.

In this tutorial. curtain systems. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. you can specify the view to display massing elements. If you modify a massing face. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. 735 . you then need to update the building face. building elements. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. and roofs. floors. After you make building elements. or both. At any time.Massing 22 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project.

you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. and click 6 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. and cutting geometry. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. floor. You assign the default wall. under Floor Plans.rvt file located in the Metric folder. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. roofs.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. click Create Mass. Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. sweeps. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. on the Options Bar. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. and click Massing. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. double-click Level 1. 3 Click OK in the Name dialog box to accept the default name Mass 1. and floors. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 736 | Chapter 22 Massing . TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. 5 On the Sketch Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. 4 On the Design Bar. Open the m_Massing_Start. click Lines. click Open.

20 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. click the Value for Material. click Extrusion Properties. 15 On the Sketch Design Bar. click . click Lines. and click OK. and click OK. 18 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. on the Options Bar. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. 9 In the Materials dialog box. click Finish Sketch. enter 1550 mm for the Offset. click Extrusion Properties. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Constraints. 21 In the Materials dialog box.7 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). click the Value for Material. and then click . 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click Level 1. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Reference. 12 On the View toolbar. Using Massing Tools | 737 . This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. 19 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Finish Sketch. under Materials and Finishes. 23 On the Design Bar. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. and click OK. under Materials and Finishes. and click 16 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 17 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. under Constraints. select Mass (Transparent) for Name. Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. and then click . 14 On the Design Bar. Create next extrusion form 13 In the Project Browser.

double-click West. 26 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. 28 In the drawing area. and click OK. select Pick a plane. TIP If necessary. double-click {3D} to see the results. Sketch the blend base 31 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. 30 On the Sketch Design Bar. The second form is on top of the first form. under Views (all). Continue creation of next massing form 25 In the Project Browser.24 In the Project Browser. 29 Click to select the face. under Elevations (Building Elevation). press TAB to highlight the entire face. highlight the larger form. and click on the Options Bar. 27 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Lines. under Views (all). 738 | Chapter 22 Massing .

you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. 34 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. and delete the vertical construction line. 35 On the Options Bar. Next. click Modify. click . and click to select the line start point. 37 On the Design Bar. 36 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 38 Select the arc and the horizontal line. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. click . Using Massing Tools | 739 . click . 39 On the Edit toolbar.32 On the Options Bar. TIP If you do not see this option. 33 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown.

under Elevations (Building Elevation). Sketching the blend top 42 On the Design Bar. click 47 Create an arc as shown. and click OK. click 45 Sketch the horizontal line as shown.40 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. click . click Edit Top. 48 On the Design Bar. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. click Blend Properties. under Views (all). 50 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Options Bar. 44 On the Design Bar. double-click East. 740 | Chapter 22 Massing . . 49 In the Element Properties dialog box. 43 In the Project Browser. 51 On the View toolbar. click Finish Sketch. 41 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. . click Lines and. on the Options Bar.

6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. 7 Using the same technique. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the drawing area. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options bar. m_Massing_Start. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. double-click Level 1. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. In the next exercise. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. select the mass. click and enter 15000 for Offset. as shown. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. In this exercise.52 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model.rvt. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. click Ref Plane. Using Massing Tools | 741 . under Views (all). you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model.

742 | Chapter 22 Massing . In this exercise. click and select Chain. on the View Control Bar.When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. on the Options Bar.rvt. click Save As. 18 On the Mass Design Bar. 19 On the File menu. 16 On the Design Bar. and then click Hidden Line. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. 9 On the Design Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. click Finish Mass. 20 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. click Lines and. click Finish Sketch. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. When sketching each extrusion. under Materials and Finishes. 15 Click OK. snap the corners to the intersections. and 0 for Extrusion Start. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . click Void Form ➤  Void Extrusion. specify Mass (Transparent) for Material. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. enter 12000 for Extrusion End. 12 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. 14 Under Constraints.

and 9000 mm for Depth. 12000 mm for Height. click Open. Open Box. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width. and click OK. and click OK. and click Apply. 11000 mm for Height. Finally. and click Apply. click New. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. click the Training Files icon. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. 9 Click OK. 18000 mm for Height. and 6000 mm for Depth.rfa. enter 15000 mm for Width. and click Apply. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. 10 On the File menu. 5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width. click Family Types. click Save As. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file. you create new family types from a mass family file. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name. 3 In the Name dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rfa. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. In this exercise. under Other. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. and 18000 mm for Depth.Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 743 .

select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. click the Training Files icon. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 4 On the File menu.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. under Views (all). Arc Dome. 9 In the Type Selector. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. You also load other existing mass families and place them. 10 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 744 | Chapter 22 Massing . 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Open.rfa family files. 6 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder.rfa.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Semi Barrel Vault.rfa. Open the m_Massing_In-place. 3 On the View Control Bar. 2 In the Project Browser. 1 If not already selected. click Place Mass. 7 Open the Box-Training. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families.rfa. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. and Triangle.

19 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. click Place Mass. and click . click Place Mass. select Rotate after placement. 21 In the Type Selector. 14 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 26 In the drawing area. 17 On the Design Bar. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. click Modify. select the 3 boxes. 22 On the Options Bar. enter 90 for Angle. click Modify. 16 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. 12 Select the box. 18 Press CTRL. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 745 . select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. and click to place the mass. 25 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. and click OK twice. click Modify. 24 On the Options Bar. and click . 20 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select the triangle. 13 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter.11 On the Design Bar. 23 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 15 In the Type Selector.

you join these mass elements. Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. and click OK twice. 32 Select the box and click . In the next exercise. 35 On the View menu. 33 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. In this exercise. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. and click OK twice. 31 Place the box mass family as shown. click Place Mass. click . select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm.27 Select the triangle. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. 34 On the View toolbar. 30 In the Type Selector. 29 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Orient ➤ Northeast. 746 | Chapter 22 Massing . 28 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. and click .

click .Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise. 4 Select the triangle. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. . and then press ESC to see the result. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. NOTE When you join geometry. Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown.rvt file. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 747 .

6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. click for Axis. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. click 8 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. enter SM. on the Edit toolbar.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 748 | Chapter 22 Massing .

. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element.12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. click . Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. 17 Press ESC to see the result. In this exercise. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. you joined mass elements together. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 749 . You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. and then select the triangle.

click Modify. double-click Site. click . 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. 7 In the Type Selector. under Views (all). TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. 10 On the Options Bar. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. enter 90 degrees for Angle. 3 On the Design Options toolbar. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. clear Curved. 2 On the Window menu. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. 750 | Chapter 22 Massing . select Sloped (primary). Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 1 On the Design Bar.rvt. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. 8 On the Options Bar. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. click Place Mass. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. and then click OK. and select the triangle mass element. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. select Rotate after placement.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson.

14 In the drawing area. select the 2 semi barrel vaults.13 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. click . click Modify. and click Wireframe. under Elevations. 23 In the Project Browser. 24 On the View Control Bar. and click OK twice. 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. click Place Mass. and click . select the three arc domes. under Views (all). 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown. TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. click . double-click North. 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. 16 On the View Control Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. Using Mass Elements with Design Options | 751 . Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. 21 In the drawing area. click Modify. 18 In the Type Selector. and click . select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. and click Wireframe.

you placed mass elements into Design Options. In this exercise. 32 Click the value for Design Option. 35 Click Close and close the warning that displays.rvt. 29 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 30 On the View menu. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. under Views (all). and click OK. 36 On the File menu. 752 | Chapter 22 Massing . you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. 33 On the Design Options toolbar.Create a Design Option set 26 Select the three arc domes and the two semi barrel vaults. select Curved from the Design Option menu. 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box. 27 On the Design Options toolbar. click Visibility/Graphics. select Curved and. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. under Option. click Make Primary. click . You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. click . select Curved. double-click {3D}. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. click the Design Options tab. you can make it the primary option. clear Sloped. 34 In the Design Options dialog box. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes.

3 On the View menu. 5 In the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click the Training Files icon. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 753 . you pick massing faces to create walls. and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. click . The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. click Open. click Wall by Face. Open the m_Massing_Building_Components.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.Brick on CMU. click Orient ➤ Southeast. click to show the massing model. under Views (all). 6 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View toolbar. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. select Basic Wall: Exterior . double-click {3D}.

9 On the Design Bar. NOTE If a Warning dialog box is displayed. 16 In the Type Selector. double-click Level 5. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). double-click Level 3. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. under Views (all). ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces.8 In the Project Browser. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. 754 | Chapter 22 Massing . Click Wall by Face. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 12 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. 14 In the Project Browser.

If desired. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. you can select the overlapping curtain wall.18 Select all the faces shown in red. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. double-click Level 9. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. and click Wireframe. Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise. under Floor Plans. 21 On the Design Bar. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. 19 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. you pick massing faces to create floors. under Views (all). click . 20 On the View Control Bar. click Wall by Face. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 755 . You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping.

click Visibility/Graphics. 4 Click OK. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 756 | Chapter 22 Massing . click Floor Area Faces. 6 On the Options Bar. select all levels. Curtain Systems. double-click {3D}.rvt. and click OK. 2 On the View menu. under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. clear Curtain Panels. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. and Walls.

and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 10 On the Options Bar. click Floor Area Faces. click Orient ➤ Northeast. 11 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 757 . select Levels 1-4. and click OK.8 On the View menu. clear Exclude Options. 9 Press CTRL.

click Floor Area Faces. verify that Select Multiple is selected. click Create Floors. under Views (all). 19 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces. 16 In the Project Browser. and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. double-click Mass Schedule. click . double-click Level 1. under Schedules/Quantities. 21 On the View toolbar. 22 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass. 20 On the Options Bar. 758 | Chapter 22 Massing .13 Press CTRL. 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 14 On the Options Bar. select Level 1. under Floor Plans. 18 On the Options Bar. click Floor by Face.

you pick massing faces to create roofs. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 759 . 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown.In this exercise. click Roof by Face. You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. under Views (all). you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors.

select Curtain Panels. click Create Roof. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. click Create Roof.4 In the Type Selector. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. 11 On the View menu. Curtain Systems. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. click Create Roof. select Basic Roof : Generic . and then click OK. 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. 9 On the Options Bar. Your model should now look as shown. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. and Walls. 760 | Chapter 22 Massing . click Visibility/Graphics. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. 5 On the Options Bar.400mm. 12 Click the Model Categories tab.

double-click {3D}. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 5 Press CTRL. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 761 . be sure that Select Multiple is selected. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm.In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. click Curtain System by Face.

6 On the Options Bar. click Create System. 7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes. 762 | Chapter 22 Massing .

Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 763 . In this exercise. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 Click Modify to exit the command. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. click Create System. select the blended form on the in-place mass.8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.

clear Curtain Panels. 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click . 7 Enter Larger Size for Name. 2 On the View menu. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. enter 30000 for Width. 1 In the Project Browser. and Walls.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Floors. Curtain Systems. Next. click Edit/New. click OK. Roofs. and then click OK. and click OK. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 764 | Chapter 22 Massing . click Duplicate. under Views (all). 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Floor Plans.rvt. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Site.

13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. 12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. clear Exclude Options. click Modify. 14 Open the 3D view to see the result. 11 On the Options Bar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 765 .10 On the Design Bar.

you want to select the smaller one. click Remake. In the next steps.The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. click OK. 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog box. 766 | Chapter 22 Massing . click . Also. 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown. TIP To select the curtain wall. under Views (all). remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 19 On the View toolbar. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. 15 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 17 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1.

20 Select the roof as shown. 21 On the Options Bar. you will notice that Revit Building resized the floors. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 767 .TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls. click Remake.

rvt. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. In this exercise. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.22 Select the arc dome curtain system. The 3D view now shows only the building shell. you changed the size of an existing mass family. 768 | Chapter 22 Massing . you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing. and click Remake. 1 Open the 3D view.

You might create the model shown. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. and click Duplicate. click All to select all categories. 4 Rename the view 3D . In this exercise. 7 Clear one of the check boxes.Massing only. 9 Select Mass. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 6 On the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. If desired. to the building shell. 5 On the View menu. and click OK. you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components. such as columns and an extruded roof.Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 3 In the Project Browser. This concludes the massing tutorial. right-click on the 3D view. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 769 .

770 | Chapter 22 Massing .

771 .Site 23 In this tutorial. you use the site tools in Autodesk Revit Building to add and modify site components within a project.

You add property lines manually. 772 | Chapter 23 Site . and walkways. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. click Toposurface. Using the first method.Using Site Tools In this lesson. Open the m_First_Project. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 4 On the Options Bar. and click Site. expand Floor Plans. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. expand Views (all). and double-click Site. you add a building pad to the site. right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. and then modify the data. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. This project file was created using the default metric template. In the second part of this exercise. click Open. you create a toposurface using two different methods. islands. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. 5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. 3 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. convert the data to a table. In the final exercises. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. click Point. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas.

7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm. Use the following illustration as a reference. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point.6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. 8 On the Options Bar. Using Site Tools | 773 .

and 18000 mm absolute elevations.10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. and click Shading with Edges. 774 | Chapter 23 Site . 12000 mm. and click OK. under Additional Contours. This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. under Increment. 11 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style. click Finish Surface. enter 1500 mm. Use the following illustration as a reference. 15000 mm. click Site Settings. 15 On the View Control Bar. 13 In the Site Settings dialog box. 12 On the Settings menu. 14 On the View toolbar. click . Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle.

Until it is exploded. Before importing the contour data. it is considered an import symbol. and press ENTER. click the Training Files icon. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. under Floor Plans. click Modify. under Views (all). 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. 21 Click the Level 2 text. Under Import or Link. 26 In the Import/Link dialog box: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click the elevation value. enter 1000 mm. double-click Site. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. on the Standard toolbar. 28 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. Under Layer/Level Colors. click to delete it. and press ENTER. Using Site Tools | 775 . modify the level names and elevations. 25 On the File menu. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog box. click Modify. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. select Current view only and choose Select for Layers. and double-click South. 29 Select the imported topography. and press ENTER. under Views (all). 18 In the Project Browser. select Preserve colors. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). rename the level Basement. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. Click Open. click Yes. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. DXF. DGN. 24 In the Project Browser. SAT.16 On the View toolbar. rename the level Base Site Elevation. 23 Click the Level 1 text.

When you select the import symbol. 34 Under Visibility. click the Annotations Categories tab. click Toposurface. and then click OK. 776 | Chapter 23 Site . 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog box. 32 On the View menu. clear Elevations. click Pin Position. 36 On the Design Bar. The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. 31 On the Design Bar. select it. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. clear C_INDX. when the edges highlight.30 On the Edit menu. click Modify. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. click Visibility/Graphics.

you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. click Finish Surface. and click Save. click Save As. Adding Property Lines. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. Using Site Tools | 777 . NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.rvt. Using the first method. Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. click . Using the second method.39 On the Design Bar. 40 On the View toolbar. 42 On the View toolbar. this project file is required in its current state. 43 On the File menu. name the project Site-in progress. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. you add property lines using two methods. 45 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Property Line. Using the 3-point Arc tool. click Lines. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. select Create property lines by sketching.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. On the Design Bar. and click OK. 4 On the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. If you have not completed the previous exercise. click Lines. 778 | Chapter 23 Site . 6 On the Design Bar. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. Site-in progress. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Finish Sketch. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. Select and delete the right vertical line. do so before continuing. Click Modify. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. add an arc line on the right.rvt.

click 12 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog box depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. A warning dialog box is displayed. and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. click OK. click OK. select the lines. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Using Site Tools | 779 . Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. click Property Line. 14 In the Property Lines dialog box. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. 10 In the Property Lines dialog box. when they highlight. 9 In the warning dialog box. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. 15 Starting in Row #1. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone.7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. select Edit Table. on the Standard toolbar. to delete them.

21 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 19 In the Tags dialog box. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. 780 | Chapter 23 Site . Before adding property line segment tags. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. 24 On the View menu. 27 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. This means there is no gap in the property lines. The tags display more prominently in this view. 29 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. If the gap is not closed. and click Drafting. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. click Model Graphics Style. click to place it. right-click in the Design Bar. 22 Select M_Property Line Tag. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. and click OK. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. 20 Click Load. clear Leader. 26 Under Visibility. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. and click Shading with Edges. 23 In the Tags dialog box. and open the folder. 16 Click OK. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments.rfa and click Open. 30 Tag the three remaining property lines. 31 On the View Control Bar. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. open the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Annotations folder. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. click to place the property lines. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. click Training Files. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. 28 On the Options Bar. click Visibility/Graphics.dwg and click OK. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. click Tag.Notice that after you complete the last line. click the Imported Categories tab.

33 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. In the final step. In the Object Styles dialog box. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. Using Site Tools | 781 . NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you created two sets of property lines. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. 4 Under Modify Subcategories.rvt. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. this project file is required in its current state. click New. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. 2 On the Settings menu. In this exercise. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog box. and click Wireframe. click Object Styles. enter the name Working Contour. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography.32 On the File menu. Site-in progress. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog box. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. In the next exercise. click Model Graphics Style. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. verify that it is a subcategory of Topography. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings. click Save.

click Site Settings. Working Contour. Under Line Color.0 mm. Under Range Type. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. 7 Click OK.6 In the Object Styles dialog box. enter 1000. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. 782 | Chapter 23 Site . Creating Topographic Subregions. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. Under Subcategory. select a shade of Brown. 10 Under Additional Contours. 11 Click OK. In this exercise. 12 On the File menu. select Single Value. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 In the Site Settings dialog box. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. select Working Contour. under Contour Line Display. select Dash dot. click Close. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. The next exercise requires a new dataset. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. Under Line Pattern. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. The object style subcategory.

parking areas. you create subregions in order to define roads. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.In the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. and islands. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. such as material. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Using Site Tools | 783 . you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. try to replicate the location and proportion. and islands. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. click Subregion. parking areas. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. you create topographic subregions to define roads. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. click Open. NOTE In the Metric dataset. 2 On the Design Bar. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. click Lines. Open the m_Site. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Although the exact dimensions are not important.

7 In the Element Properties dialog box.Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Properties. When you finish the sketch in a later step. 8 On the Design Bar. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. and double-click Topography Schedule. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. 784 | Chapter 23 Site . click the Value for Material. and click OK. and click OK.Tarmacadam. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. under Materials and Finishes. 6 In the Materials dialog box. click Finish Sketch. 9 On the View menu. click Shading with Edges. enter Parking for Name. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box. select Site . under Identity Data.Tarmacadam for Name. expand Schedules/Quantities. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each.

13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. under Floor Plans. double-click Topography Schedule. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. 12 On the View Control Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. 22 In the upper-right parking area. 14 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. Notice that the project area has increased. Delete overlapping lines. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. 18 In the Project Browser. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. and click Hidden Line. click Model Graphics Style. click Subregion. click Edit Boundary. 17 On the View Control Bar. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. and click Shading with Edges. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. they display within this schedule. click Finish Sketch. double-click Site. Within each subregion. 16 On the Design Bar. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. Using Site Tools | 785 . click Model Graphics Style. As you create new subregions. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. click Lines. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. In this training project.NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. under Floor Plans.

Grass for Name. click Finish Sketch. You must sketch each region separately.Grass.23 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click OK.Grass. 25 In the Materials dialog box. Name each region Island . Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. under Floor Plans. click the Value for Material. 786 | Chapter 23 Site . and apply the material Site . 24 In the Element Properties dialog box. 28 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. select Site .Grass for Name. under Materials and Finishes. under Identity Data. 27 On the Design Bar. click Properties. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Schedules/Quantities. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. 29 In the Project Browser. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. enter Island . double-click Topography Schedule. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box.

click Finish Sketch. and apply the material Concrete .walkway. under Floor Plans. WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. 33 On the Design Bar. Name the subregion Walkway. under Schedules/Quantities. 34 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. Using Site Tools | 787 .30 In the Project Browser. Add the concrete walkway 31 In the Project Browser. click Subregion. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. 35 On the Design Bar. click Lines. double-click Topography Schedule.Cast-in-Situ Concrete . double-click Site. 32 On the Design Bar. Notice that the schedule has been updated.

click Save As. 38 Navigate to your preferred folder. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state.rvt. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. Grading the Toposurface.NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. there is still only one toposurface. 788 | Chapter 23 Site . the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. under Schedules/Quantities. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Save. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. 37 On the File menu. Notice that the schedule has been updated. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. 36 In the Project Browser. When you use the grading tool. Site tutorial-in progress. double-click Topography Schedule.rvt. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

under Floor Plans. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. 2 Select the toposurface. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. 7 In the Graded Region dialog box. click . Using Phasing. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. click Modify.Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Design Bar. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. double-click Site. and click Select and Edit. see the tutorial. 3 On the Options Bar. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. under Phasing. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. Using Site Tools | 789 . select Copy Internal Points. A warning dialog box is displayed. 5 On the Design Bar. select Existing for Phase Created. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. 8 Select the topographic surface. click Graded Region.

and new.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 790 | Chapter 23 Site . 10 Press DELETE. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. demolished. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.

12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. click Point.11 On the View Control Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. Using Site Tools | 791 . Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. and click Hidden Line. click Model Graphics Style. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 13 Press DELETE. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm.

The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat.17 On the Design Bar. click . This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Model Graphics Style. click View Properties. 20 On the View toolbar. and click Shading with Edges. 18 On the View toolbar. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. 19 On the View Control Bar. The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. 792 | Chapter 23 Site . click . click Finish Surface.

2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. and click OK. this project file is required in its current state. 23 Select the toposurface. If you have an existing building model. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. specify Existing for Phase. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. under Floor Plans. Site tutorial-in progress. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. you create a building pad. the Pick Walls command is active. under Phasing. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Therefore. double-click Site. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box.rvt. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. click Lines. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. When you add a building pad. Using Site Tools | 793 . under Phasing. click View Properties. 24 On the View menu. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. 26 On the File menu. you can delete it. 3 On the Design Bar. NOTE By default. 4 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. specify New Construction for Phase. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Save. only the original toposurface displays. Only the graded topography displays.22 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Pad. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. Adding a Building Pad. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. and delete it.

click 8 On the View toolbar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 7 On the View toolbar.5 On the Design Bar. 6 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style. . Notice the new building 794 | Chapter 23 Site . . click pad. click Finish Sketch. and click Shading with Edges.

rvt. NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. click Parking Component. 3 In the Type Selector. click Save. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Using Site Tools | 795 . NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . Site tutorial-in progress. this project file is required in its current state. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. double-click Site. you add parking and planting components to the site surface.9 On the File menu. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Adding Site Components. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.90 deg. and select the parking space. Adding Site Components In this exercise. under Floor Plans.

click 9 On the View toolbar. Notice the new parking Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. . 796 | Chapter 23 Site . double-click Site. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Site Component. click spaces. 8 On the View toolbar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. . Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. choose any tree type. under Floor Plans. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below.7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. 12 In the Type Selector.

and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. Using Site Tools | 797 . 15 On the View toolbar. 14 On the View toolbar.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. click . click .

and click OK.rvt. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered.NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. In the following illustration. double-click Site. Tagging Site and Parking Components. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. click Apply. 16 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 On the View menu. Site tutorial-in progress. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. click Tag All Not Tagged. and click Apply. click Hidden Line. this project file is required in its current state. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Save. 798 | Chapter 23 Site . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. In the following exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees.

Site tutorial-in progress. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click the Fields tab. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Mark. 4 Under Available fields. enter Size.rvt. 7 Under Fields. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you create a parking schedule. 5 Under Available fields. The parking schedule is displayed. 7 On the File menu. select Parking for Category. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. and click Add. click Schedule/Quantities. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. enter Space. and click Add. 8 Under Fields. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. and under Heading. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state.NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. 6 Click the Formatting tab. If necessary. and under Heading. and click OK. select Mark. click Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules. Using Site Tools | 799 . select Type. select Type. and click OK.

This closes all the views except the parking schedule. 13 In the Parking Schedule. finish numbering the remaining spaces. click Tile. under Space. click Save. double-click Site. 15 On the File menu. 14 In the Parking Schedule. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule.9 On the Window menu. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. 800 | Chapter 23 Site . 11 On the Window menu. 10 In the Project Browser. under Space. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. click Close Hidden Windows. 12 In the Site plan. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. number the first three spaces consecutively.

This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. or with those working on a different project. you not only simplify their placement. you also simplify the modification process. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. By grouping objects. and then you create a group for a typical toilet room that is nested within the guest room group. 801 . when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. In this tutorial. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. place. and modify repetitive units.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Autodesk Revit Building. For example. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. all instances in the building model are updated. you create a model group for a typical hotel guest room. You can also nest groups within other groups.

Creating a Group In this exercise. and typical office layouts. 10 Navigate to your preferred directory. expand Groups. and two nightstands. click . expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog box.Creating Groups In this lesson. 9 On the File menu. and press ENTER. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You zoom in so that you can select objects in the room accurately. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. Create a group from drawing objects 4 Press and hold CTRL. and click Rename. 802 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and select the bed. name the file Grouping-in progress. expand Floor Plans. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. Open the m_Grouping. 5 On the Edit toolbar. 7 Right-click Group 1. click the Training Files icon. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. classrooms. 3 Draw a rectangle around the populated room. 8 Enter Typical guest room.rvt. 2 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Specify a view 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. After you create a model group. The view is zoomed in to the selected room. 6 In the Project Browser. click Open. desk. and double-click Level 2. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include hotel rooms. Placing a Group. and expand Model. and click Save. chair. click Save As. you create a model group for a typical hotel room.

Drag a group into position 3 In the Project Browser. 2 Drag the group origin to the wall intersection directly below the entry door.Placing a Group In this exercise.rvt. Mirror a group 6 In the drawing area. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. select the original instance of the group. You also mirror an existing instance of a group. Modify the origin of a group 1 In the drawing area. 4 Snap the origin to the wall intersection below the entry door. Creating Groups | 803 . A second instance of the group is added to the drawing. as shown. select Typical guest room and drag it to the room below the original instance of the group. Grouping-in progress. 7 On the Edit toolbar. you use drag and drop functionality to place a new instance of a group in the floor plan. 8 Select the wall abutted by the desk and tub of the original instance as the axis of reflection. select the group. click Finish. 5 On the Options Bar. using an adjacent wall as the axis of reflection. click .

select the mirrored instance of the Typical guest room group. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.You should now have three instances of the Typical guest room group in your model: two with the original orientation and one mirrored. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Grouping-in progress. Modifying a Group In this exercise. you make changes to a single instance of a group. Modifying a Group. 1 In the drawing area. click Save. When you finish the editing routine. click Edit Group. 2 On the Options Bar. 9 On the File menu. 804 | Chapter 24 Grouping . all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. as shown.rvt.

When you make changes to a nested group. and select the desk and chair. 7 On the Design Bar. 3 Press and hold CTRL. 6 Click the exterior wall as the move end point. and is contained in every new instance of the host group that you place in the building model. the host group is also updated. Creating Nested Groups. 9 Proceed to the next lesson. All other elements in the model are grayed out. click . Creating Nested Groups In this lesson. 4 On the Edit toolbar. Creating Nested Groups | 805 . click Save. The edge of the desk is aligned with the exterior wall. 8 On the File menu. you create a group that you add to a previously created group. All instances of the Typical guest room are updated to reflect the change. 5 Click near the left edge of the desk as the move start point.The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. The new group is considered nested within the host group. This ensures that the modifications are propagated when each new instance of the host group is added to the building model and also when each stand-alone instance of the nested group is added. click Finish Group.

3 In the Project Browser. and the wall separating the bathroom and closet. 2 On the Edit toolbar. you create a group for a toilet room that you add to the guest room group. Create a group 1 In the original instance of the Typical guest room group. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. In the selection.rvt. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. make sure you also include both doors and their host walls. Change the origin of a group 5 Select the original instance of Typical guest room. The new group is then nested within the original group. right-click Group 1. 806 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Grouping-in progress. 4 Enter Typical toilet room. select all the elements that make up the toilet room and closet. expand Groups. When you nest the toilet room in the guest room. and click Rename. expand Model. and press ENTER.Creating a Nested Group In this exercise. click . 6 Drag the origin of the group to the intersection of the corridor wall and the guest room wall nearest the tub. which acts as the host.

The elements of the group are grayed out in every instance. The Typical toilet room group is nested in the Typical guest room group. click Save. click Finish Group. Add a component to the model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Grouping-in progress. the host group is also updated so that new instances of either group contain the new component. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 In the drawing area. 2 In the Type Selector. select the Typical toilet room group. 9 On the Options Bar. select m_Pedestal_Sink-3D. everything else is available for selection. Because the modified group is nested. 3 In the drawing area. When you edit the group to add the component. and all instances are updated to include the nested group. you add a component to a single instance of the nested toilet room group. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying a Nested Group In this exercise. click Edit Group. Modifying a Nested Group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Component.rvt. place the cursor over one of the toilet rooms and press the spacebar three times to rotate the sink to the orientation shown. Creating Nested Groups | 807 . click Add To Group. 12 On the File menu. all instances of the nested group are updated in the building model. 11 On the Design Bar.Create a nested group 7 On the Options Bar. verify that Multiple is clear.

11 On the Design Bar. click Edit Group.4 Place the sink on the wall with the toilet in any instance of the Typical toilet room. Edit a nested group 6 Move the cursor over the same instance of the toilet room group in which you placed the sink. click Add To Group. and select the nested toilet room group. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 Press TAB. 8 On the Options Bar. 808 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 10 In the drawing area. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. select the sink. click Finish Group.

When you load the group from the library into a new project. you use the Duplicate command to create a group based on an existing group. A new group definition (Typical guest room 2) is displayed in the Project Browser. 12 On the File menu. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. having created a group that represents a typical layout. you save it to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. Lastly. Working with Groups. and then save the tags as an attached detail group. click Save. and press ENTER. but automatically create a new group as part of the process to fix the group. you add door tags to a group. Working with Groups In this lesson.All instances of the nested group are updated with the change. You use functionality that allows you to not only fix inconsistencies among instances of a group. You then place the new group in the building model. and click Rename. You then customize the new group for use in the current building model. 3 Enter Corner guest room. Duplicating a Group In this exercise. you draw an axis of reflection at the midpoint of the building model so that the group is mirrored from its location at the top of the building model to a location at the bottom. under Groups. In subsequent exercises. and click Duplicate. Grouping-in progress.rvt. You create a group based on an existing group by using the Duplicate command. You also create a detail group in the level 2 floor plan that you add to the building model in a different floor plan view. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups. because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. and customize it so that it fits in the available space and has the correct group nested within it. After you finish the modified group. 2 Right-click Typical guest room 2. Working with Groups | 809 . 13 Proceed to the next lesson. right-click Typical guest room. Use Project Browser to duplicate a group 1 In the Project Browser. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects.

16 Select the same toilet room group. and select the desk and chair. to specify the group origin. and drag it into the corner guest room. click Remove From Group. click . click Edit Group.Place a duplicated group 4 Drag Corner guest room from the Project Browser to the vacant room in the northwest corner of the building. and press DELETE. 11 On the Edit toolbar. 7 After a warning message displays. Nest a group 17 In the Project Browser. select Corner toilet room. 10 Press and hold CTRL. 9 On the Options Bar. 12 Move the desk and chair so that they are within the room. 14 Select the toilet room. 13 On the Design Bar. click Finish Group. select the Corner guest room group. click Finish. click OK. Notice that the desk overlaps the exterior wall. Edit a duplicated group 8 In the drawing area. This is because the corner room is smaller than the interior rooms. 6 On the Options Bar. 5 Click at the upper-right corner of the room. 15 On the Design Bar. 810 | Chapter 24 Grouping . where the corridor wall and the exterior wall intersect.

30 Proceed to the next exercise. 23 On the Design Bar. TIP If a warning appears indicating that there are errors that cannot be ignored. 27 Click the midpoint of the corridor wall as the start point of the axis of reflection as shown. click Edit Group. TIP To help find the midpoint of the wall. 21 On the Design Bar. A new instance of the Corner guest room group is added to the southwest corner of the building model. click Unjoin Elements to resolve the errors. 29 On the File menu. for Axis. click 26 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. click Finish Group. 22 In the drawing area. select the Corner guest room group. Mirror along a drawn axis of reflection 24 In the drawing area. click Add To Group. and click to specify the end point. 19 In the drawing area. select the Corner toilet room group. 28 Drag the cursor to the left. select the Corner guest room group. click Save. 25 On the Edit toolbar.Use the inside corner of the exterior wall and the corridor wall as the origin of the group. Creating a Detail Group. past the exterior wall. click . staying perpendicular to the corridor wall. Working with Groups | 811 . enter SM on your keyboard to limit snaps to midpoints. 20 On the Options Bar. click Finish to finish placing the group.

you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. click to draw a rectangular region. 5 On the Design Bar. click to add an arc leader. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. 7 On the Options Bar. and select a point on the interior of the vertical wall. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. 3 Click the lower-left endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. and click Modify on the Design Bar. 812 | Chapter 24 Grouping .Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 9 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. click Filled Region. Draw a filled region 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. Add a text note 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 4 Move the cursor down and to the right. 8 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 10 Enter Tile. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Grouping-in progress. click Text.rvt.

click Save. Using Attached Detail Groups. double-click Level 3. Add a group instance to a different drawing view 18 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and expand Detail. Working with Groups | 813 . select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. and press ENTER. as shown. you add door tags to the Typical toilet room group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. click Tag. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. 20 On the File menu. you must manually attach it to each instance of the Typical toilet room group. 3 On the Options Bar. Because the detail group contains variables. 13 In the Project Browser. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. Grouping-in progress. 14 Right-click Group 1. 15 Enter Elevator lobby tile. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. 12 On the Edit toolbar. and select the note and the filled region. as shown. expand Groups. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. clear Leader. 4 Place two door tags in the original instance of the Typical toilet room. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Modify a group origin 16 In the drawing area.rvt. under Floor Plans. click . 19 Drag an instance of the Elevator lobby tile group from the Project Browser into the level 3 view.Create a detail group 11 Press and hold CTRL. 21 Proceed to the next exercise.

and select the two door tags. and click Rename. press and hold CTRL. (this group is just below the original instance of the Typical guest room group). and select the nested Typical toilet room group. 10 Enter Door tags. 7 On the Edit toolbar. and expand Typical toilet room. select Door tags. 814 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Place a detail group in another group instance 11 Move the cursor over the Typical toilet room group. and press ENTER. expand Attached Detail. 8 In the Project Browser. A warning dialog box is displayed. 13 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog box. informing you that an attached detail group has been created for the Typical toilet room group. press TAB. expand Groups.5 On the Design Bar. The new instance of the attached detail group is added at the same relative position and orientation as in the original instance of the model group. 12 On the Options Bar. 9 Right-click Group 1. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. click Place Detail. click . and click OK. click Modify.

This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. expand Groups. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. click Wall. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog box. 13 Select Typical toilet room. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Sketch walls 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click New ➤ Project. and expand Model. click Load from Library ➤ Load Group. 10 On the Options Bar. 6 On the File menu. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Save a group to a library 1 On the File menu. select Typical toilet room.rvg. click Browse. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Place an instance of the loaded group 12 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. 11 In the drawing area. 3 Click Save. 14 On the File menu. as shown. click OK. drag it into the drawing area. Grouping-in progress. Working with Groups | 815 . navigate to the directory where you saved the group. click OK. click Save. 5 In the New Project dialog box. click the Training Files icon. under Template file. and place it in the upper-right corner of the square. and click Open. 7 In the Load Group dialog box. ■ ■ ■ In the New Project dialog box.NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Saving and Loading Groups.rte file located in the Metric folder.rvt. therefore. select Typical toilet room for Group To Save. and then drag the cursor so that all the walls in the square are 6000 mm long. click to draw a square. and click Open. NOTE Groups containing nested groups cannot be saved. click to specify the start point of the square. Select the m_Tutorial_Default. click Save to Library ➤ Save Group. 2 In the Save Group dialog box.

16 Enter Loaded_Group for File name. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 On the File menu. except for the wall-hosted component for which there is no wall. click Finish. so it is important to place the group accurately in order to use the walls you sketched. you mirror the instance of the Typical toilet room group you added to the new project in the previous exercise. Loaded_Group. Automatically Creating a Group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise.IMPORTANT Be sure to line up the outline of the group with the exterior surface of the walls. The toilet and the tub are wall-hosted components whose hosts are not part of the group. click . 816 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 3 Select the wall shared by the toilet and the sink as the axis of reflection. and click Save. the software gives you the option of fixing the inconsistency by creating a new group. 2 On the Edit toolbar. Because one of the wall-hosted components in the group does not have a wall in the mirrored group. 1 In the drawing area. The new group is created automatically and contains the same components as the existing group. select the instance of Typical toilet room. The Typical toilet room model group is added to the new project. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save. Automatically Creating a Group In this exercise.

and click OK. click Close. a warning dialog box is displayed. 4 In the warning dialog box.Because there is no wall to host the tub in the mirrored instance. The Typical toilet room model group is mirrored. The tub component is not included in the new group because there is no wall to host it. 6 On the Design Bar. Working with Groups | 817 . 7 On the File menu. click Create new group types. 5 In the Fix Inconsistent Groups dialog box. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. click Modify. and a new group (Typical toilet room 2) is created. click Fix Groups.

818 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

After completing level 1. you use the structural tools in Autodesk Revit Building to create a building model skeleton. you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it. 819 . you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model. In the final lesson. columns. You begin by adding the structural walls.Structural 25 In this tutorial. and beams to Level 1.

Open the m_Structural. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints. Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise.rvt file located in the Metric folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls. click the Training Files icon. you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. 820 | Chapter 25 Structural . You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls. click Open.

under Import or Link. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog box. click Import/Link ➤ DWG.rvt. go to the Project Browser. to trace the initial set of structural walls. Select All for Layers. DXF. 6 Under Positioning. 4 In the Import/Link dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Link (instead of import). click the Training Files icon.dwg from the Metric folder. Select Current view only. In this exercise. SAT.Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. Sketching Structural Walls. 7 Click Open. and select m_wall-import. 8 On the File menu. select Invert colors. If necessary. Adding Structural Walls | 821 . you turn off the visibility of the DWG file. you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. and double-click Level 2. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. click Save As. you imported a DWG file. After you trace the walls. DGN. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial. This file is used in the next exercise. 2 On the File menu. expand Views (all). select Automatically place. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan. expand Floor Plans. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. and select Origin to origin.

3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines. In addition.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 5 In the Type Selector. 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. select Basic Wall: Generic . and click Structural. 822 | Chapter 25 Structural . Structural_tutorial. This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them. Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the Structural tab already displays on the Design Bar. rather than the height.Dataset This exercise requires the project file.200mm. you can add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall. First. click Structural Wall. proceed to Step 2. Right-click the Design Bar. Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region.

Click . specify the following: ■ ■ Select Depth. and click to specify the next wall endpoint. Specify Level 1.6 On the Options Bar. you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. In the steps that follow. 8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line. ■ ■ ■ Select Chain. 9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection. and click the next line intersection. 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. 10 Move the cursor to the right. Adding Structural Walls | 823 . Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. and click to specify the wall endpoint.

11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left. 824 | Chapter 25 Structural . 13 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. Use the tools to modify 14 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify to finish the sketch. and double-click Level 2. click . and click to complete the chain of walls. you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking the 3D view. 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines. in the View toolbar. TIP If necessary.

Adding Structural Walls | 825 . click Structural Wall. Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction. sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. 19 On the View toolbar. notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected. 17 Using the bulleted steps below. click Modify to end the wall chain. click . ■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. you may want to zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C.16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. ■ ■ 18 On the Design Bar.

■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. 25 In the Type Selector.dwg. select Basic Wall: Generic . Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. click Structural Wall. Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. double-click Level 2. This is the right extent of the arc. 826 | Chapter 25 Structural . click .Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. clear m_wall-import. specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 26 On the Options Bar. This is the left extent of the arc. and click OK. click the Imported Categories tab. 21 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line.200mm. Click to create a three-point arc. 28 On the Options Bar. ■ 27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc. 23 Under Visibility.

31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown. 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm. click the value. enter 1500.29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown. 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right. If it is not. Adding Structural Walls | 827 . 32 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click Modify.

you create the final structural walls for the project. Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint shown in the illustration below. enter 1500. Both walls are 1200 mm long. 828 | Chapter 25 Structural .34 Select the lower horizontal wall. and press ENTER. 35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. 36 On the Design Bar. clear Chain. click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C. In the steps that follow.

click Modify. click . 39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown. Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps. 41 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Walls | 829 .38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown. 40 On the Design Bar.

you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. You then make minor modifications to their position. In this exercise. double-click Level 2. Structural_tutorial. In the next exercise.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.42 On the File menu. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. click Save. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model. This project file is required. 830 | Chapter 25 Structural . you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls. in its current state.

After you select Entire Walls. Adding Structural Walls | 831 . Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension as shown. On the Options Bar. select it. 8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps. Select Entire Walls for Pick.4 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall. and click OK. click Options to specify the wall pick options. the Options button becomes available. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select . 6 Move the cursor to the left. and when it highlights. Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. select Intersecting Walls. click Modify. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box.

Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown. 832 | Chapter 25 Structural . 11 Click the temporary dimension value. and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B.9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal.

joists.Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial. This project file is required. In the next lesson. you add structural columns. In this exercise. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 833 . you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant. Adding Structural Columns and Beams. click Save. 13 On the File menu. and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. click Undo Edit dimension length. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model. in its current state. several different beam types. Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. 12 On the Edit menu.

6 Add a column to C1 as shown. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 5 On the Options Bar. click Structural Column. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. and you place a column outside of the grids. TIP When adding the column. If necessary. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. zoom in to place the column. select Height. you use the grid intersection tool. and Level 2. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. 834 | Chapter 25 Structural . Structural_tutorial. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary. In addition. 4 In the Type Selector. 2 On the View menu.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise.

and A. click Grid Intersection. 9 Use a crossing selection. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids. and select grids 1-5. and C5. specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5. TIP To create the crossing selection. and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below.7 Add similar columns to C2. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 835 . C3.

This completes this set of columns.10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A. zoom out until you can see all the grids. 15 On the Options Bar. 14 If necessary. 836 | Chapter 25 Structural . All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. Columns A3-5 are shown below. 13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again. click Finish.

click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it. 19 On the Options Bar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 837 . click Modify. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. click Structural Column. B3-5 are shown below. you could not have rotated them independently of each other. click Grid Intersection. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate.Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. click Finish. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. 21 Select column A5 and delete it. 24 On the Design Bar. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR.

4 In the Type Selector. in its current state. Structural_tutorial. This project file is required. you learn how to work with these varied conditions. click . to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. you add beams manually. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. you add structural beams to the building model. Start the beam at the column and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall.25 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all). 2 On the View menu. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Save. In this exercise. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. As you use the beam tool. you used various methods to add structural columns. In the next exercise. 26 On the File menu. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. click Beam. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 838 | Chapter 25 Structural . double-click Level 2. you specify the start and endpoint of the beam. Adding Structural Beams and Girders. Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model.

7. click Beam. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. 9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 11 On the Options Bar. and then move the cursor up to grid A. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. select Girder for Usage. 10 In the Type Selector. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first.7 On the Design Bar. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 839 .

Column Brace Ho o tal riz n Bracing Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67.Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2. When you use the grid tool to place beams. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. 840 | Chapter 25 Structural . the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder. For example. 14 On the Options Bar. Use the following table for other conditions. click Grid. if a beam is joined column-to-column.

24 Select grid 3. and press ENTER. click the temporary dimension value. 22 In the Type Selector. enter 8200. and select grid C. press and hold CTRL. 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. 17 On the Options Bar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 841 . 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. click Grid. click Beam. click Finish. 23 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Design Bar.

and for Usage. notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids. select Girder for Usage. select Girder. click Finish. 27 Using point-to-point insertion. Press ESC to end the chain. select Chain. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. 842 | Chapter 25 Structural . 25 On the Options Bar. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain.Notice beams are added between columns. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar. Click column B5 to add the first beam. 28 On the Options Bar. In addition. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain.

SI. 33 Select grid A. You can also use the shortcut key.29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. 34 On the Options Bar. click Finish. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 843 . 30 On the Options Bar. select Girder for Usage. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4. to snap only to intersections. NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4. Press ESC to end the chain. Press ESC to end the chain. Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. connecting the column at B4. make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. click Grid. 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4.

7 beam had crossed grid A. If the W310x32. click Finish. click . 36 On the Options Bar. and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams. click Grid. 38 On the Options Bar.The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32. 844 | Chapter 25 Structural . it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first. 39 On the View toolbar. 37 Select grid B.7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly.

select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. 43 In the Type Selector. you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grids 4 and 5. 48 On the View toolbar. 46 Move the cursor to the right. double-click Level 2. click Modify. click Beam. 44 On the Options Bar. click . 45 Specify the beam start point at the centerline and endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 845 . 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5.Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints). 47 On the Design Bar. and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. In the steps that follow. 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select Girder for Usage.

select Girder. 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall centerline and grid 3. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region. Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 52 In the Type Selector. and select Chain. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall and grid A. for Usage. and click when it intersects grid 2. click Beam. you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. 846 | Chapter 25 Structural . double-click Level 2.Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. In the steps that follow. 53 On the Options Bar.

and click when it intersects grid 1. click . Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode.56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. 57 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 847 .

and purlins to the building model.7.58 On the File menu. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. Structural_tutorial. click Beam. 5 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it. Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. This project file is required. Dataset This exercise requires the project file.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser. Structural Framing. in its current state. under Families. click Save. click W310x32. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. In the next exercise. M_W-Wide Flange. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams. 4 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. 2 Zoom around the A1 . Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. 848 | Chapter 25 Structural . You also add joists and purlins to the building model. you add joists. while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. In this exercise. you replace some of the existing girders with trusses. Adding Joists and Purlins.B3 quadrants. For example. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid 1. You then create a joist array. under Floor Plans. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin.

click Modify. 8 With the beam selected. 7 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. click Array. This value was set automatically because when you created the beam. The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. according to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. the Automatic option was selected by default in the Options Bar. In addition. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. notice that the Structural Usage parameter value is Joist. click on the Options Bar. 10 Click OK. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary.6 On the Design Bar. Create a joist array 11 On the Edit menu. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 849 .

850 | Chapter 25 Structural . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . Clear Group and Associate. enter 1250 and press ENTER. This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A. Enter 14 for Number. 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. 13 Enter SI to snap only to intersections.12 On the Options Bar. Once the direction is set. Make sure the cursor is over grid A. Select 2nd for Move to. 14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point.

18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 851 . 17 Add a W310x32.Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.7 beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown. click Beam.

This is the array start point. Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage value. 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps. and color within the Object Styles dialog box. Clear Group and Associate. and click. style. Enter 7 for Number. 22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown.Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. and purlins. 21 On the Options Bar. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. click Array. 852 | Chapter 25 Structural . 20 On the Edit menu. joists. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . Select 2nd for Move to. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right.

The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. click . and click OK. 26 In the Filter dialog box. 25 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 853 . and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view. click . clear all options except Structural Framing.

28 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Save. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. This project file is required. In the next lesson. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels. click . to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 30 On the View toolbar. change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select Moment Connection Last Select Moment Connection First Click OK. you create new levels. and notice the connection symbols display. This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level. in its current state. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. 854 | Chapter 25 Structural . Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. In this exercise. You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. 31 On the File menu. 29 On the Design Bar. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. click Modify.

Click to add Level 3. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Structural_tutorial. under Views (all). Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser. These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels. You need at least 3 meters of space. 5 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2. 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2. and double-click Building Elevation. you create several new levels.Defining New Levels In this exercise. click Level.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 855 . select Make Plan View. 2 Select grid 1. expand Elevations.

click Save. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. you created three new levels. 856 | Chapter 25 Structural . Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar. Structural_tutorial. notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed. you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. In this exercise. Duplicating the Existing Design.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Each level is 3000 mm high. where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. click . 7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. These levels that are required in the next exercise. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. in its current state. This project file is required.In the Project Browser. 8 On the File menu.

it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. 7 In the Select Levels dialog box. click OK. and select Levels 3 and 4. click Modify. 5 On the Edit menu. 3 On the Edit menu. click Modify. 6 In the Select Levels dialog box.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. press and hold CTRL. click Copy to Clipboard. 8 On the Design Bar. select Level 2. Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Design Bar. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 857 . click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Make sure the entire building model is included.

In this exercise. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson. click Save.9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. You copied the Level 1 structure elements and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. in its current state. you create a framing elevation. This project file is required. 858 | Chapter 25 Structural . Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation. double-click Building Elevation. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. 10 On the File menu. In the next lesson. you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces.

and click. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. in the Project Browser. Elevation 1-a. 6 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Modify. click Framing Elevation. double-click Level 2.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 859 . 5 On the Design Bar. You can now view the new elevation. under Floor Plans. Structural_tutorial. 3 On the Options Bar. make sure Attach to Grid is selected. 4 Place the cursor over grid C.

Adding Structural Braces. You are ready to add the structural braces. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. click Save. This project file is required. In the next exercise.Notice the stick framing representation. you add c-channel bracing to the building model. In this exercise. You then array the braces to the remaining levels. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces. 860 | Chapter 25 Structural . Dataset This exercise requires the project file. in its current state. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse. Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial. 7 On the File menu. you add structural braces to the building model. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

you use point-to-point insertion. NOTE If necessary. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects. 3 In the Type Selector. When adding the braces. select the view crop box. and using the shape grips. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown. 5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects.4. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4. select M_C-Channel: C75x7. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Brace. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable. select the grids and drag the grid heads above level 5.Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 861 .

The second brace is displayed. Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar. Clear Group and Associate. click Array. 10 On the Edit menu. 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint. 9 Select both braces on Level 4. 11 On the Options Bar. Select Constrain. Select 2nd for Move to. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . The braces are arrayed to Level 1. 862 | Chapter 25 Structural . Enter 4 for Number. 7 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4. click Modify. 6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5.The brace displays. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point.

and click OK. select Structural Framing Tags. 15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. click Tag All Not Tagged. click . 16 On the View toolbar.14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 863 .

click Save. In this exercise.17 On the File menu. you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array. 864 | Chapter 25 Structural .

In this tutorial. and so on. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Autodesk Revit Building®. 865 .Sharing Projects 26 When working with large building projects. A workset is a collection of building elements. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. All other team members can view this workset. they cannot make changes to it. called Worksharing. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. You can enable Worksharing for any project. floors. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. however. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. doors. such as walls. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. stairs. Using Worksharing. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area.

This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Instead. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. such as annotations and dimensions. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog box for that element. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. In the lessons and exercises that follow. you must first enable Worksharing. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. After the project is shared. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. go to the Worksets dialog box. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you can select which worksets are open or closed.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. such as a tenant interior. When setting up Worksharing. Elements specific to a view. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. Working in a shared project In a shared project. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. After learning the fundamentals. When you are working on a shared project. 866 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Building by opening only those worksets required for your work. and click Editable. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. To make a workset editable. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. The first time you activate worksets within a project. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog box. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. In a multi-story structure. ■ Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. select the desired workset. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. In the next exercise. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. a dialog box displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. use Element Borrowing. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. you specify an active workset. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment.

If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Regardless of the default setting. ■ Team member roles Typically. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. Step 2: Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. the file is saved as the central file. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. not including the Project Standards. This allows Revit Building to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. As new members create worksets for their own use. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. ■ Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. When creating the new worksets. When you create a new workset. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. For example. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. each team member has control over a portion of the design. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. Generally. designers work in teams. for a typical project. In most projects. and View worksets. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. On this tab. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. Experience has shown that. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. Using Worksharing in a Project | 867 . if a workset named Interior was created. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members.■ Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. with each assigned a specific functional task. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. Therefore. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. You should have at least one workset for each person. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Shared Levels and Grids. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default.

You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. After saving to the central file. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. you should use it only when: ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. In this situation. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. within the local file.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. you can select which workset is active. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. make any required worksets editable. When you save to the central file. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file.Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. your changes propagate to the entire team. This is called “Selective Open. and then save the local file. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. When working remotely. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. However. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. save to the central file. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. however. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. you work no differently then you would in the office. When you save locally (to your local file). you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. if you know who checked out the required workset. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. your changes are saved. In this instance. On the Options Bar. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. you make that workset editable by you. you should then save to your local file. proceeds as usual. When finished or at regular intervals. This makes them available to other team members. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. Step 9: Work on the project Work on the project. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. or 868 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. When you save to the central file. As you work. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable.

You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. using VPN. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user.rvt file located in the Common folder. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. Using Worksharing in a Project | 869 . If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Building. To do this. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise.■ You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. you should check out the Materials workset." Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to default worksets. The Worksets dialog box is displayed. click Worksets. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. for instance. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. click the Training Files icon. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. In the next exercise. reload the latest changes from the central file. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. Alternatively. and make that workset editable. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. Open the c_Worksets. In this conceptual exercise. A dialog box displays suggesting that any user new to Worksharing should complete this training. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team.

you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. Therefore. select Workset1. Because the interior walls appear in many views. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. 10 Click New. imagine four users including yourself. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. and Views. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. clear Visible by default in all views. under Show. it is better to make them visible by default. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog box. and click OK. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. and notice all are editable by you. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. Your username displays as the present owner. Only User-Created worksets should display. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout. 4 In the Worksets dialog box. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. For training purposes. another is assigned the interior layout. click New. 870 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. a small number of team members are working on the building model. turn off Families. 6 Under Show. currently named Workset1. 13 Click Rename. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. Project Standards. you can rename the default workset.3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. In this case. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. In this simple training project. 9 Click OK. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names. 12 In the Worksets dialog box. a third team member is assigned furniture placement.

and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. click . select Interior Layout for Workset. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 18 On the Options Bar. and click OK. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. Using Worksharing in a Project | 871 . Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser. click . 22 On the Options Bar. 24 Select all of the interior elements. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. including the interior doors. You do. however. When you initially activate Worksharing. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. type the name Exterior Shell. under Identity Data. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. under Identity Data.14 In the Rename dialog box. stairs. expand Floor Plans. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. click OK. 20 Click OK. and double-click Level 1. In this training file. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. 15 In the Worksets dialog box. and walls. 17 In the drawing area. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. 21 Select one of the interior walls. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. expand Views (all).

select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. click .25 On the Options Bar. select Interior Layout for Workset. and click OK. click Save As. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. click Visibility/Graphics. select Interior Layout for Workset. 34 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. 27 On the View menu. 872 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . 33 Select Interior Layout. under Identity Data. 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. 36 On the Options Bar. 30 Click OK. double-click Level 2. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. and click OK. click the Worksets tab. The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. under Floor Plans. 35 In the drawing area. under Views (all). click . The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. select all of the interior elements of the building model. If any interior elements remain. 31 On the View menu. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. Create the central file 38 On the File menu. click the Worksets tab.

Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. 44 Click OK. make modifications to the building model. If you have not yet completed the exercise. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. make sure you remember the location of this central file. 6 In the Save As dialog box. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. you enabled Worksharing on a project. 2 In the Open dialog box. click Open. Next. click Worksets. 40 Click Save. under Open Worksets. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 45 On the File menu. please do so before continuing. Using Worksharing in a Project | 873 . Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. select the central file and. select all the User-Created worksets. click Save As. 4 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. you create your local file. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. and click OK. click Close. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. select Specify. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. and click Save. click Non Editable. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. In addition. check out worksets. 5 On the File menu. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. click Worksets. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. 7 In the File Save Options dialog box. Now that you have created the central file. click Options. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. In this exercise. 39 In the Save As dialog box. 3 Click Open. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets.Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. and click OK. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. 43 On the right side of the dialog box. 42 In the Worksets dialog box. any referenced workset is opened but hidden.

and click OK. 11 Click OK.The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. Before working on the model. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. select Interior Layout. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. Verify that it is cleared. If this is selected. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. 14 In the Project Browser. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. 17 On the Options Bar. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. 22 On the File menu. click Modify. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 13 On the Worksets toolbar. click . On the Options Bar. and select Yes for Editable. expand Views (all). In this case. and double-click Level 1. 21 Click OK. however. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. 23 Click OK. 20 On the Options Bar. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. notice the Editable Only option. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 874 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . under Identity Data. click . You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. Revit Building borrows it for you and applies your changes. 19 Under Constraints. In the Worksets dialog box. In this case. 10 In the Worksets dialog box. If it was owned by another user. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. Because this element is not owned by another user. click Worksets. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. you can still edit this wall. select Interior Layout for Name. 12 On the Window menu. expand Floor Plans. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable.

33 In the Type Selector. click Door. 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 30 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Type Selector.Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 25 Delete the door. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. The precise location is not important. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. select Basic Wall: Interior .126mm Partition (2-hr). and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. click Wall. Using Worksharing in a Project | 875 . 29 Using the following illustration as a guide.

When working in your local file. Whenever you save. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. displays the workset as well as the element type. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files.34 Using the following illustration as a guide. make elements editable. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. checked out worksets. and save locally immediately afterward. each user must check out worksets. leave this file open in its current state. and proceed to Creating a local copy. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. 36 In the Save to Central dialog box. two users access the central file through a network connection. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. Borrowed Elements is selected. add two door openings into the rooms you created. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. you should perform regular saves. save to central. click Save to Central. which matches the information in the Status Bar. 876 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . please do so before continuing. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. You modified the building model. For training purposes. The Save to Central dialog box is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 37 Click OK. you should relinquish all worksets. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. it is recommended. you created your local file. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. In this particular case. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. and reload the latest changes. skip the following section. If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. In addition. In this exercise. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. At the end of a work session. By default. If you have not yet completed these exercises. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. In the following section of this exercise. a tooltip. Throughout the process.

This file is for your use only. click Open. return to the Settings dialog box. User 2: Create a local file. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. You now have a local copy of the project. instructions are staggered. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 7 In the Open dialog box. click Worksets. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. Using Worksharing in a Project | 877 . 2 Start a new Revit Building session by double-clicking the Revit Building icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 12 In the File Save Options dialog box. and click OK. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. For training purposes. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. click Save As. select all the User-Created worksets. This is a system setting. under Username. In addition. 3 On the Settings menu. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. click Options. and click OK. 14 On the File menu. 16 Click OK. consider that person to be User 1. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. enter User 2. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. and select Yes for Editable. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. 10 On the File menu. one user has already created a local file. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. 4 Click the General Tab and. under Open Worksets. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. You are now the owner of that workset. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. and reset the Username to your computer login name. select the central file and.rvt. specifically sequenced. click Options. 11 In the Save As dialog box. and click Save. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. select Specify. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. 8 Click Open.Using a second Revit Building session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Building window. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. and click OK.

expand Views (all). 18 On the File menu. it becomes the active workset. 27 In the Save to Central dialog box. and double-click Level 1. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. expand Floor Plans. 26 On the File menu. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 22 Click OK. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. If you only have one workset checked out. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. 28 Click OK. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog box. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. expand Floor Plans. open it now. 878 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . and move it upward approximately 2 meters. If it is not open. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. select the lower exterior wall. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Project Browser. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. click Worksets. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. and double-click Level 1. modify the building model.User 1: Check out worksets. and select Yes for Editable. expand Views (all). click Save to Central.

48 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). The changes User 2 made are apparent. and click OK. Therefore. click Reload Latest. Click Yes. you should create a furniture plan view. right-click Level 1. and click OK. under Floor Plans. and click inside any room. 40 On the File menu. click the Worksets tab. and click OK. 44 In the Rename View dialog box. the Visible by default option was not selected. select Yes for Editable. However. 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 38 Click OK. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. 43 On the Project Browser. click Save to Central. 36 On the File menu. Before adding any furniture. and click Rename. Using Worksharing in a Project | 879 . you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 47 In the Type Selector. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. click Save to Central. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. click Worksets. 45 On the Project Browser.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. User 1: Reload latest worksets. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. and click Duplicate. 35 Using the following illustration as a guide. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. 41 Select Furniture Layout. 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 49 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. 34 Click OK. 42 On the Project Browser. 32 On the File menu. When you save to central. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. click Component. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. click Modify. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. choose any desk. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. 37 In the Save to Central dialog box. 33 In the Save to Central dialog box. right-click Copy of Level 1. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. 46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. under Floor Plans. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. under Floor Plans.

click Save to Central. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 67 Click OK. 59 In the Rename dialog box. leave this file open in its current state. 53 In the Save to Central dialog box. 880 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . and published their changes back to the central file. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. click Edit/New. click Reload Latest. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. and click Properties. and click OK. select Project Standards. leave this file open in its current state. 64 Click OK. 70 In the Save to Central dialog box.200mm. User 1: Reload latest. 62 In the Worksets dialog box. 54 Click OK. enter Exterior Wall .52 On the File menu. click Worksets. and click OK. In the final exercise of this tutorial. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. click Rename. click Save to Central. 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. 69 On the File menu. 57 In the Element Properties dialog box. Each user checked out worksets. select Reload Latest. under Show. 65 On the File menu. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully In this exercise. 61 On the File menu. 66 In the Save to Central dialog box. 60 Click OK twice. and save 68 On the File menu. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu. select Save to Central. 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. modified the building model. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. Checking out worksets. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. select the following.

two users are working on the same project with separate local files. At the appropriate point in this exercise. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. User 1: Create local file 6 For the sake of simplicity. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. finished the previous workset exercises. Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. click Save As. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. throughout this training. As each of you work. you save the dataset as a central file. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC).rvt file located in the Common folder. click the Training Files icon. you need to set up your central and local files. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. 11 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. and click OK. 9 In the Save As dialog box. NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location. The central file should still be open. 7 On the File menu. Click the General tab of the Options dialog box. 3 In the Save As dialog box. Each user must have network access to the central file. Set the Username to User 2. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. click Options. 10 In the File Save Options dialog box. and click OK. 4 In the File Save Options dialog box. and click OK. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). click Options. Open the c_Worksets Project-Central. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. This is the local file for User 1. and click Save. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. select Make this the Central location after save. and still have your local files open. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. ■ ■ ■ Using Worksharing in a Project | 881 . perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Building by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. This exercise requires two users and. click Options. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. click Save As. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. User 2: Create local file 12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. and these problems are rectified. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive.Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. On the Settings menu. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. click Open. 5 Click Save. In subsequent steps. There are specific instructions for each user.

24 Select the Exterior Shell workset. select the second window from the top. click Worksets. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. select the central file and under Open Worksets. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. under Floor Plans. 19 In the File Save Options dialog box. 25 Under Active Workset. select them. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 29 On the Project Browser. 27 In the Worksets dialog box. 15 Click Open. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 30 On the Options Bar. click Open. This is a system setting. 18 In the Save As dialog box. In addition. and then click OK. Checking out worksets 21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. select the Interior Layout workset. double-click Level 1. 31 On the left exterior wall. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own.This Revit Building session is now set up for User 2. You are now the owner of that workset. click Save As. You have created a local file which is for your use only. and click OK. and select Yes for Editable. User 2: Check out worksets 26 On the File menu. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 882 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . select Exterior Shell. and click OK. 14 In the Open dialog box. 17 On the File menu. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. and then click OK. 13 On the File menu. return to the Settings dialog box. click Worksets. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 23 In the Worksets dialog box. and select Yes for Editable. and click Open. and click Save. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Afterwards. verify that Editable Only is cleared. 28 Under Active Workset. You are now the owner of that workset. select Specify. Next. and reset the Username to your computer login name. User 1: Check out worksets 22 On the File menu. click Options. if any User-Created worksets are not open. select Interior Layout. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work.

After you submit the request. and click Editing Requests. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. Leave this dialog box open until User 1 grants permission. click the File menu. 33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. select the request submitted by User 2. click Check Now. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. 39 Click OK. A message informs you that your request has been granted. Using Worksharing in a Project | 883 . User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 34 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. 32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. 35 In the Editing Requests dialog box. User 2: Check for editability grant 38 In the Check Editability Grants dialog box.A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. At this point. 36 Click Grant. and notice the window is in the new location. 37 Click Close.

User 1 and 2: Save to Central. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. and the other user granted it. and click OK. 41 In the Save to Central dialog box. and close 40 On the File menu. In this multi-user exercise. 884 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . In this case. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 42 On the File menu. select the following. you requested permission to edit the element. to Local. click Close. select Save to Central.

In this tutorial. 885 . it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. Using design options. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs.Creating Multiple Design Options 27 When working with a building model. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option).

the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. In this particular case. The client has asked you to create various options. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. For example. With the second option. The first time you open the Design Options dialog box within a project.Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. under Option Set. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. 2 In the Design Options dialog box. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. you can edit it. 886 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. make your final design decision. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. click the Training Files icon. After you and the client agree on the final design. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). At any time in the design process. the only available command is to create a new option set. In addition. Open the m_Urban_House. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. you design each of the structural options. click New. After you create a design option. and delete the unwanted options from the project. In the second exercise. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. In the first exercise in this lesson. In the final exercise of this lesson. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. click Open.rvt file located in the Metric folder. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. each with multiple design options. you can have multiple sets of design options. you set up multiple design option sets. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes.

Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. click 12 On the Options Bar. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. click Edit Selected.TIP In this exercise. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. expand Views (all). 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. or add a dimension string between the columns. click Modify. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. and the third column centered between the two. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. expand Floor Plans. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. TIP To center the middle column. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. By selecting Multiple. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. In the following illustration. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. select: ■ ■ ■ . make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. 9 On the Design Bar. click Column. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 887 . either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. In this case. 4 In the Project Browser. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. therefore. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. 7 In the Type Selector. TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. the roof and structure systems must work together. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. 11 On the Edit toolbar. each is constructed for interchangeability. add three columns. and click Close. 5 On the View menu. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns.

and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. A copy of the three selected columns is added. 17 Zoom out and. click . add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. Notice the 12 columns that you added. 888 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options .15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. 18 On the View toolbar. using the same technique. Because of the size of the columns. When you are finished. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. they are difficult to see in this view. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process.

Next. Adding a beam is a two-click process. The first click specifies the beam start point. double-click TOP OF CORE. In it. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. click Beam. 19 In the Project Browser. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. 25 On the Edit toolbar. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 889 . 21 In the Type Selector. and click at its center to set the beam start point. you add the beams that span the columns. Zoom in on the upper right column. Use the following illustration as a guide. under Floor Plans. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. The second click specifies the end of the beam. click . 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. 23 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select Round Bar : 50mm.

and click the center point. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. 28 Zoom out. select: ■ ■ ■ Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. zoom into the left column. Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. move down to the next set of columns. 890 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . 30 On the View toolbar. and select the center of the column to add a copy. click .26 On the Options Bar. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns.

and click OK. 40 In the Rename dialog box. enter Beam for New. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 891 . NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. not a new option set. enter Brackets for New. click Rename. click Rename. 32 In the Design Options dialog box. 33 Click Finish Editing. under Option. click Rename. under Option. under Option. enter Structure for New. 37 Select Option 2 and. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 38 In the Rename dialog box. and click OK. 34 In the Design Options dialog box. under Option Set.Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. and click OK. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click New. 36 In the Rename dialog box.

41 Under Option Set.Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 52 Click Close. 51 Under Edit. click New. you create the second design option. and click OK. 892 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . click New. 45 Under Roofing. click Rename. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. under Option. under Structure. There should now be two roofing design options. select Option 1 (primary). click Rename. This allows you to more easily manage the project. enter Roofing for New. 47 Under Roofing. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. click Rename. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. name the option Sunscreen. 48 Under Option. it will resemble the following illustration. and click OK. Under Now Editing. name the option Louvers. 50 In the Design Options dialog box. select Edit Selected. 43 In the Rename dialog box. select Option 2. under Option Set. 46 Under Option. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. select Beam. When finished. and click OK. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed.

Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 893 .53 In the Project Browser. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. Refer to the following illustration. click Component. 55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click ROOF TERRACE. 58 On the Tools menu. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. 56 In the Type Selector. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. click Align. under Floor Plans. The second click represents the plane that is moved. select M_Roof Beam.

Click to indicate the end point of the move. click Modify. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks.60 After aligning the beam. The second click represents the move end point. 61 On the Design Bar. Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. on the Edit toolbar. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. The first click sets the move start point. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 894 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . 62 Select the beam and.

70 On the File menu. click Finish Editing.66 On the View toolbar. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the s